1662 MANUAL OPERATOR.pdf

Operator’ s HandbookAlcatel 1662SMC STM4/16 Compact Multiservice Node 1662SMC Rel.2.1 3AL 98104 ADAA Ed.01 RELATED TECHNICAL HANDBOOK: HANDBOOK 1662SMC Rel. 2.1 Technical Handbook ANV Part No. 3AL 98104 AAAA SAFETY RULES Before carrying out any installation, turn-on, tests & operation and maintenance operations, read carefully the Safety Rules described in Technical Handbook’ s section HANDBOOK GUIDE. HANDBOOK COMPOSITION (present edition) part No pages Numbered From 1/15 1/15 1/388 1/44 1/16 to 15/15 15/15 388/388 44/44 16/16 1 2 3 4 5 HANDBOOK GUIDE INTRODUCTION NE MANAGEMENT NE MAINTENANCE SIBDL 15 15 388 44 16 3AL 98104 ADAA Ed.01 Alcatel 1662SMC Rel2.1 Operator Handbook All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Alcatel 1662SMC Rel2.1 Handbook Guide 01 ED 2004-05-21 DATE Creation CHANGE NOTE APPROVED BY Ma Jing PREPARED BY Distribution: Internal External √ Edition 01 SC.1: HandBook Guide 3AL 98104 ADAA 1/15 1 HANDBOOK STRUCTURE AND CONFIGURATION CHECK · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3 1.1 1.2 1.3 General information· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3 Handbook applicability· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3 Purpose of the handbook · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3 1.4 Handbook configuration check · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 4 1.4.1 Notes on Ed.01 · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 4 2 All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. PRODUCT-RELEASE HANDBOOKS · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 5 SAFETY NORMS AND LABELS · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 8 3.1 3.2 First aid for electric shock · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 8 Norms and labels · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 8 3 4 5 HANDBOOK DESCRIPTION · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 9 GENERAL ON ALCATEL CUSTOMER DOCUMENTATION · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 12 5.1 5.2 5.3 Products, product-releases, versions and Customer Documentation· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 12 Handbook supply to Customers · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 12 Aims of standard Customer Documentation· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 12 5.4 Handbook Updating· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 12 5.4.1 Changes introduced in the same product-release (same handbook P/N)· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 13 5.4.2 Supplying updated handbooks to Customers · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 13 5.4.3 Changes due to a new product-release · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 13 5.5 Customer documentation supply on CD-ROM · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 13 5.5.1 Contents, creation and production of a CD-ROM · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 14 5.5.2 Use of the CD-ROM · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 14 5.5.3 CD-ROM identification · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 15 5.5.4 CD-ROM updating· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 15 Edition 01 SC.1: HandBook Guide 3AL 98104 ADAA 2/15 1 1.1 HANDBOOK STRUCTURE AND CONFIGURATION CHECK General information WARNING ALCATEL makes no warranty of any kind with regards to this manual, and specifically disclaims the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. ALCATEL will not be liable for errors contained herein or for damages, whether direct, indirect, consequential, incidental, or special, in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this material. All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. NOTICE The product specification and/or performance levels contained in this document are for information purposes only and are subject to change without notice. They do not represent any obligation on the part of ALCATEL. COPYRIGHT NOTIFICATION The technical information of this manual is the property of ALCATEL and must not be copied, reproduced or disclosed to a third party without written consent. 1.2 Handbook applicability This handbook applies to the following product-releases: PRODUCT 1662SMC RELEASE Rel.2.1 ANV P/N 3AL 98001 AAAA VERSION(N.B.) ANV P/N -3AL 98002 ACAA FACTORY P/N -FACTORY P/N -- PRODUCT 1662SMC For further information on the Alcatel software product and its physical distribution support refer to the “ Introduction”section. N.B. NOTES FOR HANDBOOKS RELEVANT TO SOFTWARE APPLICATIONS Handbooks relevant to software applications (typically the Operator’ s Handbooks) are not modified unless the new software “ version”distributed to Customers implies man-machine interface changes or in case of slight modifications not affecting the understanding of the explained procedures. Moreover, should the screen prints included in the handbook contain the product-release’ s “ version”marking, they are not replaced in the handbooks related to a subsequent version, if the screen contents are unchanged. 1.3 Purpose of the handbook Edition 01 SC.1: HandBook Guide 3AL 98104 ADAA 3/15 This handbook describes the operations concerning commissioning, operation and maintenance that the operators must carry out as indicated by the specific software application(s) referred to in this handbook This handbook must be used together with the associated Technical Handbook (see Table 1.) and the 1320CT associated documentation (see Table 5.) does not replicate information contained into it. In particular, all cautions relevant to safety, rules for EMC and ESD, as well as warnings regarding operations that may cause damages to the equipment, are not duplicated here, but must be retrieved from the Technical Handbook. All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. When using this handbook it is assumed that the Operators know: • The structure (hardware composition) and all the possible operating modes of the equipment (product-release) this handbook refers to. • How to use a PC and the Windows ambient applications 1.4 Handbook configuration check This handbook is a collection of documents (each contained in a specific section) that can have editions different from one another. The Edition of the whole handbook is that of section 1 (HANDBOOK GUIDE). The edition of the enclosed documents indicated in the following table is that of the corresponding original internal document. HANDBOOK EDITION REGISTER AND SECTION TITLE 1 HANDBOOK GUIDE 2 INTRODUCTION MANUAL 3 NE MANAGEMENT MANUAL 4 MAINTENANCE MANUAL 5 SIBDL MANUAL 01 02 03 04 05 SECTION EDITION 01 01 01 01 01 1.4.1 Notes on Ed.01 Ed.01 issued on May 2004 is the first released and validated version of the handbook. Edition 01 SC.1: HandBook Guide 3AL 98104 ADAA 4/15 2 PRODUCT-RELEASE HANDBOOKS The list of handbooks given here below is valid on the issue date of this Handbook and can be changed without any obligation for ALCATEL to update it in this Handbook. Some of the handbooks listed here below may not be available on the issue date of this Handbook. All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. The standard Customer Documentation in the English language for the equipment whose productrelease- version is stated in para.1.2 consists of the following handbooks: Table 1. Handbooks related to the specific product hardware REF HANDBOOK ANV Part No. FACTORY Part No. THIS HDBK [1] [2] 1662SMC Rel.2.1 Technical 3AL 98104 AAAA Handbook Provide information regarding Equipment description, Maintenance , Hardware setting documentation 1662SMC Rel.2.1 Installation 3AL 98104 ABAA Handbook Provide information regarding Equipment Installation 1662SMC Rel.2.1 3AL 98104 ACAA Turnup & Commissionig Handbook Provide information regarding Equipment Turn-On, Test and Operation [3] Table 2.Handbooks related to the specific product SW management and local product control REF HANDBOOK ANV Part No. FACTORY Part No. -THIS HDBK Or note [4] 1662SMC Rel.2.1 3AL 98104 ADAA CT Operator’ s Handbook Provides 1662SMC “ SDH”Craft Terminal screens and operational procedures Table 3. Handbooks related to ATM specific product SW REF [5] [6] HANDBOOK ANV Part No. FACTORY Part No. 957.140.552 J THIS HDBK Or note ATM Rel.1.0 Operator’ s 3AL 80730 AAAA Handbook ATM Rel.1.2 Operator’ s 3AL 80814 AAAA 957.140.652 W Handbook Provides ATM SMART Terminal screens and operational procedures Edition 01 SC.1: HandBook Guide 3AL 98104 ADAA 5/15 Table 4. Handbooks related to IP specific product SW REF [7] HANDBOOK ANV Part No. FACTORY Part No. 957.140.722 L THIS HDBK Or note IP Rel.1.0 3AL 81062 AAAA Operator’ s Handbook Provides ATM SMART Terminal screens and operational procedures All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Table 5. Handbooks common to Alcatel Network Elements using 1320CT platform REF HANDBOOK ANV Part No. FACTORY Part No. 957.130.542 E THIS HDBK 1320CT 3AL 79186 AAAA [8] Basic Operator’ s Handbook Provides general information and operational procedures common to all 1320CT (Craft terminal) of Alcatel InfoModel Network Elements. 1330AS Rel.5.1 Operator’ s 3AL 71079 AAAA 957.130.442 A Handbook Provides detailed information and operational procedures regarding the [9] alarm Surveillance software embedded in the 1320CT software package. Information about Historical Alarms and Network Element Symbols Management (Physical Network Management) are not valid for Craft Terminal. They are only used by Network Management. ELM Rel.5.0 Operator’ s 3AL 71081 AAAA 957.130.462 E Handbook [10] Provide detailed information and operational procedures regarding the Event Log Management software embedded in the 1320CT software package. Table 6. Documentation on CD-ROM REF CD-ROM TITLE ANV Part No. FACTORY Part No. [11] [12] 1662SMC Rel.2.1 CD-ROM3AL 98107AAAA DOC EN Contains, in electronic format, the following handbooks: REF. [1] to [4] Envisaged after the release of all handbooks 1320CT BASIC CD-ROM3AL 79549 AAAA 417.100.031 DOC EN Contains, in electronic format, the following handbooks: REF. [8] to [10] ATM Rel.1.1 CD-ROM DOC 3AL80739 AAAA 417.100.060 EN Contains, in electronic format, the following handbooks: REF. [5] Envisaged after the release of all handbooks ATM 1.2 CD-ROM-DOC EN 3AL 80815 AAAA 417.100.068 Contains, in electronic format, the following handbook: REF. [6] 01 [13] [14] Edition SC.1: HandBook Guide 3AL 98104 ADAA 6/15 [15] IP 1.0 CD-ROM-DOC EN 3AL 81063 AAAA 417.100.084 Contains, in electronic format, the following handbook: REF. [7] Table 7. Optional handbooks common to 16xxSM REF HANDBOOK ANV Part No. FACTORY Part No. 955.100.692 N THIS HDBK All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. [16] [17] S9-16xxSM 3AL 78901 AAAA System Installation Handbook Provides general installation rules necessary to install the Optinex family equipment in the S9 Rack. Optinex RACK-16xxSM 3AL 38207 AAAA 955.110.202 L System Installation Handbook Provides general installation rules necessary to install the Optinex family equipment in the Optinex Rack. Handbooks REF. [16] and [17] are available only on paper support N.B. Edition 01 SC.1: HandBook Guide 3AL 98104 ADAA 7/15 • Apply dry gauze on the burns. other than ALCATEL’ s. .3 3. protect yourself with dry material and free the patient from the conductor.. loaded with software applicative described in this Handbook. Edition 01 SC. If that is not possible. All rights reserved.1: HandBook Guide 3AL 98104 ADAA 8/15 .ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGERS (ESD) .COMPLIANCE WITH EUROPEAN NORMS.1 SAFETY NORMS AND LABELS First aid for electric shock Do not touch the patient with bare hands until the circuit has been opened. ARTIFICIAL RESPIRATION It is important to start mouth-to-mouth resuscitation at once and seek doctor help immediately. • Do not apply ointments or other oily substances. Passing on and copying of this document. TREATMENT OF BURNS This treatment should be used after the patient has regained consciousness. is supplied in the Constructor’ s technical documentation.ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY . 3.EQUIPMENT LABELS Identical or similar informa tion on Personal Computer.2 Norms and labels Refer to the Technical Handbook associated to ALCATEL’ s designed and manufactured equipment to obtain the following information: .SAFETY RULES • General rules • Harmful optical signals • Risk of explosion • Moving mechanical parts • Heat-radiating Mechanical Parts . WARNING: • Do not attempt to remove his clothing fro m the burnt parts. Work-Station etc. Open the circuit by switching off the line switches. It can also be employed while the artificial respiration is being applied (in this case there should be at least two persons present). use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. The Craft Terminal is introduced and the software product listed.Chapter 1: Introductio n. . . The Handbook Guide includes the following chapters: All rights reserved.Chapter 1: Introductio n. . This chapter gives information on the whole handbook application.Chapter 3: NE management supervision. Alarm Configuration etc). Definitions concerning the acronyms.Chapter 3: Acronyms and abbreviations.Chapter 4: Glossary of term s.Chapter 2: Product-release handbook s. composition and evolution. This chapter gives the structure of this manual.Chapter 2: General description of the Craft Terminal. . This chapter is dedicated to the NE states and NE access. . The Craft Terminal main functionality in the NE management (EML-USM) are listed and briefly described. This chapter describes how to display and set the input/output environmental alarm (housekeeping alarm). The acronyms used in all the operator manuals are listed. The Network Element Manual includes the following chapters: . .Chapter 5: General on Alcatel Customer Documentation SECTION 2: INTRODUCTION Manual The Introduction Manual describes the main features of the graphical interface and provides a general overview of the system architecture and the different functionalities provided by the Craft Terminal. The view organization is presented and the menus available listed and briefly described.Chapter 2: General introduction on views and menus. . Edition 01 SC. SECTION 3: NETWORK ELEMENT MANAGEMENT Manual The aim of this document is to describe the Craft Terminal view.Chapter 3: Safety norms and labels .Chapter 4: Handbook description . In this chapter general configuration referred to the equipment management are described (CT access.4 HANDBOOK DESCRIPTION This handbook is composed of the following Manuals: SECTION 1: HANDBOOK GUIDE (This document) The Handbook Guide gives general information on the application and use of the Handbook. . The Introduction Manual includes the following chapters: .Chapter 1:Handbook structure and configuration check. inserting operative information. Passing on and copying of this document.Chapter 5: Security Management.1: HandBook Guide 3AL 98104 ADAA 9/15 . In this chapter configuration referred to the Security management are described (ACD level and Manager list). . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.Chapter 6: External input and output points management. This chapter gives the structure of this manual.Chapter 4: NE management general configuration. . NE Time. . This chapter lists the handbooks the Operator should have in order to carry out the tasks allowed by the specific product-release this handbook refers to. .Chapter 13: Multiplex Section protection management.Chapter 4: Problems with Craft terminal. This chapter permits to manage the Overhead.Chapter 20: Software management.Chapter 6: Unit replacement with spare. . This chapter permits to update the NE by means download procedure and to manage NE software. The Hardware upgrading procedure is detailed. . The Maintenance Manual includes the following chapters: . . . This chapter gives the structure of this manual. inserting information useful to identify alarms and troubleshoot the NE. In this chapter are specified: access to the Alarm Surveillance to show the alarm condition. . The replacement procedure is detailed. .Chapter 11: Port view.Chapter 19: ATM/IP/ETH Configuration. thus having an overview of the complete signal flow of the various port.Chapter 3: Maintenance of the Personal Computer. This chapter permits to manage the EPS protection.Chapter 18: Synchronization management. setting the relevant configuration.Chapter 5: Troubleshooting (Corrective Maintenance). SECTION 4: NETWORK ELEM ENT MAINTENANCE Manual This document aims at introducing the Maintenance procedure. Edition 01 SC. . This chapter permits to show and set the Termination Point of the equipment. to access the port and to change the physical interface. . This chapter permits to show the physical port available in a specific board (alarm synthesis and port symbol).Chapter 14: Transmission view. access to the Event and Alarm Log file and Internal Link Monitor. This chapter describes the operations necessary for the ATM boards creation and the ATM/IP/ETH TTPs creation.Chapter 7: Diagnosis management. . SECTION 5: SIBDL Manual All rights reserved.Chapter 1: Introductio n. This chapter permits to set and show the transmission resources referred to the Port. In this chapter are presented the communication and routing parameters. abnormal condition list (as result of operator’ s command).Chapter 7: Upgrading with New Hardware. .1: HandBook Guide 3AL 98104 ADAA 10/15 . List the maintenance steps. This chapter deals mainly with the setting and changing of the boards present on the Equipment and undertaking board protection operations. setting the relevant configuration. Shut Cdown and restart of the PC is indicated. The Personal Computer manual is referred.Chapter 8: Communication and Routing management.Chapter 16: Overhead management.Chapter 10: Board view.Chapter 15: Cross connection management.Chapter 2: Maintenance introductio n. This chapter permits to set and show Synchronization parameters and status. .Chapter 9: Equipment management. This chapter permits to manage the connection of the paths. .. Detection location and correction of failure are presented.Chapter 12: Equipment protection management.Chapter 17: Performance Monitoring management. . concerning the OSI and IP communication protocols for the local NE. . This chapter permits to manage the MSP protection. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. . the OS and each other related NE in order to provide a global communication capabilities inside the network . This chapter permits to set and show Performance Monitoring parameters and data. . . Passing on and copying of this document. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.1: HandBook Guide 3AL 98104 ADAA 11/15 .Chapter 3: Configuration for SIBDL All rights reserved. The SIBDL Manual includes the following chapters: .This document describes the download procedure with SIBDL. Passing on and copying of this document.Chapter 1: Introduction . Edition 01 SC.Chapter 2: Download with SIBDL configuration . identify the possible network applications and the equipment performance which the specific “ product-release”has been designed. programming tools.2 Handbook supply to Customers Handbooks are not automatically delivered together with the equipment they refer to.5 5. a “ product-release”defines a set of hardware components and a software package which. A new “ version”of a “ product-release”may or may not produce a change in the status of the Customer Documentation set. Consequently. referred to hereafter. 5. In some cases a “ product-release”has further development steps. versions and Customer Documentation A“ product ”is defined by the network hierarchical level where it can be inserted and by the whole of performance and services for which it is meant.3 Aims of standard Customer Documentation Standard Customer Documentation. In particular the contents of the handbooks associated to the software applications focus on the explanation of the man. no supply to the Customers of design documentation (like software source programs. operating and maintaining the equipment according to Alcatel. named “ versions ” . commissioning. 5. is subjected to commercial criteria as far as contents. as a whole. if envisaged by the contract.1 GENERAL ON ALCATEL CUSTOMER DOCUMENTATION Products. etc. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.machine interface and of the operating procedures allowed by it. product-releases.Telecom Laboratory design choices. A“ product-release”has its own standard Customer Documentation.4 Handbook Updating The handbooks associated to the “ product-release”are listed in para. composed by one or more handbooks. Plant-dependent documentation. All rights reserved. must be always meant as plantindependent. formats and supply conditions are concerned (plantdependent documentation is not described here). engineered and marketed for. A“ product”evolves through successive “ product-releases ”which are the real products marketed for their delivery at a certain “ product-release”availability date. Passing on and copying of this document. that are born to improve or add some performance (mainly software) with respect to the previous version. Standard hardware and software documentation is meant to give the Customer personnel the possibility and the information necessary for installing.1: HandBook Guide 3AL 98104 ADAA 12/15 .5. or for bug fixing purposes.2. So.) is envisaged. The number of handbooks per type to be supplied must be decided at contract level.4. 5. as described in para. Each handbook is identified by: Edition 01 SC. is changed because modifications made concern technical contents. from Ed.The handbook name. In affected chapters of each section. Changes concerning the technical contents of the handbook cause the edition number increase (e.The handbook P/N.g.02 to Ed. . In this case the modified parts of the handbook are not listed. .01 to Ed. but not to the previous ones).02A). the main changes with respect to the previous edition are listed. hence the date. By updated handbook delivery it is meant the supply of a complete copy of the handbook new issue (supplying errata-corrige sheets is not envisaged).. In each section. The date on the handbook does not refer to the date of print but to the date on which the handbook source file has been completed and released for the production. .4. 5. In this case: • • • The table in para.g. if the screen contents are unchanged.The handbook issue date.2 Supplying updated handbooks to Customers Supplying updated handbooks to Customers who have already received previous issues is submitted to commercial criteria.02). revision bars on the left of the page indicate modifications in text and drawings (this is done after the first officially released and validated version). should the screen prints included in the handbook contain the product-release’ s “ version”marking.1: HandBook Guide 3AL 98104 ADAA 13/15 . 5.1. they are not replaced in the handbooks related to a subsequent versio n.3 Changes due to a new product-release A new product-release change the handbook P/N and the edition start from 01. Passing on and copying of this document. .g.4.The edition.Only the date changes (pointed out in the Table of Contents) when modifications are made to the editorial system not changing the technical contents of the handbook. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. . Slight changes (e. 5. NOTES FOR HANDBOOKS RELEVANT TO SOFTWARE APPLICATIONS Handbooks relevant to software applications (typically the Operator’ s Handbooks) are not modified unless the new software “ version”distributed to Customers implies manmachine interface changes or in case of slight modifications not affecting the understanding of the explained procedures.5 Edition Customer documentation supply on CD-ROM 01 SC.1 Changes introduced in the same product-release (same handbook P/N) The edition and date of issue might change on future handbook versions for the following reasons: . for corrections) maintain the same edition but with the addition of a version character (e.4 on page 5 indicates the section(s) edition change.The handbook edition (usually first edition=01). Moreover. 5. All rights reserved.The name of the “ product-release”(and “ version”when the handbook is applicable to the versions starting from it.4. from Ed. the Customer is allowed to read the handbooks on the PC/WS screen. so that the documentation present in the CD-ROMs is exactly the same the Customer would receive on paper. the same “ CD-ROM”can contain the documentation of different Product-release (-version) s for a certain language.1 Contents.1: HandBook Guide 3AL 98104 ADAA 14/15 . In some other cases. a “ CD-ROM”contains the documentation of one product-release(-version) and for a certain language. so that the CD-ROM can be produced and delivered to Customers.CD-ROMs for Network Elements products do not contain the documentation of system optional features (e. System Installation Handbooks related to racks that Customers could not buy from Alcatel together with the main equipment). use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.In the following “ CD-ROM”means Customer Documentation on “ CD-ROM” 5. 5. which installs the viewer in the PC or Unix WS environment. No additional information is added to each handbook. . the CD-ROM image is electronically transferred to the archive of the Production Department.free product. The files processed in this way are then transferred on a PC where the viewer (Interleaf-WorldView) is added and a master CD-ROM is recorded.5.g.2) utilization on a PC is: Operative System: Windows 95 or Windows NT 4 Processor: Pentium RAM: 32 Mbyte Disk space: 20Mbyte The set-up procedure is present in the booklet included in the CD-ROM box.2 Use of the CD-ROM The CD-ROM can be used both in PC and Unix WS environments. The minimum configuration for World View (Rel.CD-ROMs for Network Management products do not contain: • • The Installation Guides The documentation of system optional features that Customers could not buy from Alcatel together with the main applicative SW. After a complete functional check. As a general rule: All rights reserved.2. Passing on and copying of this document. After the set-up procedure. Suitable checks are made in order to have a virus.5. Edition 01 SC. creation and production of a CD-ROM In most cases.2. . using the navigation and zooming tools included in the viewer. and to print selected parts of the documentation through a local printer. A CD-ROM is obtained collecting various handbooks and processing them by Interleaf-World-View-Press after the manual addition of some hyperlinks that make the navigation through the various handbooks easier. Whenever a new editio n of any of such handbooks/documents is released in the Alcatel archive system. use and communication of its contents are not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel. indicating the list of CD-ROMs that must be updated to include the new editions of these handbooks/documents. Copyright notification WorldView: Copyright 1981-1996 INTERLEAF Inc. the updating of the single handbooks composing the collection. internally. . . END OF DOCUMENT Edition 01 SC. . is also loaded in the Alcatel-Information-System as a structured list. The use of WorldView is permitted only in association with the files contained in the CD-ROMs officially supplied by Alcatel. by the list of the source handbooks and documents (P/Ns and editions) by whose collection and processing the CD-ROM itself has been created.The name of the “ product-release(s)”(and “ version”when the CD-ROM is applicable to the versions starting from it.A writing indicating the language(s). 5.5. but not to the previous ones). Passing and copying of documents and files contained in the CD-ROMs officially supplied by Alcatel. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.The CD-ROM edition (usually first edition=01) 2) All rights reserved.5. And. with a certain delay.B. All rights reserved.xxx. that are printed both on the booklet and the CD-ROM upper surface: . Updating of CD-ROMs always follows. Passing on and copying of this document. the Alcatel-Information-System automatically rises a warning toward the Customer Documentation department.5.4 CD-ROM updating The list of source handbook/document P/Ns-editions indicated in previous para.3 point 2). This causes the planning and creation of a new edition of the CD-ROM.3 CD-ROM identification Each CD-ROM is identified: 1) By the following external identifiers.The CD-ROM P/N (Factory P/N 417.xxx x and ANV P/N). Alcatel documents: All rights reserved. 5.5.1: HandBook Guide 3AL 98104 ADAA 15/15 .N. in association with the CD-ROM’ s own P/N-edition. Passing on and copying of this document.1 Introduction 01 ED 2004-04-21 DATE Creation CHANGE NOTE APPROVED BY Ma Jing PREPARED BY Distribution: Internal External √ ED 01 SC. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.Alcatel 1662SMC Rel2.1 Operator Handbook All rights reserved.2:I ntroduction 3AL 98104 ADAA 1/15 . Alcatel 1662SMC Rel2. ...........................................................................................................................8 2.......4 2 All rights reserved....................................................................................4 1.........6 2..............7 2..................1.4 1.................................................5 2......................................1 Network Element management supervision ................1 Software product and licences description .....................2 READING RULES ........................2 ALCATEL SOFTWARE PRODUCT AND LICENCE DELI VERED TO THE CUSTOMER .3 1 INTRODUCTION .....................................................................9 3 4 ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS ..................................................................2.........4 External input and output point management.................3.........3 Security Management ..............................3...9 2.........7 Equipment and board management.....................................................................................................................................................................13 Synchronization management .........7 2...3...........................1 INTRODUCTION ..................................................3........................................4 1..............3 CRAFT TERMINAL MAIN FUNCTIONALITIES IN THE NE MANAGEMENT .............................................................................................................................................................9 2.....1........14 ATM/IP/ETH Configuration........10 Transmission management ...........4 1.....................3...................................7 2.............5 2..................................................9 Protection management...................................................................................4 1........................8 2.....................................12 ED 01 SC.........LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES .......................................................8 2..3................2 Software products and licences list and part numbers .........................................................8 Port management ..........................................7 2......3.......................3......5 2.......8 2...............................................2............................1 SCOPE.........11 Cross Connection management.....................1 Document scope ...............................2 Target audience....................................12 Performance monitoring management..........................................9 2........................................................................................................................................................... use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization...........2:I ntroduction 3AL 98104 ADAA 2/15 ..5 Diagnosis management ..............................................................9 2............................................10 GLOSSARY OF TERMS...3...............3..........................................................................................................3......3...................7 2.......... Passing on and copying of this document..15 Software management ................2..................................................7 2.................................................6 Communication and routing management ............5 2....... GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE CRAFT TERMINAL ...........................................................................................7 2................................3...............3.........................................................1 Menu options ............................................2 Network Element general configuration ..3.................... ...... Software products part numbers...................... Software licence part numbers...... Passing on and copying of this document...6 Table 2.........2:I ntroduction 3AL 98104 ADAA 3/15 ............6 All rights reserved..LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES TABLES Table 1........................................................................................................ use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization........................... ED 01 SC.... 1 1.1 INTRODUCTION Scope Document scope 1. Passing on and copying of this document. When a menu option is not detailed in a manual.1 Menu options All the manuals describe menus. 1.2 Target audience The Introduction Manual is intended for all users. All rights reserved.1.1 The Introduction Manual presents the Craft Terminal main functions and provides a general overview of the different functionalities provided by the ELM– USM of the Craft Terminal for Info Model NE. ED 01 SC. but not necessarily all the options of these menus. the information are surely given in another manual. The documents that should be read before starting this document are: –1320CT Basic Operator’ s Handbook 1.2.1. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.2:I ntroduction 3AL 98104 ADAA 4/15 .2 Reading rules 1. The general information of the Craft Terminal are presented in the Basic Craft Terminal Operator’ s Handbook. In the Basic Craft Terminal Operator’ s Handbook are described all the general description of use. From the Craft Terminal is possible to run another Specific Software application. The management main functions of the EML– USM are inserted at para.2 Alcatel software product and licence delivered to the customer 2.2 2. common to all the NE using the same Craft Terminal. A detailed description of the EML– USM screens is given in Section Ne Management of this handbook. The Craft Terminal characteristic (computer configuration) are listed in the Basic Craft Terminal Operator’ s Handbook. navigation. This Operator’ s Handbook deals with the EML– USM views of the Craft Terminal. The Network Element Synthesis view is the first view presented to the operator entering the application. 2. In this CD– ROM are contained: Software packages for NE management by means of the craft terminal Software package of the NE. 2.2. which the operator has to read before this Handbook. which directly permit to manage the Network Element.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE CRAFT TERMINAL Introduction The Craft Terminal is a project in charge of the local management of single network elements. the same handbook contains the detailed description of common operations as “ Installation”and common screens as “ Network Element Synthesis view” . providing ITU–compliant Information Model Interface to the Network Element. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Details information about Specific Application are described in the relevant Operator’ s Handbook (see Section 1 HANDBOOK GUIDE for the code). All rights reserved.2:I ntroduction 3AL 98104 ADAA 5/15 . The list and part numbers of the SDH software products distributed by Alcatel is inserted in para. etc. Multiple NE management up to 32 Network elements is possible obtaining a remote Craft Terminal application.3.1 Software product and licences description The software products are distributed by Alcatel in a CD– ROM. to be installed in the NE or update the NE (by means of ED 01 SC. Backup and Restore configuration files etc. Passing on and copying of this document. Further. Starting from this view it is possible login the NE and than enter the EML– USM views. This application is in charge of the ATM and IP management inside the NE such as ATM/IP cross– connection.2. rules.2 . 302 Y 700.304 S 700.2:I ntroduction 3AL 98104 ADAA 6/15 .2.100.303 Z 700.2 Software products and licences list and part numbers Every Software Product is identified by a denomination and a part number.1 LICENCE FEE SWL– RCT 1662SM– C Rel. 1 License alternative for Network Element software features: SWL– A: Full functionality set SWL– B: Improved functionality set SWL– C: Basic functionality set N. 2. 2. 1 1 1 2 2 N. Alcatel typically offers several software licenses on the software product (only one for this equipment) All rights reserved. thus following product evolution.download function) The software package used for management permits the dialogue between craft terminal and NE.B. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. to realize all the functions of the NES and EML– USM). listed on the following table.1 LICENCE FEE SWL– LCT 1662SM– C Rel.301 X 700. listed on the following table.1 LICENCE FEE ANV Part Number 3AL 80617 AA 3AL 80618 AA 3AL 80619 AA 3AL 80620 AA 3AL 80621 AA FACTORY Part Number 700. Software products part numbers Name SWP 1662SM– C R 2.200. Table 1. Every Software licence is identified by a denomination and a part number. 2 License alternative for Craft Terminal software features: SWL– LCT: Local Craft Terminal functionality SWL– RCT: Remote Craft Terminal functionality ED 01 SC. They are referred both to the Network Element software features and to the Craft Terminal software features.200. 2.B. 2. Table 2.200.305 T N.B.200.666 N N.200.1 LICENCE FEE SWL– B 1662SM– C Rel. Passing on and copying of this document. Software licence part numbers Name SWL– A 1662SM– C Rel. 2.1 CD– ROM ANV Part Number 3AL 98104 ADAA FACTORY Part Number 415. The software package used for updating the NE must be installed on the PC and then downloaded on the NE.B. 2.1 LICENCE FEE SWL– C 1662SM– C Rel. 3 Craft Terminal main functionalities in the NE management In this chapter. are described the main functionalities of the Craft Terminal. Alarms information are detailed in the Alarms Surveillance Manual –Abnormal Condition list ( as result of operator’ s commands) –Event log Manager Permits to have access to the Event Log file. MESA. –Display External points –Configure External points 2.3.4 External input and output point management Deals with housekeeping signals input from the external (station alarms) or forwarded (output) towards the external.3.2 Network Element general configuration Deals with the general configuration of the equipment. 2. the OS and each other related NE. – Restart NE 2. 7/15 . Different types of protection can be managed: –Local NE and OS addresses –NTP configurations –LAPD. Passing on and copying of this document.3.3. –Remote Inventory (” upload”and “ view”remote inventory) – Internal Link Monitor 2.3.2:I ntroduction 3AL 98104 ADAA All rights reserved.2. 2. –Craft Terminal access state (allow or inhibit) –NE Time management –Alarms Configuration Alarm Severity Assignment Profile management. Ethernet. The functionalities constitute the heading of each of the paragraphs below. Allow/Inhibit alarm notification. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. obtained by means EML– USM. –Alarm Surveillance The alarms concerning a particular managed entity will be represented in a synthetic way in all the views concerning the entity. RAP configurations ED 01 SC.5 Diagnosis management For real time alarm reporting and subsequent fault localization and correction. Alarm re– synchronization.6 Communication and routing management This deals with the configuration parameters concerning the communication protocols for the local NE. –Set Manager list –Set ACD level 2.3.3 Security Management Deals with the security configuration of the equipment. referred to the Network Element management views.1 Network Element management supervision Deals with the NE state and access. The Board view permits to access the Port view.2:I ntroduction 3AL 98104 ADAA All rights reserved.3.3. –Remote Inventory 2. –Synthesis of alarm and state condition –TP role. VC4). For each port a specific menu is available where various configuration of the specific port can be set. HOA ATM and IP).8 Port management This permits to set and show the transmission resources (TP) referred only to the port (SDH. PPI. connection. for example: –Automatic Laser Shutdown –MSP protection –Loopback management and configuration –Single fiber configuration –TP Frame Mode Configuration –Retiming –Ethernet Port Configuration Port view is also the entry point of other “ management functions” : –Performance Monitoring management –Cross Connection management For each port are presented: –The various ITU– T functional blocks (i. –Set / modify / remove boards or subrack –Software information of the selected board. Passing on and copying of this document. permitting to define the types of boards present. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. PPI. information For each port a specific menu is available similar to the Port view where various configuration of ED 01 SC.10 Transmission management This permits to cover the manageme nt of the transmission resources. PDH.–IP Configuration –Tunneling Configuration 2. –Details of alarm and state condition –TP role. VC4). etc. It is used to check the detailed alarm of each TP and to configure them (many options are the same of the Transmission view). connection.7 Equipment and board management Deals with the presentation of the equipment and the hierarchical tree structure. information 2. opening the views of all the specific ports of the NE (SDH and PDH).3. Different types of protection can be managed: –Equipment protection switching –Multiple Section Protection 2.3. 8/15 .9 Protection management This deals with the protection mechanism that is possible to configure in the NE. RST. For all the ports are presented: –The various ITU– T functional blocks (i.e. RST.e. etc. It supplies an overview of the complete signal flow. 826. or as a consequence of substitution with a spare. 2.13 Synchronization management Deals with the management of the timing.14 ATM/IP/ETH Configuration Describes the operations necessary for the ATM/IP/ETH boards and the ATM/IP/ETH TPs creation. –Timing source.the specific port can be set.3. thus following product evolution. managing the traffic flow. T5 and T6 configuration –Protection commands 2.3.15 Software management Deals with the manipulation of the software package within NE. –Software download refers to the NE software.3. Similar operation are made on the Overhead cross connections.3. Also Transmission view is than the entry point of other “ management functions”. Passing on and copying of this document.It consists of a set of functions that evaluate and report on the behavior of the NEs and their effectiveness relating to the communications taking place on the Network. which are the starting and terminating points of a transmission segment. T0.3. In this way the multiplex structures are created. –Set up the Performance Monitoring thresholds –Collect and display Performance Monitoring data –Performance monitoring history 2.12 Performance monitoring management This function deals with the set up. log and display performance data associated with the managed NE according ITU– T G. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. SSU. 2. T4. ED 01 SC.11 Cross Connection management This deals with the connection of all the Termination Point (TP).2:I ntroduction 3AL 98104 ADAA 9/15 . permitting to charge the software in the relevant NE to upgrade the NE software. –Back– up and restore on the MIB of the NE. collect. 2. –Create / modify cross connections –Activate / deactivate / switch cross connections All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.2:I ntroduction 3AL 98104 ADAA 10/15 .3 ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS AIS: Alarm Indication Signal APS: Automatic Protection Switching ASAP: Alarm Severity Assignment Profile ATM: Asynchronous Transfer Module All rights reserved. CD– ROM: Compact Disc Read Only Memory CCITT: Telegraph and Telephone International Consultative Committee CT: Craft Terminal DCN: Data Communications Network ECC: Embedded Communication Channels EML: Element Management Layer EPS: Equipment Protection Switching FAD: Functional Access Domain Gbit/s: Gigabits per second GNE: Gateway Network Element HMI: Human Machine Interface IEEE: Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IM: Information Manager Kbit/s: Kilobits per second LAN: Local Area Network LVC: Lower Order Virtual Container MAC: Media Access Control Mbit/s: Megabits per seconds MIB: Management Information Base MS: Multiplex Section ED 01 SC. MSP: Multiplex Section Protection NAD: Network Access Domain NAP: Network Access Point NE: Network Element NML: Network Management Layer All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document. NTP: Network Time Protocol OS: Operation System PI: Physical Interface SD: Signal Degrade SF: Signal Failure TMN: Telecommunications Management Network TN: Telecommunications Network TP: Termination Point USM: User Service Manager XC: Cross– Connection ED 01 SC.2:I ntroduction 3AL 98104 ADAA 11/15 . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Craft Terminal: Workstation or Personal computer (PC) from which local address to an NE is possible. Alarm Status: Identifies the type and severity of an occurring alarm. Passing on and copying of this document. Element Management Layer: This application is responsible for the configuration and management of Network Elements. During alarm configuration it is possible to set a maximum delay for alarm acknowledgement. They are electronic cards that fit into slots in the NE. Alarm Severity Assignment Profile: Function allowing the assignment of severities to the alarms depending on their probable causes. These communication channels are related to the QECC* protocols. Embedded Communication Channel: Communication channel used in conjunction with packet commuting networks (X25) to manage distant SDH networks. the operator has to acknowledge it to point out that he has seen it and that he will react in the right way. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. It can be used to configure or perform monitoring tasks on the NE. Administrator: A user who has access rights to all the Management Domains of the Craft Terminal product. He has access to the whole network and to all the management functionalities. Equipment Protection Switching: Used to provide protection for cards within an equipment to protect traffic in the event of card ED 01 SC. Is useful for stocking data due to its available memory space. Alarm: An alerting indication to a condition that may have an immediate or potentially negative impact on the state of an equipment or the CT. Compact Disk Read Only Memory: Data saving support from which the information can only be read.2:I ntroduction 3AL 98104 ADAA All rights reserved. The operator can decide whether or not the alarm clear has to be acknowledged. Board: A board is part of an NE. Cross– connection Cross– Connections provide the network with the Routing Capabilities.4 GLOSSARY OF TERMS Acknowledgment: When an alarm is taken into account by the application. this is the possibility of routing one signal to a particular destination. Digital Communication network: Communication Network in which the transmission of data is done in a digitized format. 12/15 . An alarm is characterized by an alarm begin and an alarm end. or on the network itself. Passing on and copying of this document. They can be configured by an operator to reject specified types of notifications and limit the processing that is applied to them. Management Domain: The Craft Terminal product is partitioned into management domains for functional proposes. Filter: They are related to the alarms or events generated on an NE or internally within the OS itself. all its records are deleted. operator commands and system alarms. When a log is flushed. Flushing: This deals with logs. Functional Access Domain: It defines the range of functions which are available to a specified user. Line Terminal: A line terminal is the end point of a communication link.2:I ntroduction 3AL 98104 ADAA 13/15 . Logs: Logs are files used to store history data concerning the incoming notifications.QECC*.failure. All rights reserved. International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee: Standard organization for telecommunications. They can undertake signal conversion functions (adapting a signal to two different transmission media) or multiplexing/demultiplexing functions. Now called the ITU– T (International Telecommunication Union). The size of the log can be configured. Human Machine Interface: It is the graphical user interface application through which the operators interact with the system. from the OS. of those NEs providing a QECC* interface. Each management domain is associated with functionalities that enable the operators to manage the NEs. it is used to transmit or receive signals. Media Access Control Address: Represents the Level 2 address for Local Area Networks. To do this it uses a QB3* interface and performs the conversion QB3* . History Report: This function enables operators to get information concerning performances. Gateway Network Element: It is a Network Element devoted to the control. security or alarms on entities composing the network. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. The operator specifies the time period for which he requires the report. ED 01 SC. Kilobits per second: Unit that correspond to the transmission of 10 3 bits every second. Gigabits per second: Unit that corresponds to the transmission of 10 9 bits every second. The 1353SH is an Operation System. A port is either a termination point or an origination point. Severity: Linked to alarms. signal loss monitoring and loopback functions. NADs are used to define the set of Network Elements that a user can manage.2:I ntroduction 3AL 98104 ADAA 14/15 . represents the section containing the multiplexed signals. Network Access Domain: Defined as a set of Network Elements. Repeater: Equipment used to regenerate a signal when it has travelled a long distance. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Operator: The end– user of the Craft Terminal. Physical Interface: Electrical or Electrical/Optical transformers that decouples the line signals and adapt the form of signal for further transmission.Megabits per second: Unit that corresponds to the transmission of 10 6 bits every second. Operation System: A system dedicated to the supervision of NEs in a standard way. Multiplexer: Equipment used to combine several signals to produce a single signal at a higher transmission rate and to decompose it back to the smaller rate signals. Port: A physical point at which the Network Element can be attached to a transmission medium. Multiplex Section: In general. Network Element: Either a telecommunication equipment or groups parts of a Telecommunication Network. All rights reserved. This functional block also manages clock extraction. using protocols and interfaces. Passing on and copying of this document. Network Management Level: Designates the management functions performed on networks elements assembled in a network. severities indicate the magnitude related to the failure. He supervises a part of the network that is dependant on his user profile. it offers to the operator a set of functions necessary to supervise the NEs. Notification: Spontaneous data received by the system concerning an NE. Have characteristics compliant with CCITT recommendations. Telecommunication Management Network: ED 01 SC. 2:I ntroduction 3AL 98104 ADAA 15/15 . Terminal Point: Describes either the origin or the termination of a signal in an equipment. the administrator must assign a profile to a UNIX user account by choosing one among the predefined profiles installed with Craft Terminal. To give user access to Craft Terminal functionality. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. END OF DOCUMENT ED 01 SC. They provide an organized network structure to achieve the interconnection of the different components of the TN and the services to process the information. User Service Manager: These are presentation processes used by the Craft Terminal to manage the Human Machine Interface and facilitate the interaction with the product. Passing on and copying of this document. Is related to a port. Provides the transmission. Telecommunication Network: Describes the network to be managed. A finite number of predefined user profiles is determined by a fixed set of FADs. the transport and the switching supports to the interconnected Network Elements. generate trouble indications. when exceeded. User Profile: Identifies the functionalities of the Craft Terminal to which a user has access. Thresholding: This is the assignment of a specified value to monitored parameters ( for example BIt Error Rates) that. All rights reserved. Wrapping: Wrapping is the technique that enables the most recent entries in a file to replace the oldest when a file is full.Defines the concept of interoperable management of TNs. 1 Operator Handbook All rights reserved. Alcatel 1662SMC Rel2.1 NE Management 01 ED 2004-04-21 DATE Creation CHANGE NOTE APPROVED BY Ma Jing PREPARED BY Distribution: Internal External √ ED 01 SC. Passing on and copying of this document. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.Alcatel 1662SMC Rel2.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 1/388 . ................2...................50 5................................1 EML--USM VIEW ORGANIZATION .10 EPS menu introduction....................................................................46 4...............38 4.............................................4 RESTART NE...............................................1 3......................................................................................................1.....................2...1..................................2 TERMINOLOGY...............................4 Supervision menu introduction ........15 1.......................3...2....................................................................3.........................................20 2.................................................................35 3.............................................23 2........................................................................................................................................................21 2......................................3 Diagnosis menu introduction.................... 2 GENERAL INTRODUCTION ON VIEWS AND MENUS .......................................................................................2...................................................................2.....2.................................15 1.............2 NE TIME MANAGEMENT ......................2 INTRODUCTION ON THE EML--USM MENU OPTIONS .....................22 2...........................1 Acronyms and abbreviations .......................................32 3 NE MANAGEMENT SUPERVISION ..............................2............LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES ...........................................1 Document scope...............3....15 1........1 ACCESS STATE (ALLOW OR INHIBIT NE CRAFT ACCESS) .....11 Transmission menu introduction ....22 2......................................2.....................16 2...................3 ADVICES ON NAVIGATION PRINCIPLES .....................8 Board menu introduction ............1 Views menu introduction ......................................................................................................................................................1.........................37 4...........2 SET MANAGER LIST ........3...........................................................................................................................15 1.....................3 ALARM CONFIGURATION ......................28 2...............................1 Switching from the OS to the Craft Terminal access state.......................3 Set SdhNE Alarms Severities .....................3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 2/388 .............................2.........................17 2..........22 2..................................................................................................................15 1...............................2................................9 Port menu introduction.......2.........................24 2............................................52 01 SC...................................................2 Configuration menu introduction ............................................5 MS-SPRing menu introduction .................................... use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization......35 NE SUPERVISION AND LOGIN .............................2 NE MANAGEMENT STATES ...............48 4......................26 2......12 Synchronization menu introduction .......................................................................................................................................................................................................7 Equipment menu introduction...2 Switching from the Craft Terminal access state back to the OS access state......................................15 1..........1........26 2....................................................................50 SET ACD LEVEL ..................................................2 Alarm Severity Assignment Profile Management (ASAP)............................................19 2............................................................5 Alarms re—synchronization .50 6 ED EXTERNAL INPUT AND OUTPUT POINTS MANAGEM ENT ......2 Target audience .....2 Glossary of terms.....................48 5 SECURITY MANAGEMENT .........................47 4.....40 4.................22 2.........................2.....28 2.......1 SCOPE .........4 Allow/Inhibit Alarms Notifications ...............15 All rights reserved......................1 Procedure to modify an ASAP....................................................................................40 4......................................2.................................13 External Points menu introduction...........37 4.............................8 1 INTRODUCTION ........................................ Passing on and copying of this document.................2..............................................37 4.....................................3...1 5........................................................................................................................................................................38 4...............................................................................41 4.....................................16 2................................................2.................35 4 NE MANAGEMENT GENERAL CONFIGURATION ......................6 Download menu introduction ......................................................... ...11 IP STATIC ROUTING CONFIGURATION ................................1 ED INTRODUCTION .......................................76 8.106 10......1..................3 INTERNAL LINK MONITOR .........................................64 7...................................................................................................2 SET AND CHANGE OR REMOVE BOARD/SUBRACK ....................65 8 COMMUNICATION AND ROUTING MANAGEMENT .......................................................................1 DISPLAYING EXTERNAL POINTS .........67 8....................................2 EXTERNAL POINTS CONFIGURATION ..67 8...................................................................................104 10 BOARD VIEW.........................................................................................................................................................................89 9 EQUIPMENT MANAGEMENT ....................................................................................................................98 9........................4........................................................................106 01 SC...............6....................................................................................................................4 BOARD ADMINISTRATIVE STATE ............2 COMMUNICATION AND ROUTING VIEWS.................1...........................3 CONNECT FAN TO CONGI BOARD ...............................60 7...........1............81 8........................................................54 7 DIAGNOSIS MANAGEMENT..... 3AL 98104 ADAA 3/388 ..........................................................2 Partitioning into separate Routing Domains....................100 9..... use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization...................................5 NTP SERVER CONFIGURATION ...........5 SOFTWARE DESCRIPTION .............................................4 OSI over IP tunneling on QB3 ...............................87 8..............................15 OSI OVER IP ....................................................................................................................................................................68 8.................8 REACHABLE ADDRESS PREFIXES CONFIGURATION ........................................................1 Expanding or reducing external points list ..13 IP ADDRESS CONFIGURATION OF POINT....................................................2 Setting a board out of service ..............91 9..............9 MANUAL ES ADJACENCIES TABLE CONFIGURATION .........................5...............67 8.....................................................................4 OS CONFIGURATION ....................100 9............................................................................................................................2 View Remote Inventory...............................52 6.....4 LOG BROWSING ..1 ALARMS SURVEILLANCE .........86 8..........................83 8...............................................102 9.......................................................3: NE MANAGEMENT All rights reserved..................................88 8...1............12 OSPF AREA TABLE CONFIGURATION .............................................................6 LAPD CONFIGURATION ...................7 SHOW SUPPORTING EQUIPMENT .......................................1 IP routing configuration for ATM/IP boards management ....................................91 9...........................1 Upload remote Inventory.....................................................................100 9...................................................................................................................69 8...........58 7..........................................................................................................................10.......................54 6....1 Setting a board in service ...................74 8....TO-POINT INTERFACES ................10 IP CONFIGURATION .....4..........7 ETHERNET CONFIGURATION .....1 INTRODUCTION AND NAVI GATION ............................................16 IP OVER OSI .....................................64 7..........1 OVERVIEW ON COMMUNICATION AND ROUTING DOMAIN ...........................................................................................................................84 8..........................................3 Consulting a Board's Administrative state.................72 8.....................82 8...3 LOCAL CONFIGURATION .....................................................6 REMOTE INVENTORY ..........................................................2 ABNORMAL CONDITION LIST ...................................................................................79 8.............................63 7.................3 IP over OSI tunneling for ATM/IP ......................................101 9........................................................................85 8..................61 7.......................................5 REMOTE INVENTORY ..84 8.................................. Passing on and copying of this document.................................102 9...5.................58 7....75 8.................96 9................70 8.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................1....................69 8......................................................................14 ISA BOARD IP ADDRESS ..........................4...............................................................................1 OSI Protocol on QB3/Qecc ................ ...........142 12 EQUIPMENT PROTECTION MANAGEMENT (EPS)... Passing on and copying of this document.....................7 TP FRAME MODE CONFIGURATION .......................................................................8 SHOW SUPPORTING BOARD ..........................................................................................4 Ms Configuration............................ use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization...............1 Automatic Laser Shutdown Configuration .................5 Line Length Configuration ..........................113 11............................158 13...........158 13..........................3 VIEW LAYOUT ............................................5 AU4 CONCATENATION .................................................132 11...........3 Single Fibber Configuration...................................................................................150 EPS OVERVIEW ..1 12.................4 12................................113 11............................................................................................................................................................6.....................................................................4 MSP MANAGEMENT .133 11...........2 Number of TPs Displayed in Transmission View ..............................................................................8 MSP OVERVIEW ...........6..........................................................140 11.. MULTIPLEX SECTION PROTECTION MANAGEMENT..................................1 Port Access .....................................................................................................................2......110 10.......................................176 14............................................................................................................................................9 LCAS Configuration ....................................................................................4..........6.......................144 MANAGEMENT : CONSULTING AND MODIFYING EPS .........................................................................................................1 View Description ............................135 11............6 Ethernet Port Configuration...........................................................................................................3 PORT VIEW MENU .................................................................................158 13....................139 11..............................175 14.........3........................................................................................................................................6..............................................................................................128 11............2.......115 11......................................5 MSP DELETE ........................................................149 SWITCHING EPS ...................3 12......................................175 14.....................4 SET RETIMING ....1 MSP modification ...............176 14............137 11....................................................................................................................................................................................................................6...........................................................................125 11...................1 INTRODUCTION ..........10.................................................................................................................129 11..........................................................................................122 11.164 13...........................................7 Ethernet Mapping Protocol ...2 MSP OPTIONS INTRODUCTION ....109 10.............177 ED 01 SC...............................10 NAVIGATE TO MONITORING VIEW ........................................................................................8 Control Path Activation.........................116 11...................................................2 PORT VIEW : ELEMENTS ON THE TP.......................................151 All rights reserved..............167 13................169 14 TRANSMISSION VIEW ...................128 11......................................................126 11.............................................118 11............................................................109 10....................................................................3......3 MSP CREATE ........................2 VIEW ELEMENTS ..................................................5 13 INTRODUCTION ....................165 13.............................................................................144 12......................3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 4/388 .................164 13...................................................................6 PHYSICAL M EDIA OPTION MENU .....162 13..................3 Show supporting equipment........................................................2........................................................6..............................................................6 DISPLAY OF P ROTECTION STATE ........................7 MSP COMMANDS .....................................................................2 BOARD VIEW MENU ................................................2 Show Optical Configuration ..................................2 12..........2 Change Physical Interface.........................................................145 CONFIGURATION : REVERTIVE AND WTR FOR EPS .......1 OVERVIEW ..............................159 13....111 11 PORT VIEW ...........................................121 11.............................6.....................9 NAVIGATE TO TRANSMISSION VIEW ......................6...................176 14........................................6..............1 ARCHITECTURE TYPES .................117 11..................................... ......................................................247 15...................................................................................239 15....................................................190 14................................178 14.................195 14...........................................................................................3 Low Order TP Configuration ......9...................226 15..............................................................189 14....................................................................................................................................194 14.........1 Search Criteria .............................1 INTRODUCTION ......4 Navigate to Port View............................179 14.............................................................194 14................................4 CREATE/MODIFY CROSS-CONNECTIONS ......3 Show Supported Board ........195 14.........................................................1 Set Domain................................1 Activate a Cross-Connection ........1..............12 LOOPBACK .........220 15...................3..........................1...........................................................1...........1 Loopback Configuration............................................................10..............................3...3......1..................................................2 Deactivate a Cross-Connection....................2 Configuration..............................................................6....1 Overview..................................................................................................................................................12.......211 15 CROSS-CONNECTION MANAGEMENT...............................................................5 Navigate to HOA Port .........6............4.........................................186 14.........................178 14.................................193 14..............................................247 15..........................2 OPERATIVE S EQUENCE TO EXECUTE CROSS-CONNECTIONS .....................................................................14.....................14.............................................................................................................197 14..........................................245 15...................................5...............4 TRANSMISSION VIEW ACCESS AND MENU ..................................10 MONITORING OPERATIONS .................................................4.5.....................3 CROSS-CONNECTIONS MANAGEMENT ..................................2 Create a Cross-Connection .......................... 3AL 98104 ADAA 5/388 ........................................................................177 14..........................................................1.............................................................213 15...................203 14.........................................................................4 Mapping Tables: TP Names ....3 Modify a Cross-Connection ...............13 PHYSICAL M EDIA ......206 14.......................13.....................1 TP Search...........................................................6 Cross-Connection Protection .........5 Cross-Connection Types .................................................................................7 TP FRAME MODE CONFIGURATION .....208 14.......................................232 15.............................179 14.......................................................14.1................................4 Dynamic View Behaviour ..........................................................................................................................................................................3: NE MANAGEMENT All rights reserved.............................................................................................5...............5 ADD TP .............................................................10.................................2 Loopback Management...............14.........................................................................222 15...........................8 TP THRESHOLD CONFIGURATION ..............................3 Definition of Termination Points (TP).............................11 STRUCTURE TPS ............14...........................................2 Disterminate TP.........................................210 14...............................213 15...........5 ACTIVATE/D EACTIVATE/D ELETE CROSS-CONNECTIONS ............228 15.2 Hide...........................................................................................................2 Multiplex Structures for SDH ...............................................................248 ED 01 SC........224 15.........216 15.....14........................3 Actions available .......................................................................230 15...................221 15...12.... use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization..........14 NAVIGATION COMMANDS..................................................................213 15......200 14....1 Creation/Deletion .............................3..................................213 15...........207 14.......9 TERMINATE/DISTERMINATE TP ................................................192 14.3 Naming TPs ..................................... Passing on and copying of this document.......................................................................................................1 Terminate TP .................4.......................................9..................196 14..........1 Cross-Connection Parameters......................................200 14.....1 Expand...............................................................................2 Cross-Connection List .233 15........................234 15...............................................................209 14.209 14...208 14.1 High Order TP Configuration ...................................................199 14..186 14....................................................................6 TP CONFIGURATION .................6.....2 J0 Section Trace management ...........................................3............................... ...........................................................295 18........301 18.4 DISPLAY HISTORY DATA .........6....................................................................267 17.........1.1....1....3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 6/388 ...............................................................288 18 SYNCHRONIZATION MANAGEMENT...........................................5 16.......................................270 17......6 SSU Configuration...........271 17.255 16.........264 OH PHONE PARAMETERS ...282 17........1.............................................................................285 17.........................................1 16.........................................1 INTRODUCTION .............................9 Performance Data Collection....6.............................................270 17......................................2 SYNCHRONIZATION MANAGEMENT ....12 Thresholds.....................................................................................248 15..............................................................................................................2......7 INTRODUCTION .........................................................295 18...............................................................................................6..................1 Overview.........293 18...........................................3 Display .................256 OH CROSS CONNECTION .............248 15...269 17........................................................280 17................................................1...................................1.........................................................................................253 16 All rights reserved...................................4 Synchronization Protection Commands ........................2 16................1 Creation ....6 Performance Monitoring on AU-PJE......270 17.....................................................................................2 CONFIGURATION ........................293 18.............................1.........................................................................270 17....................................................................272 17....273 17..............2...............................................................................5 End to End (e-e 24h) Performance Counting.......296 18...................................................................................2........................................................... Passing on and copying of this document....................................................3 Far End (FE) and Near End (NE) Performance Counting ..............................................................272 17.......................267 17...............................271 17..3 Timing Source Configuration .............................................................................................6 PM THRESHOLD TABLE CREATION / MODIFICATION / DISPLAY...........1.........248 15.........5..............................................................................................................................3 16..................5 PM THRESHOLD TABLE SELECTION ............2 Modification.........1...................263 OH TP DELETING ........ use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.........10 Data Collection...........1...........................5 Synchronization Configuration for T0/T4 and T4 squelch criteria ......1 Displaying the Synchronization View .............................................................................................11 Performance Monitoring History ........................302 18................1 Split a Cross-Connection .......................................2...285 17....................................................................................4 Bidirectional Counting (24 h Bi) for QoS.....................................252 15............................................................................298 18.......................................................................................278 17..................................................8 Performance Monitoring on 2 Mbit/s ISDN– PRA ..........................................................................................................................................................................2..........8 PRINT ..........4 16........6.............6 SPLIT AND JOIN CROSS-CONNECTIONS ............................250 15......1............................................................269 17...................................................................2........2 Supported Performance Counters ..................................................................................................................................15.............7 PROTECTION SWITCHING ..........................................................2 Join Two Cross-Connections ...................................287 17...................................................... OVERHEAD MANAGEMENT ..................9 SHOW CROSS-CONNECTED TPS ......267 17..............255 OVERHEAD VIEWS.303 ED 01 SC.......................................................265 17 PERFORMANCE MONITORING ..267 17................................255 OH CONNECTION OVERVIEW .........286 17...............6............................7 PM OVERVIEW ......................................7 Tandem Connection Termination (TCT) and Monitoring (TCM) ....................................................................................................250 15...................................................................................................................1 INTRODUCTION ........3 DISPLAY CURRENT DATA ......................257 OH TP CREATION .....2 Synchronization View .............................................................3 Delete a Cross-Connection ....1................6 16......... 3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 7/388 .....371 21 SOFTWARE MANAGEMENT ................................................................................................................................................................309 Transmission of SSM Quality Configuration..............................................................................375 21................2...............................4 Gigabit/s ETHERNET board ..........................................385 21.......1 GENERALITIES AND DESCRIPTIONS .............1 Software Download upgrade ........................314 19.........................................5............................................2 SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD OPERATIVE SEQUENCE..........375 21............................5........................................................................307 Set and Remove T0 Equal T4.................1 MS-SPRing Main Configuration....................................................................................................366 20.........384 21.................2..2 ATM/PR_EA/ETHERNET BOARD TTP S CREATION ....5 MS-SPRING PROTECTION STATUS AND COMMANDS FOR 2 FIBER TERRESTRIAL APPLICATION................325 19..................4 2F Protection Status Visualization ................4................................ Passing on and copying of this document..............................................360 20............4 MS-SPRING MANAGEMENT .........................338 All rights reserved...........................................1 MS-SPRING INTRODUCTION ..............................................................................................................................377 21........10 18......313 19....................................6 MIB MANAGEMENT ................................2 NE Software package installation procedure ..................................382 21.313 19.........................................2......................................2 External commands (2F) ............2.... 20 ISA/IP/ETH CONFIGURATION ..................................325 19...................3 OPERATIVE SEQUENCE TO CONFIGURE MS-SPRING.............363 20.................2......313 19.................305 Change 2MHz ->2Mbit.............376 21..................375 21.1 2-Fiber MS-SPRING connection configuration advices ...................................................304 Change T4 <-> T5..........313 19.................310 Show Timing Source .2...........................................................2.319 19..............................1 ATM boards ...334 19...2....3 10/100 Mbit/s fast ETHERNET board ..............360 20.........................1 INTRODUCTION ............3 SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD MANAGER MENU ......2 Squelching table with 2 fiber Terrestrial applications .................................8 18...........360 20................5 ES1-8FE boards...................1 Naming Conventions......2...................12 19 Remove Timing Reference ........................................................................3.................................................360 20........................................................ use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization..................... Deactivate and Delete commands .............................................................311 MS-SPRING MANAGEMENT..................2.............................2.......313 19......................................................................9 18.........................1 Operative sequence to configure 2-Fiber MS-SPRING...........4...............................1 2F MS-SPRing protection commands.................................7 18.......327 19....3 2F MS-SPRing dual protection commands........................................................1.....................................................................2..................................11 18..........................315 19.......18...................3 Activate................................................................................................5....313 19..370 20..................2 MS-SPRING CONNECTION CONFIGURATION ADVICES ............................................................................................326 19.................................4....................................................2........................................................................376 21..........5 SW PACKAGE ACTIVATION AND UNITS INFORMATION ...............2 PR_EA boards .......................................2......................................387 ED 01 SC...............................................5.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................4 INIT DOWNLOAD .............. .................................... Expanding or reducing the external points list..................... Routing sub domain organization example ............................47 Figure 16............. ....................................................................... Remote Inventory confirmation request......... Consulting and/or setting the local NE time........... Passing on and copying of this document.................63 Figure 34.....................51 Figure 21......................65 Figure 37......................................................................................................................................................................................... Restart NE confirmation.......LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES FIGURES Figure 1........................60 Figure 32.....47 Figure 15............................. Local Configuration .............64 Figure 36..................................................................65 Figure 38................ OS Configuration ................................78 ED 01 SC.......30 Figure 3.........................63 Figure 35.....................................................................54 Figure 24..................................................................................... Inhibit alarm notification.. 3AL 98104 ADAA 8/388 ........... NTP Server Configuration ................................56 Figure 28..............59 Figure 30.......................................................................................................................................74 Figure 42..........45 Figure 14.......... NE EML-USM Main view..........58 Figure 29.................................................................................... External output point configuration dialogue box (FLEXIBLE) .... Set Manager list............ Set ASAP dialogue box...... use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization...................3: NE MANAGEMENT All rights reserved............. .................................... NE Time dialogue box ........................................................................54 Figure 25.....................................................................................................................43 Figure 13..............................................70 Figure 40........................................................................... ..........................................................................................................................................50 Figure 20........ .....................................................................72 Figure 41......................... ...........48 Figure 18.............. Menu options flow chart –2 . Alarm Surveillance......................78 Figure 45.......................................................................................................... Menu options flow chart –3 ..............................................................................................................................................................................48 Figure 17..........................49 Figure 19............................ Comm/Routing options ....1............. Alarm Surveillance....................... Set SdhNE Alarms Severities................... Log Browsing option in Network Element context view.......................17 Figure 2.......... Remote Inventory completed .......... LAPD Configuration dialog.................................................................................................................... Allow alarm notifications ........................53 Figure 23....................................................................................................... ................. Menu options flow chart –4 .......................................... Example of abnormal condition list ........37 Figure 8.......... ....................................38 Figure 9................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. External input point configuration dialogue box.... Configuring external points........................... Creation LAPD Interface ...................55 Figure 27..................................................................................................32 Figure 6..........................75 Figure 43............. External points view .......... EML--USM main view organization..... View Remote Inventory............................................ ASAPs Management dialogue box.......55 Figure 26...... Example of loopback dialog window management ....................................39 Figure 10..........................................................36 Figure 7.................................................42 Figure 12.........41 Figure 11..............................................69 Figure 39.............................................................................................................. External output point configuration dialogue box (MANUAL) ..................60 Figure 31......................................................................................30 Figure 4....... Abnormal condition menu option ........................................ NE management: setting the access state.................31 Figure 5...52 Figure 22............ ASAP Edition dialogue box.76 Figure 44.. OSI over IP tunneling on QB3 ................................................................................. Configuring Alarm Severity Assignment Profile ..................................................... Set ACD level........................................................... Internal Link Monitor .......................... Alarm re--synchronizatio n .......................... Opening the external points view ................................ Menu options flow chart -...61 Figure 33....... ...................105 Figure 71............................................124 Figure 90.126 Figure 92........ OSI over IP Tunneling configuration......... OSPF Area Table Configuration...............125 Figure 91................................................................................................Rack level (with Fans subrack) ...3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 9/388 ..................................................................109 Figure 75..100 Figure 65............. ED 01 SC.... Equipment Overview -...........Figure 46..80 Figure 48..............................................83 Figure 51................Subracks level .................... Equipment Overview -................104 Figure 69...............................Subrack level....................................................................... Visualizing a port optical parameters .....96 Figure 62...............107 Figure 72....... RAP Configuration...................... Equipment menu .........................118 Figure 83............... Change Physical Interface ...................................................................................93 Figure 59.............................................................108 Figure 73............................. Example of a Port identification and alarm synthesis ...................... Equipment view: select the SDH port on a board ........................ Set Retiming enable (after) .....................123 Figure 89................................. Example of a concatenated AU4 transmission view..............................119 Figure 85.. ALS and Laser current state (exa mple) ..............................................122 Figure 88.................................102 Figure 67...................................................................................................................79 Figure 47...................................................................................128 Figure 94................................................................................................................ IP Static Routing Configuration...................................................................................................................92 Figure 58.................................................. Set Retiming enable (before).......................................................................................................................................................................................127 Figure 93.................................................................85 Figure 52............................ Board menu options ............. Ms Configuration .........................................................................................101 Figure 66............................................111 Figure 77.................................82 Figure 50........................94 Figure 60..... MESA Configuration ...........86 Figure 53.......................................................................... Example of a SDH Port View ........114 Figure 79................................. Select Printer ..................................... Automatic Laser Shutdown Management (after ALS Function delete)....... After “ Port Access”selection (example) ..................... Bidirectional Transmission on a single fiber.........................120 Figure 86........... Automatic Laser Shutdown Management ........115 Figure 80............................................................................................... AU4 concatenate/deconcatenate commands .. Equipment Overview ............................. Software Description dialogue box........................97 Figure 63................................ Select Output Format for file ............................................... G................118 Figure 84.......... ISA Board IP Address ...... Subrack level.......128 All rights reserved.......121 Figure 87............ The list of different boards relative to an NE slot (example) ............L2 only parameter........... Remove FAN connection from CONGI...........................116 Figure 81.................................. Examples of port menu options (SDH. Connect FAN to CONGI....................................................... Ethernet Configuration -.....................................................110 Figure 76.. Equipment Overview -... Equipment Overview................. Remote Inventory........................ Single Fiber Configuration View .............. Example of a concatenated AU4c .......................... Example of a Board View ......Rack level (without Fans subrack) ...............................................................112 Figure 78.................90 Figure 57.... Termination TP box..........................................783 Adaptation TP box..... IP over OS .....99 Figure 64....................................................................................................... Ethernet Configuration..103 Figure 68..................................................................................................................117 Figure 82.............................................................................................................................................95 Figure 61.........................88 Figure 55....... IP Address Configuration of Point-to-Point Interfaces .................................................................... PDH and ATM port) ... Consulting a board’ s administrative state ................. Confirmation to change LAPD Role ........................................................... Passing on and copying of this document................104 Figure 70......................................................................................................................................................... use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization..................................................88 Figure 56.............................................................. Physical media menu (SDH port example) ...................... ..............................................................81 Figure 49......................................................................................NE level........................... ...................... ......87 Figure 54................................................................................................109 Figure 74.................. .....................................................3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 10/388 ..........................................................170 Figure 136.........................137 Figure 104................... Board view after “ Open Board View”command ..................................................................... EPS Switch dialogue box....................... MSP Management View ........ Control Path Activation (example on Fast Ethernet board) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. LCAS Configuration.................................... Port view after “ Open Port View”commands ................................................................ EPS functional state from protecting active board view ............179 Figure 141........................ MSP overview .......... ...............................................................................................................................176 Figure 139.156 Figure 122........................................................................................ Initial State ............152 Figure 120............ After “ Navigate to Transmission view”selection....................149 Figure 117................................. PDH Line Length Configuration View .........142 Figure 108................... Switching EPS......................................................................................................... EPS overview ............................................................140 Figure 106...............159 Figure 124..........................................................................................129 Figure 96. Information dialog................................................................................132 Figure 100.............160 Figure 126.........................................................181 All rights reserved.................................. Symbols Used in Transmission View ........................................ Transmission View Area ........... LCAS Monitoring .................................... MSP schema creation Port dialog ...177 Figure 140................. TP Search ................................148 Figure 113...130 Figure 99..... EPS: board selection.......................................................................162 Figure 128........153 Figure 121...................... EPS Management dialogue box .............. ED 01 SC........ TP Frame Mode Configuration .... Ethernet Port Configuration Dialog ..........................................................................134 Figure 102........................................................ MSP Schema Creation ..........172 Figure 137................................................................................................................................................................... MSP Delete option................................................................................................................................................. View of Monitoring Operations (example) ........................................... Information Window ...............143 Figure 109................ “ Navigate to Transmission view”selection..........................................145 Figure 110.................. Consulting EPS ........................................ EPS Management dialogue box ..................................165 Figure 132..................................... TP Search Dialog....................................................180 Figure 143...... use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization............................... Passing on and copying of this document...............................129 Figure 97............................................................................. Gigabit Ethernet port view (example) ..........................164 Figure 130...........................174 Figure 138.....................169 Figure 135........................................................................................... MSP 1+1 standard protection schema (example)........... MSP Management Option...................................................138 Figure 105....159 Figure 125................................163 Figure 129.............. Board View Example........150 Figure 118.136 Figure 103...............180 Figure 142.............. EPS: choose protected ............................................................................................. Ethernet Port Configuration options ............. TP Search Dialog with Various TP Selections ...133 Figure 101.....................................................Figure 95...................... MSP Commands..... Transmission menu options ................. EPS functional state from protected active board view ..................................... MSP Schema Deletion ..............................................168 Figure 134..145 Figure 111...............................................................................................149 Figure 116............................. MSP Commands option ....165 Figure 131..................149 Figure 115 Configure EPS ............................................................................................................148 Figure 112................ Subrack view after “ Open Subrack View”command ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................130 Figure 98....................... MSP Protection Status Examples ................149 Figure 114......... EPS overview after Search (Example) ........161 Figure 127....................................141 Figure 107... MSP overview after Search (Example) ..............................157 Figure 123............. Ethernet Mapping Protocol (EXAMPLE) .................................................................................................................. MSP Create Option ..............................................................................................................167 Figure 133......................151 Figure 119................................................. ................................................................. Board History Check List..........239 Figure 189................................................................................................................................ Example of Broadcast Connection with Three Legs .........................205 Figure 166......... Cross-Connection Management Dialog (Initial State) ..................... Low Order TP Configuration...................................................................... Print to Printer ......Input Protected.................Input Protected. Display of POM and TCM/TCT in Port View (example)...3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 11/388 ...................................................................189 Figure 155...................................................... Loopback configurations ....236 Figure 187....... Passing on and copying of this document................ PDH Transport Level Diagram ................................................................... Bidirectional Connection .............................214 Figure 173............................ Degraded Signal Threshold selection.................................. Unidirectional Connection .....................................................709 ...............208 Figure 169...... Symbols in TP Search............................................ TP Frame Mode Configuration....228 Figure 184....................................................................................182 Figure 146..................................................188 Figure 154........................................................................................... ED 01 SC............ Create an Unprotected Broadcast Cross-Connection............................................................ TP Search Dialog with Different Filtering Options ................................................................224 Figure 183..............................190 Figure 156.................................... Example Printout .....232 Figure 186.........................................................................................................222 Figure 178......191 Figure 157........................................................................................................................................... use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.....................210 Figure 170.223 Figure 181....................184 Figure 148.. Creation of a Unidirectional...................201 Figure 164........................ Loopback Management ........................... Create a Protected Broadcast Cross-Connection........... Monitoring Operations Creation/Deletion ...................................238 Figure 188...... Cross connection management cascade menu .................................................................... Display of POM and TCM in Port View (example) ........................................................................................................ Protected Broadcast ...............................240 Figure 190...........196 Figure 160...................................... Loopback Transmission View..........................................212 Figure 172....................185 Figure 150..........................................................................215 Figure 174............ SDH Transport Level Diagram ....... Port Loopbacks View ..........................................194 Figure 159.... J1 hexadecimal editor (example).................. J0 Configuration................................... Frame Construction within the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy......................................... Navigate to HOA Port .. Cross-Connection Management Dialog (After Search) ............................................ Board View ........................224 Figure 182...............192 Figure 158..................................................... Non-Protected Cross-Connection.........................220 Figure 176.........................................................................................................................Normal............243 Figure 192....................... Create a Bidirectional Protected Cross-Connection..............197 Figure 161... Print to File .............................................................................................................. SDH Multiplex Structure according to ITU-T G........................................................................... High Order TP Configuration ................................................ Port View......... Drop and Continue ............................................................................. Cross-Connection Icons ............................. Bidirectional Connection.........206 Figure 168................................................................................ Search for Cross-Connection Output ........................”Dialog for Search Process............. Set Domain ...222 Figure 179.......................182 Figure 145................................................................................................. Bidirectional Connection ...............................................................203 Figure 165...... Loopback Port View.......................................................................................................187 Figure 153...................................230 Figure 185................................................................. Protection Criteria ............................ J2 hexadecimal editor ...............211 Figure 171.........185 Figure 151..............184 Figure 149..................................221 Figure 177.............................................................. Monitor Configuration .........................198 Figure 163................... TP Search Dialog with Status Information Displayed ..................197 Figure 162............................206 Figure 167..242 Figure 191........................Figure 144..............................................................219 Figure 175................223 Figure 180.................................................... “ Information.......................................................................................244 All rights reserved.....................................186 Figure 152........183 Figure 147.................................................................... ................... Far End Performance Monitoring Principles ................................................................................................. Transmission SSM Quality ...............................................247 Figure 195....................................................................................269 Figure 209................... Source configuration for ADM equipment .............. Passing on and copying of this document.................265 Figure 208............311 Figure 241.................... PM Overview Menu item......... Configuring the T0 or T4 SSM algorithm and the squelch criteria ......................................307 Figure 236..............................246 Figure 194..................................304 Figure 232................................................ Select Output Format ..............................................................................................258 Figure 203................................................................ Current PM Data Dialog (example) .....................................293 Figure 223.......................259 Figure 204....................... PM Threshold Table Select ..................................... T4 equal T0 setting...............................................282 Figure 213.................................... Protection Actions Dialog..... Add TP for PM Overview ..........................................................308 Figure 238......................................................................306 Figure 235...........................303 Figure 230..................... Show Cross Connected VC4 of an AU4 ....................................... use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.............. Synchronization Menu ........305 Figure 233............................. Synchronization View Example ............. Obtaining the synchronization view....................................... Create PM Threshold Table ................................................................................286 Figure 217..... Split/Join Unprotected Bidirectional Cross-Connection....290 Figure 220.. Unprotect a Unidirectional Cross-Connection....................................................... OH Search TP for creation................................................................... PM History Data Dialog (example) .................................252 Figure 199.........................................................309 Figure 239............................................................................................................................ Synchronization source removing confirmation................................ OH TP creation.....................................................308 Figure 237............................................................... PM Overview ........................................................ Change 2MHz -->2Mbit menu.......285 Figure 215...........................................251 Figure 198............................................................................................................................3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 12/388 ............275 Figure 210........................... Change T4 <-> T5 menu ....292 Figure 222... Synchronization source removing ................... Force and Manual commands ...........................................257 Figure 202........................................................................................................................................................................................300 Figure 228..... PM Configuration Dialog (example)...........276 Figure 211.................................. OH TP deleting........................................................................................ Lockout.................285 Figure 216..............................................299 Figure 227.284 Figure 214................................................................................................................ Change T4 <-> T5 confirmation message....................263 Figure 205... Modify PM Threshold Table .................264 Figure 206............................. Phone Parameters dialog window............... .........................................................................................................................Figure 193................250 Figure 197..... Protect one Leg of a Broadcast Connection................254 Figure 201................................................................................................................................................................ Synch...................... Internal organization of the SETS........................................................ Cross Connection Management for Overhead dialog....................................................... PM Port View ...................312 All rights reserved. ED 01 SC...... Overhead options ........289 Figure 219...................... SSU Configuration............................................ Change 2MHz -->2Mbit: command execution ...............................................249 Figure 196...................................................................... Main Cross-Connection for Overhead dialog .... Split/Join to Protected Bidirectional Cross-Connection.............................310 Figure 240..............280 Figure 212....288 Figure 218.................305 Figure 234.......................296 Figure 225............................................265 Figure 207........ Change T4 <-> T5: command execution...............................................................304 Figure 231................. Change 2MHz ->2Mbit confirmation message ...........................295 Figure 224..... PM Overview after add TP ..................... PM question dialog box (example) ................... PM Transmission View..................................301 Figure 229........................................................................298 Figure 226.... Timing Source Example ....................................................................................................253 Figure 200.................... Timing source configuration for cross-Connect equipments ........... Select Printer ....................................291 Figure 221............................................................................ ......... Squelching table of Node B. Tail-end / Head-end association........... Forced and Manual Commands (2F)..................................................314 Figure 243..........................3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 13/388 ....................... WTR dialog box..337 Figure 279.......... Ring map configuration....................................................... Protection states and commands "Idle" status (2F)... Lockout commands (2F) .....................................336 Figure 278.330 Figure 269....................................................................... Ring Protection with Force and Manual commands (2F) .................................................... East side ....... Display MS– SPRing pull down menu .......................................................326 Figure 263................................ Tail / head dual "Events" Protection table (2F)..334 Figure 276.........................325 Figure 261............................................................................................................................................ Tail-end / head-end protection with a lockout working and a one direction failure (2F) ........................................................................319 Figure 250......331 Figure 271.......................................... Automatic protection (tail/head) for double ring failure visualization ...................................................................................................................................... Lockout command and non-served failures (2F) ............................................................................................................ Ring network reference scheme (2F) ........................................... ED 01 SC...........327 Figure 265.............. Confirmation message .............................................................................. Example of confirmation dialog box...................................... East side .....322 Figure 256........ Protection and working channels where the lockout command can be activated (2F) 328 Figure 266......................... Protection status with double ring failure (reference point-SS-RN).................... Protection status with double ring failure (reference point-OS-AN) recovering to "idle" ................. Protection status with double ring failure (reference point -SS-AN).......................................................... Double manual ring command (reference point-SS-AN) .............. Squelching table of Node A.............................344 Figure 285...........................329 Figure 268..................................................321 Figure 254...............................................................340 Figure 281.............................................................342 Figure 283...................321 Figure 253.........335 Figure 277.......................................................................................347 Figure 288... Visualization of Automatic Protection Statuses (2F) ...................318 Figure 248.......320 Figure 252............................. Manual command applied at the "Reference Point" ring network ...................316 Figure 245.................... Clear WTR command (2F).........................346 Figure 287................................................................................................... Visualization of the Forced / Manual protection Statuses (2F)....................................... Squelching table of Node B........ East side ........343 Figure 284....................................................................................317 Figure 247.. Squelching table of Node A..... West side....................................................................... Connections of the ring .....319 Figure 249....................................... Ring Protection (2F) ... West side .......... East side .. MS-SPRing Management dialog box........ Example of error message ...345 Figure 286.............................................334 Figure 274................................................................................................. Creation Schema dialog box .......325 Figure 262........ Squelching table ....341 Figure 282.......331 Figure 270...................................322 Figure 255.....................................323 Figure 258. Ring protection with a lockout and a ring failure (2F)..........328 Figure 267................324 Figure 259........ Squelching table of Node D...................324 Figure 260...................320 Figure 251.........................333 Figure 273........................ use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.................................................................... Squelching table of Node C.. Manual and Force Span/Ring command (2F) ..............................334 Figure 275................................................................332 Figure 272...................... Activated MS-SPRing Management ....................... Squelching table of Node D.............................349 All rights reserved................................. West side ............................... Visualization of the Lockout command Statuses (2F) ............................................................... Squelching table of Node C............................................................................................................... Examples of Double ring failure ......... Automatic protection Bridge/Switch (2F) ............................................. Protection status with double ring failure (reference point-OS-AN).......................Figure 242....................... West side..............................323 Figure 257..........................................315 Figure 244...................317 Figure 246............... Example of a ring traffic .. Node Id and associated ring node position.....................327 Figure 264........................................................... Passing on and copying of this document.......................................338 Figure 280................................................................. ...... Threshold table entities association................388 All rights reserved.......................... ATM 4X4 MATRIX (with defined TPs) ............354 Figure 293.......................................... Software Download general principle ......................................................................... Software download in progress (example) ............................................................................................................................379 Figure 313..............................................353 Figure 292................................................. Detail software package (exa mple) ............................................ MPLS port view example......361 Figure 297......................... SDH TPs ..188 Table 3......................................... MSP commands and Auto-switch protection priority ....... SDH software package installation...................................... ATM software package installation (example) ................. Maximum Performance Parameter Values ...................368 Figure 304.......... ETH– MB (initial empty fieds) .367 Figure 303........................................................................................ OMSN enhanced software package creation (part A).............384 Figure 319..............................................................................364 Figure 300................ Automatic working ring and Lockout working Ring (reference point-SS-SN)............221 Table 5.....................382 Figure 317.............................. ETHERNET port view example ................................ PR_EA MATRIX (initial empty fields) ............. Navigate to ATM port view (example) ............................................369 Figure 305...................... Software Package Information dialogue box (example) ...............378 Figure 312........ PDH TPs ...................................................................................................................................... ES1-8FE MATRIX (with defined TPs) . Navigate to ETH port view (example) .......284 Table 8............... Control Path activation window (example).... Software Administration menu ................................................................................... TABLES Table 1... Modifiable Parameters....................................... ES1-8FE MATRIX (initial empty fields).............. OMSN enhanced software package creation (part B) ... Manual ring and Lockout Protection (reference point-SS-RN)................................................ NE MIB management .............................................................................245 Table 7..........287 ED 01 SC.............382 Figure 316.................... Enhanced software package (SDH + ATM) .....................................................................380 Figure 314............................................................................385 Figure 321..................................................................................372 Figure 307................................... Automatic working ring and Lockout Protection (reference point-OS-RN)......................................... Manual ring and Lockout Protection (reference point-SS-SN)................................ use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.................................................... Automatic working ring and Force Ring (reference point-SS-AN)........................................386 Figure 322..........................................365 Figure 301.358 Figure 296......................383 Figure 318............................................................................................................237 Table 6.....................................366 Figure 302................ Default value for C2/V5 Signal Label. Double manual ring command (reference point-OS-AN)......................................................................363 Figure 299....357 Figure 295.............169 Table 2............................................ SW Downloading dialogue box example ................................................ Optional and Mandatory Configurable Parameters for Cross-Connection Creation............378 Figure 311.........374 Figure 309.....................................373 Figure 308.......................375 Figure 310.......................220 Table 4....................................... Software Package Administration view .......... Download menu ......................... ATM 4X4 MATRIX (initial empty fields) ..............................3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 14/388 ...............................350 Figure 290...370 Figure 306...................................................................................................... Passing on and copying of this document..................387 Figure 323.....................................362 Figure 298.............................Figure 289.......... PR_EA MATRIX (with defined TPs) .......381 Figure 315.......................................................352 Figure 291..................................... Equipment view........................................................384 Figure 320... Automatic working ring and Manual Ring (reference point-OS-AN)....................... ETH– MB (with defined TPs) ............................................356 Figure 294............. 1.2 Terminology 1. configure and manipulate Network Elements (NEs) easily.2 Target audience This document is intended for the operators whose role is to manage the Network Elements.1.2. The menu items and the different actions that can be undertaken from these views are described in detail. ED 01 SC. 1.Introduction manual 1.1 Acronyms and abbreviations Refer to the Section Introduction manual. using the Craft Terminal (CT).1320CT Basic Operator’ s Handbook The documents of this Handbook that should be read before starting this document are: --.1 Document scope The aim of this document is to help the operator understand.1 INTRODUCTION Scope All rights reserved. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. 1.1 1. The different functionalities related to the equipment views.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 15/388 .1. The documents that should be read before starting this document are: --.2.2 Glossary of terms Refer to the Section Introduction manual. Passing on and copying of this document. is described. Information about the alarms and status is given in the Maintenance section of this handbook. l Domain alarm synthesis. Equipment. that differs according the NE type: -. except for the following information. than the accessible menu options are listed. The view organization is detailed in the Basic Craft Terminal Operator Handbook to which refer for the description.2 GENERAL INTRODUCTION ON VIEWS AND MENUS In this chapter the organization of the EML--USM screen. 2. presented after the NE login. l View area l Message/state area The Menu bar and the View area contained in the same NE view permits to perform all the configuration and supervision and display the specific selected item. All rights reserved. l Management status control panel l View title. Passing on and copying of this document. First is introduced the view organization.Domain alarm synthesis The different alarm domain type in which can be subdivided the NE is: Synchronization. At the end some further advice are given for Navigation principles. It contains the following fields. ED 01 SC.1 EML--USM view organization The EML--USM view (see Figure 1) is the first window presented to the operator after the login. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. External Point. and Transmission. which provide you with information needed to manage the NE: l Severity alarm synthesis.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 16/388 . . EML--USM main view organization. Figure 5.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 17/388 . Figure 4..2 Introduction on the EML--USM menu options The menu bar allows performing configuration and supervision functions on the Network Element. For each of them the relevant operative functions are briefly introduced. ED 01 SC.. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. This paragraph lists all the menu options and then more details on the relevant contained entries. 2. Figure 3. summarize the menu options.All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document. The flow charts of Figure 2.. Figure 1. • Diagnosis (third column). • Configuration (second column). To set the supervision states (i. They are not presented according the menu option sequence but according a functional subdivision. Passing on and copying of this document. only when a particular object or option is selected. in the menu bar there are other menus. From the Equipment view the Board view can be accessed. • Help (last column).3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 18/388 . All rights reserved.fiber MS_SPRing protection. presented as an alternative. EPS and cross-connection). setting the relevant configuration. Staring from the left . To set general configuration of the NE. ED 01 SC. which compose it. To activate the help. Craft Terminal enabling).e. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. • Supervision (fourth column). Further. In the menu bar there are permanent menu items always displayed. set TMN and Overhead parameters and to show or modify some parameters (performance monitoring. ATM/IP/ETH creation. To get information about the NE (alarms. performance monitoring.From chapter 3 on details and operative information on the all the views are given. To manage the NE as a whole. • Download (sixth column). remote inventory internal link monitor). the menus are: • Permanent Menus o Views (first column). • Other Menus o Equipment (eighth column). To manage the NE software (download. MIB management). MSP. To navigate among the views and set TMN and Overhead parameters. From the Equipment menu is also possible to start the Specific Terminal application for the ATM/IP traffic configuration. • MS_SPRing (fifth column) To manage the 2. setting the boards. 1 Views menu introduction This menu permits to navigate among the views and set some parameters. To manage the EPS protection. It also permits to manage the MSP protection setting the relevant configuration. It is the entry point for the Port view.2. 2. To show the physical port available in a specific board. • External Points (seventh column). • EPS (seventh column). • Port (seventh column). The "Equipment" menu and the "EPS" menu are then available on the menu bar. Passing on and copying of this document. All rights reserved. ED 01 SC. It permits to show and set the Termination Point of the equipment. Go to the next view. Further access the Performance Monitoring and permits navigation to the Board view. by means of the following entries: • • • Backward: Forward: Go back to the previous view. To show and modify synchronization parameters. The menu permits to define all the Cross Connections and manages the transmission resources. thus having an overview of the complete signal flow of the various port. To set and show (detailed alarm view) the transmission resources referred to the Port. setting the relevant configuration. setting the relevant configuration. • Transmission (seventh column). To show and modify housekeeping (environmental) alarms. • Synchronization (seventh column). use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.• Board (eighth column). It also permits to manage the MSP protection setting the relevant configuration. Equipment : Open the Equipment view.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 19/388 . opening the following menu options: . Used to configure the loopback command for commissioning or maintenance purposes. The "Synchronization" menu is then available on the menu bar Refresh : The aim of the refresh feature is to avoid a misalignment between the CT and the managed NE. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Used to define the parameters for NE and OS in the TMN. NE Time: Display and set the NE local time.Threshold table • • • • • • EPS overview: Allows displaying as well as search for EPS states. The "External Point" menu is then available on the menu bar. This misalignment is due to a loss of notifications coming from the NE. Performance: Manage the Performance Monitoring domain. Loopback Management: Enter the loopback management. opening the following menu options: • • • • Local configuration OS Configuration NTP Server Configuration Interfaces Configuration SC.2. Close : NE Close the EML-USM view. without stopping the supervision of the • • • All rights reserved.2 Configuration menu introduction This menu permits to set general configuration of the NE and to show or modify some parameters. Synchronization : Open the Synchronization view. Transmission : Open the Transmission view. It is equivalent to a double click on the selected object in the view area. Comm/Routing: Enter the Communication and Routing management. Passing on and copying of this document. Open Object : Navigate and show the contents of the selected object: the current view change. Set Alarm severities: Send the Alarm Severity Assignment Profile to the selected object Set SdhNe Alarm severities: Send the Alarm Severity Assignment Profile referred to the equipment level.3: NE MANAGEMENT • ED 01 3AL 98104 ADAA 20/388 . • • • 2. The "Transmission" menu is then available on the menu bar. by means of the following entries: • • • Alarm Severities : Manage the Alarm Severity Assignment Profile. Open in Window : Navigate and show the contents of the selected object. Set ACD level: Cross Connection Management: Manage the connection of the paths. Used to define the PM parameters.• External Points: Open the External Point view. The current view doesn't change but a new window with a new view is opened. by means of the following entries: • Alarms: Display the Alarms Surveillance information of the NE. Passing on and copying of this document.3: NE MANAGEMENT ED 01 3AL 98104 ADAA 21/388 . PM overview: Allows displaying performance overview. It opens the following menu options: NE alarms Object alarms Subtree alarms Equipment alarms Transmission alarms External Points alarms • Log Browsing : Manage the events stored in the NE. ISA Port Configuration: It allows to create the TPs for the ATM/IP/ETH connections 2. IP Configuration IP Static Routing Configuration OSPC Area Configuration IP Address Configuration of point-to-point interfaces ISA board IP address • Tunneling Configuration OSI Over IP IP over OSI • Overhead : Handle the operation on the Overhead bytes.• - LAPD Configuration Ethernet Configuration OSI Routing Configuration RAP Configuration MESA Configuration • All rights reserved. Used to define the parameters in the following menu options: OH Cross Connection OH Phone Parameter OH TP creation OH TP deleting • • • MSP overview: Allows displaying as well as search for MSP states. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. It opens the following menu options: Alarm Log Event Log SC.2.3 Diagnosis menu introduction This menu permits to get information about the NE. 2. Units info: Show the status of the software package installed in the NE memory banks. Mib management : Permits backup of NE software configuration and restore of backup file.4 Supervision menu introduction This menu permits to set the supervision states of the NE. Allow / Inhibits Notifs. It opens the following menu options: Resynchronize. Passing on and copying of this document. setting the boards.2. by means of the following entries: • • • Init download : Manage the software download. Abnormal Condition list Display the list of the object class (Loopback.7 Equipment menu introduction This menu permits to manage the NE as a whole. previously stored in the Craft Terminal by means the "upload remote inventory" performed in the "Supervisory" menu. ED 01 SC.• - Software Trace Log View Remote Inventory: Display the remote inventory data.fiber MS-SPRing protection (the last is not operative in current release).6 Download menu introduction This menu permits to manage the NE software. Internal Link Monitor: Indicates the preference of failure on Rx or Tx side for the signal incoming/outgoing from/to the active/standby MATRIX board. 2. Dataflow Analyzer. by means of the following entries: Main dialog for MS-SPRing management: Contains all the command to set and manage the MSSPRing 2.fiber and 4. upgrading the NE. It opens the following menu options: OS Requested • Alarms: Manage the alarms supervision of the NE. protection board) and the name of the boards that are in abnormal condition. Set Manager list Restart NE: Reset the NE software.2. • • • Upload Remote Inventory: Store the Remote Inventory data in the Craft Terminal.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 22/388 .5 MS-SPRing menu introduction This menu permits to age the 2.2.2. by means of the following entries: • Access State: Manage the supervision access to the NE. 2. setting the relevant configuration. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. • • • All rights reserved. which compose it. by means of the following entries: • Set : Add or change the board type (a list is proposed). with CT or OS. ALS Handler. it is possible to change from an Long and Short 1.B. Show supporting equipment: Navigate to the upper subrack level.8 Board menu introduction This menu permits to show the physical port available in a specific board (alarm synthesis and port symbol) and to access the port view.3: NE MANAGEMENT ED 3AL 98104 ADAA 23/388 . Set in service: Insert a lock symbol in the board. Reset: Not operative. Change Physical Interface: Change the SPI or PPI object into PPI or SPI (and vice versa) on the bi.2. • • Show supporting equipment: Navigate to the upper equipment level. Passing on and copying of this document. by means of the following entries: • • • Port Access: Access the "Port view".• Modify: Change the board type without previously remove it. This option is available only after having selected a CONGI board at Subrack level view. It opens the following menu options: Subrack level Board level • • • • • • All rights reserved. This option is available only after having selected a CONGI board at Subrack level view. Software description: Show information on the software of the board.B. Remote Inventory: Show the Remote Inventory data inserted in the equipment. • Connect FAN to CONGI # 12: Enable the management of the Fan subrack alarms on CONGI inserted in slot12.mode port (140Mbit/s / STM-1 switch able).B. Set out of service Delete the lock symbol in the board. It is only possible between compatible board or modules (ex. This option is available only at Subrack view level. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. • ISA Board IP Address: Used to define the ISA board IP address N. enabling changes.1 optical module) Remove: Remove the board. N. 2. 01 SC. N. Connect FAN to CONGI #10: Enable the management of the Fan subrack alarms on CONGI inserted in slot 10. In these views are presented only the TP specific of the port. Passing on and copying of this document. It opens the following options: Enable Disable • • • • • AU4 Concatenation: Only for SDH ports views. It permits navigation to the Transmission view. SUT . IP and ETHERNET). TP Threshold Configuration: Set B2 excessive BER and Signal Degraded parameter. The menu differs according the port type (SDH. but the available menu permits to configure the port (many setting options listed in the port menu are common with the "Transmission" view). It opens the following menu options: Creation / Deletion Configuration ED 01 SC. It opens the following options: Cross Connection Management Create Cross Connection Modify Cross Connection • Monitoring Operation : Set parameters for POM. 2. N. • TP configuration: Set parameters for the Overhead (Signal Label and Path Trace) on Synchronous TP's.• ISA Port Configuration: It allows creating the TPs for the ATM/IP/ETH connections.2. This menu is available only if an ATM/IP/ETH board has been equipped in the subrack. ATM.703/704 or ISDN-PRA management. by means of the entries indicated in the following list. The "Port view" is reached by means the Equipment menu and Board view to check the detailed alarms presented. HOA. Cross Connection: Manage the connection of the paths. PDH. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Not available for PDH port.B.9 Port menu introduction This menu permits to set and show the transmission resources (TP) referred to the Port. Set Retiming: Set the retiming feature applies to the outgoing 2Mbit/s. TP Frame Mode Configuration: Set parameters for 2Mbit/s G.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 24/388 . All rights reserved. 3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 25/388 . Used to configure the loopback command for commissioning or maintenance purposes: Port Loopback Configuration Loopback management All rights reserved.• Performance: Set and show Performance Monitoring parameters and data. It opens the following menu options: MSP Create MSP Management MSP Commands MSP Delete • Physical Media : Manage the physical setting of the TP of the ports. It opens the following menu options: Configure Monitoring Display Current Data Display History Data • Loopback : Enter the loopback management. It opens a menu which differs according the port type: • SDH port: • ALS Management Show Optical Configuration TX Quality Configuration Single Fiber Configuration LAPD Configuration Ms Configuration PDH port: Line Length Configuration HDSL Configuration NT G703/704 Configuration NT X21 Configuration • ETHERNET port: Remote Laser Management ALS Management Ethernet Port Configuration Ethernet Mapping protocol ISA Port Configuration Control Path Activation ED 01 SC. Only for SDH ports view. Passing on and copying of this document. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. • MSP: Manage the Multiplex Section Protection of the NE. Not applicable to HOA port. 11 Transmission menu introduction This menu permits to show and set the Termination Point of the equipment. than presented in the screen. Switch: Manage the EPS operator commands (Force. Lockout) 2. Manual. It opens the following menu options: Lower TP Upper TP Selected TP • • TP configuration: Set parameters for the Signal Label and Path trace. TP Frame Mode Configuration: Set parameters for 2Mbit/s G. Only for PDH ports views. TP Threshold configuration: Set B2 Ex BER and Signal Degrade threshold. It opens the following menu options: Next level of lower TP All lower TP Next level of upper TP All upper TP • Hide: Remove the TP from the screen of the Transmission view.2.• • • Show supporting board: Navigate to the upper board level. opening all TP's Navigate to monitoring view: permit to show for a selected TP the related POM/SUT/TCM and TCT object if present. Configure: Set revertive / not revertive and WTR parameters. The menu lists the following entries: • • Add TP: Search and add TP to the transmission view.10 EPS menu introduction This menu permits to manage the EPS protection. by means of the following entries: All rights reserved. Terminate TP: Terminate the AU4-CTP paths. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Expand: Display the TP's related to a selected TP. Navigate to Transmission view: permit to show a complete overview about the signal flow.703/704 or ISDN-PRA management.3: NE MANAGEMENT • • ED 3AL 98104 ADAA 26/388 . The menu permits to define all the Cross Connections and manages the transmission resources. Further access the Performance Monitoring and manage Multiplex Section Protections and Loopbacks functions. Passing on and copying of this document. thus having an overview of the complete signal flow of the various port. 01 SC. • • • Management: Set EPS protections. It permits navigation to the Port view. 2. setting the relevant configuration.2. setting the relevant configuration. SUT.• • • Disterminate TP: Disterminate the AU4-CTP paths. TU3. • Monitoring Operation: Set parameters for POM. AU4 Concatenation: Only for SDH ports views. It opens the following menu options: ALS Management Show Optical Configuration TX Quality Configuration Single Fiber Configuration Extra traffic Regeneration Section management Line Length Configuration Set Domain HDSL Configuration NT Configuration X21 Configuration • MSP: Manage the Multiplex Section Protection of the NE. Passing on and copying of this document. It opens the following menu options: Cross Connection Management Create Cross Connection Modify Cross Connection Port Switch Over Show Cross Connected TP's All rights reserved. It opens the following menu options: Creation / deletion Configuration • Performance: Set and show Performance Monitoring parameters and data. VC3/VC4. It opens the following menu options: MSP Create MSP Management MSP Commands ED 01 SC. Used to configure the loopback command for commissioning or maintenance purposes: It opens the following menu options: Port Loopback Configuration Loopback management • Physical Media : Manage the TP physical setting. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. It opens the following menu options: Configure Monitoring Display Current Data Display History Data • • Structure TP's: Define the structure of a selected TP (TU2. Cross Connection: Manage the connection of the paths.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 27/388 . VC12) Loopback : Enter the loopback management. TU12. Change 2MHx->2Mbit : Change the source of a protection unit from 2Mhz to 2Mbit and vice versa. Set T0 Equal T4 Remove T0 Equal T4 Transmitted SSM Quality Configuration: Set SSM quality transmitted on the selected T1 SDH timing reference.2. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 28/388 . by means of the following entries: All rights reserved. lockout) for the selected timing reference. • • Timing Source Configuration: Set timing source priority and quality for the selected input reference. T4 Configuration: Enable/disable SSM. setting the relevant configuration.13 External Points menu introduction This menu permits to display and set the input/output environmental alarm (housekeeping alarm). manual.703/704 or ISDN-PRA management. • • • • • • • • • • • • 2. T0 TEST Configuration: Not used.• • - MSP Delete NE MSP synthesis Show supported board: Navigate to the board supporting the selected TP Navigate to Port view: Navigate to the port supporting the selected TP 2. Show Timing Source: Show the "port view" related to the selected timing reference. It opens the following menu options: Show external Input Points Show external Output Points Show all external Points ED 01 SC.2. WTR and Squelch Criteria on the T4 synchronization source. Passing on and copying of this document. Display: Show the list of the input/output environmental alarm. Only for PDH ports views.12 Synchronization menu introduction This menu permits to set and show the Synchronization parameters and status. SSU Configuration: Set NE single or with SSU. by means of the following entries: • • Configuration: Set the input/output environmental alarm. Remove Timing Reference Change T4<->T5: Change the synchronization physical interface from 2MHz (T4) to 2Mbit/s (T5) without traffic”and vice-versa. T0 Configuration: Enable/disable SSM and WTR on the T0 synchronization source. Protection Command: Manage commands (force. Frame Mode Configuration: Set parameters for 2Mbit/s G. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. ED 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 29/388 . Passing on and copying of this document.All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 30/388 .1 Figure 3. Menu options flow chart –2 01 SC. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. ED Figure 2.All rights reserved. Menu options flow chart -. 3: NE MANAGEMENT Figure 4. ED 01 SC. Passing on and copying of this document. Menu options flow chart –3 3AL 98104 ADAA 31/388 .All rights reserved. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Menu options flow chart –4 2. Passing on and copying of this document.3 Advices on Navigation principles Navigation rules are the same for all the NE using the same Craft Terminal Info Model. This general rules are described in the "Basic Craft Terminal Operator Handbook ". use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.All rights reserved. In this paragraphs are instead inserted menu options typical for this NE involved in Navigation and example of Navigation.3: NE MANAGEMENT ED 3AL 98104 ADAA 32/388 . To reach a particular view of the NE there are several ways (navigation is also possible mixing the different ways): • • Double click on the selected object Select the object and use the Open object or Open in Window option of the View pull down menu 01 SC. Figure 5. Cross Connection . ED 01 SC.e.Cross Connection .Equipment pull down menu Double click on Board Select the Board to access the Board view Open Board . Views Navigation The first level of the "Equipment view" representation will be displayed directly into the current window.Create Cross Connection pull down menu • Third navigation path: Open Configuration . EXAMPLE: to obtain the "Create Cross Connection" window: • First navigation path: Open View .Transmission pull down menu Open Transmission .Cross Connection Management pull down menu Select Create option in the presented window • Second navigation path: Open View . immediately after the NE login. The Equipment view enables a fast navigation through all levels of the equipment hierarchy.Cross Connection Management pull down menu Select Create option in the presented window The menu structure also permits to pass from a view menu to another (i.Port Access pull down menu Open Port . The View pull down menu permits to show the following menus: Equipment Transmission Synchronization External Points The menu structure permits to open the same window following several menu paths. Passing on and copying of this document.• Use the Menu option tree structure. from "port view" to “ board view" or to "transmission view") thus facilitating the operators activity.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 33/388 . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. All rights reserved. In the Rack Level view two subrack are presented: . Passing on and copying of this document.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 34/388 . the board level of the Equipment view can be reached. ED 01 SC. N. named SR62C (Example) .At the bottom the Fans Subrack. It is also possible to: . the Equipment level view is presented.B.Go back to the previous view. selecting in the Rack level view the Show supporting equipment option from the Equipment menu. Further.At the top the 1662SMC subrack. (Example) Further.Go to the next view. by selecting the Forward option from the view menu. by double clicking on a port body contained in the board. Double clicking on the objects performs the navigation through different levels of the NE hierarchy: • • • All rights reserved. It is possible to go back to the upper level of representation by pressing the <ESC> key on the keyboard. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.Navigation is done from higher to lower levels. The port view displays the inner TPs. by selecting the Backward option from the views menu . the port level of the Equipment view can be reached. named SRFAN (Example) The Fans Subrack presence is managed with the Set option as for the boards of the 1662SMC Subrack. Selecting in the first level of the Equipment view the Show supporting equipment option from the Equipment menu. the Rack level view (Example) is presented. The NE hierarchy is generally organized in the following way: Subrack > board > port > TP. • The first level shows the subrack level of the Equipment view By double clicking on a board body. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Operating with the Craft Terminal the NE can present different management states according to the condition of the connection (supervision. Any disruption in the communication link between the CT and the NE results in an update of the management states when the CT has detected the communication failure. Passing on and copying of this document. ED 01 SC. selecting it and activating "Supervision" and "Login". All the information referred to the management states are inserted in the Basic Craft Terminal Operator’ s Handbook.3 NE MANAGEMENT SUPERVISION This chapter is dedicated to the NE states and NE access. as described in the Basic Craft Terminal Operator's Handbook. 3. local access. connection state. Also general Alarm status is presented. Management states are present at Network Element Synthesis view level and at USM--EML view level. The elementary building blocks of any telecommunication network are the Network Elements (NEs). 3.2 NE supervision and login The Network Element Synthesis views enable you to get access to the current NE EML-USM view described in this handbook. etc).1 NE management states All rights reserved.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 35/388 . The EML-USM Main view is presented as for the following figure. The Network Element Synthesis views enable you to work on local or remote NE. All rights reserved. NE EML-USM Main view 3AL 98104 ADAA 36/388 . ED 01 SC. Passing on and copying of this document.3: NE MANAGEMENT Figure 6. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. To control the competition of the OS and the CT. which accept or refuse it.1.4 NE MANAGEMENT GENERAL CONFIGURATION In this chapter general configuration referred to the equipment management are described (Craft Terminal access. Then select the Requested option from the Access State cascading menu as shown in the following figure. NE Time. The Craft Terminal can manage by the OS or the NE.1 Access state (allow or inhibit NE Craft access) All rights reserved. Switching back to the OS access state.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 37/388 . Passing on and copying of this document. If the LAC is "access denied" that means the OS manages the NE and the CT is not allowed to modify NE configuration (it can only "read"). These services includes: • • • Reception and processing of alarms. 4. NE management: setting the access state. Performance processing on TPs. If the LAC is "requested" that means the CT has requested permission from the OS and is waiting for a replay. ED 01 SC. etc). In the view the icon with a key symbol has a circular shape. From the confirmation dialogue box that opens you can confirm or cancel the "Craft access" operation using the Yes or No push buttons. Alarms configuration. However the OS does continue to provide a certain number of services. Figure 7.1 Switching from the OS to the Craft Terminal access state Select the Supervision pull down menu. a Local Access Cont rol (LAC) is available. If the LAC is "granted" that means the CT is allowed to manage the NE. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. In the view the icon with a key symbol has a rectangular shape. The request is up to the OS. The access state of an NE can be modified from two types of views: 4. Local Craft Terminal access is denied on recovery phase after a loss of communication of the NE.. From the confirmation dialogue box that opens you can confirm or cancel the "OS access" operation. The following dialogue box is opened from which you can get and/or set the local NE time and check the NTP Status. option from the Configuration pull down menu. In this view the OS indication identifies the Craft Terminal.. Then select the OS.2 Switching from the Craft Terminal access state back to the OS access state Select the Supervision pull down menu. Passing on and copying of this document.2 The NE local time of a selected NE can be visualized and/or re-aligned on the OS time basis.1.. When communication is lost with the NE. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. option from the Access State.B. ED 01 SC. N. Figure 8.If the OS doesn't answer in a predefined time it is assumed that the NE is in the Craft access state and can be managed from a Craft Terminal.. The status of the Network Time Protocol can be checked Select the NE Time. 4. NE Time management All rights reserved. the OS automatically recovers the communication and put the state that was set before the loss of communication (therefore the Craft Terminal access can be denied or granted). N. The OS now manages the NE. The key symbol icon on the management states of the NE view indicates whether the OS manages by a craft terminal or the NE. 4. Consulting and/or setting the local NE time.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 38/388 .B. Passing on and copying of this document. NE Time dialogue box The following fields are available: • NTP Status section (read only) with the following parameters: § NTP protocol It can be enabled (in the NTP Server Configuration) or disabled or empty (grey). § Set NE Time With OS Time ED 01 SC. § NTP Main and NTP Spare It displays the status of the Main and Spare NTP: reachable or unreachable.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 39/388 . Figure 9. • Time section with the following data: § NE Time and OS Time It displays (read only) the time of the Network Element and of the OS (Craft Terminal).All rights reserved. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. This periodicity is common for all the NEs. Passing on and copying of this document. When the NTP is not present. When both are reachable the NE uses the Main.3. The OS time comes from the PC date configuration that corresponds to the legal GMT time. Allow/Inhibit alarm notification. change the NE time with the Time of the Craft Terminal). the OS system re-aligns the time of all supervised NEs periodically and automatically with a configured periodicity.” Select one of the “ user”profile (#10001 or #10002) and click on “ Modify” Click on the “ Probable Cause Families”associated to the alarm Select the relevant alarm in the list of “ Probable Cause Name” In the “ Service affecting/non-affecting”fields select the needed severity (critical/major/minor… ) Click on “ OK” Click on “ Close” Select the relevant TP and then “ Configuration”-> “ Set Alarms Severities… ” In the box that appears select the just modified ASAP (eventually check it by means of “ Detail” ) 4.It permits to align the NE time with the time of the Craft Terminal. Alarm re-synchronization Procedure to modify an ASAP Select the TP (or board/port/etc…) whose ASAP is to be changed From the menu click on “ Configuration”-> “ alarms Severities…. • NTP protocol disabled In this case. you will force the change.B. click on the Close push but ton to close the dialogue box. are: • • • Alarm Severity Assignment Profile management. All rights reserved. If you set the NE time. To re-align the NE time on the OS time basis click in the Set NE Time With OS Time radio button and either click on the Apply push button to validate or on the Close push button to cancel and close the dialogue box. the Set NE Time With OS Time message is operative and the user can set manually the NE Time (i. NTP Main and NTP Spare will be reachable or unreachable. However it will not have any effect on the periodic and automatic mechanism. The Set NE Time With OS Time message is not operative and the user cannot set manually the NE Time.e.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 40/388 .3 Alarm Configuration The operations described in this chapter. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. with an immediate effect on the NE.1 a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) i) j) ED 01 SC. mainly related to alarm setting. If you do not want to set the NE local time. the NTP Main and NTP Spare are empty (grey). 4. Two different operative conditions can be defined: • NTP protocol enabled In this case. N. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. 4.1 Alarm Severities This option permits to configure and display the ASAP. Three important notions are: All rights reserved. Configuring Alarm Severity Assignment Profile The ASAP Management dialogue box is displayed. The Severity of the alarm. equipment alarm). The Alarm Type (communication alarm.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 41/388 .. predefined or settable by the operator. This section deals with the configuration of ASAPs.2. option from the Configuration pull down menu.3. An ASAP is a list of Alarm probable causes to which Severities Profiles are assigned.2 Alarm Severity Assignment Profile Management (ASAP) Managed entities yield alarms when they malfunction.k) Click on “ OK” 4. Passing on and copying of this document. Select the Alarm Severities.3.. • • • The Probable Cause of the alarm. ED 01 SC. Figure 10. Profile “ No Remote Alarms”shows the alarm criterion configuration defined for "path alarms" (only AIS and RDI and Software Download Failure are not alarmed).Equipment alarms . the AIS. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.Equipment alarms .Error Processing (i. Software Download Failure is not alarmed) • Profile “ Primary alarms”with this profile the AIS. ED 01 SC. This ASAP enables the emission of all: .e.Environmental . the AIS & RDI alarms are not alarmed) . ASAPs Management dialogue box. Figure 11.e. This ASAP enables the emission of all: .Error Processing (i.Communication Alarms (i. Battery Degraded. This ASAP enables the emission of all alarms. Software Download Failure. Software Download Failure is not alarmed) • Profile “All Alarms” (i.All rights reserved.Environmental . Passing on and copying of this document. This ASAP inhibits the emission of any potential alarm.e.Communication Alarms (i. The default presented profiles is: • • Profile “ No alarms” .3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 42/388 .e. SSF & RDI alarms are not alarmed) . all alarms disabled).e. Whit this profiles all the alarms are enabled (only Software Download Failure is not alarmed). SSF and RDI alarms are not alarmed. Each single alarm can be classified with a criterion selected by the operator. ED 01 SC. it is necessary to create it. (Battery Degraded. Battery Failure. Clone selection can be used to create new ASAP. For ASAP “ No Alarms” . Figure 12.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 43/388 . A default standard configuration is set. Click on Detail. NOTE : if this profile is not already present in the list.• The user can set profile 10001. Modify. All rights reserved. or Clone buttons. selecting one existing profile and then clicking on the Clone button. You can select an ASAP. Path Trace Mismatch are not alarmed). For ASAP "10001" it is then possible to choose Detail. Passing on and copying of this document. Modify. Clone or Delete buttons. ASAP Edition dialogue box. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. the ASAP edition dialogue box is displayed. Communication Subsystem Failure. or Clone button.“ Primary alarms” .“ No Remote Alarms”and “ All Alarms”it is only possible to choose Detail. select the probable cause whose severity level you wish to modify.3. it is not operative). The max number of ASAP is six. You can modify the severity associated with each probable cause. The Probable cause family checks buttons allows filtering the probable causes that will appear in the Probable cause name list. To find a particular probable cause.. "Warning". When Clone an ASAP the created one is identified with next number (10002.. The ASAP function only enables the modification of the severities assigned to the probable causes. The number of severities and the number of probable causes is fixed. "Major". ASAPs are already defined in the system with default values for the assigned severities. ED 01 SC. "Non-alarmed" or "Not used".). 4. the severities are updated only when the NE emits the modified or new alarms.2. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. it is mandatory to perform a re-synchronization of the alarms. The Set ASAP dialog opens. NOTE : it is necessary to choose one or more of these filters to have the list. When you have finished configuring ASAP.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 44/388 . N. removal or modification of these severities and causes. Then click on the option button: Service Affecting (not protected probable cause). During this re-synchronization. Otherwise.B. "Minor". press the OK button to confirm the settings and close the dialogue box or the Cancel push button to cancel the new settings and close the dialogue box.The alarm severity assignment profile dialogue box displays a list of probable causes and a list of alarm severity. For each the severity can be chosen from "Critical". To take into account a profile modification. When selecting Details the assigned severity are only shown and it isn't possible to modify. and then Non Service Affecting (protected probable cause) and then Service Independent (don't used.2 Set Alarm Severities To assign an alarm severity to a TP or equipment. option from the Configuration pull down menu. Passing on and copying of this document. To do this. the severity of each alarm is updated. N. enter its name in the Search entry box at the bottom. A "Non-alarm" probable cause corresponds to no alarm emitted for this probable cause.B. it does not allow the addition. All rights reserved. select the TP or equipment in the related view and then select the Set Alarm Severities. • Network element The new ASAP is applied to all objects of the NE matching criteria specified in "Choose Classes" and "Choose current ASAP". use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Set ASAP dialogue box.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 45/388 .All rights reserved. Since this application process takes some time. the user specifies the objects (TP or equipment) the ASAP selected in the List of ASAPs (new ASAP) should be applied to: Choose Scope • Selected object only The new ASAP is only applied to the object currently selected in the view This is the default if an object is selected in the view. ED 01 SC. its progress is shown in the section "Execution Monitoring". This is the default if no object is selected in the view. Passing on and copying of this document. Within the "Apply to" section on the right side. Figure 13. B.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 46/388 . All rights reserved. Due to system architecture. AU-4CTPs are no subordinates of MSTTPs. Choose current ASAP The new ASAP is only applied to objects. if the AU-4 CTP should be included as subordinate. select the related OSTTP (OpS) or ESTTP (EIS) as main object. Passing on and copying of this document. BKF. N. Therefore. ED 01 SC.• Selected object and subordinates The new ASAP is applied to the selected object and those of this subordinates matching the criteria specified in "Choose Classes" and "Choose current ASAP". Press Close to close the dialog and discard any changes. Choose Class (es) Enabled if one the scopes "Network Element" or "Selected object and subordinates" is selected. which are currently assigned to the ASAP. 4. • • All classes (es) Specific class (es) Select one or more object classes the new ASAP shall be applied to.3 Set SdhNE Alarms Severities Selecting the Set SdhNE Alarms Severities option from the Configuration pull down menu only the alarms at Equipment level (FF. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Execution Monitoring Continuously shows the number of modified objects during the ASAP application process if one of the scopes "N etwork element" or "Selected object and subordinates" is chosen.3. Since this application process takes some time. SHD and ABF) are managed. Press Ok to confirm the ASAP assignment and close the dialog. its progress is shown in the Section "Execution Monitoring". To inform the operator that alarms have been inhibited. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Figure 14.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 47/388 . Set SdhNE Alarms Severities If an object was selected in a view before opening this dialog. Inhibit alarm notification From the confirmation dialogue box that opens you can confirm or cancel the operation using the Ok or Cancel push buttons respectively.3. a) To inhibit alarm notification. You can then select the Inhibit Notifs option from the Alarms pull down menu as shown in the following figure.All rights reserved. Figure 15. 4.4 Allow/Inhibit Alarms Notifications The system provides the possibility to allow/inhibit the spontaneous incoming alarm notifications. ED 01 SC. the labels of the alarm panel are grey out. Passing on and copying of this document. Press Ok to confirm the ASAP assignment and close the dialog. its ASAP is highlighted in the list. Using the Detail button or double-clicking on a list item opens the ASAP Edition dialog which displays detailed information on this ASAP. Press Close the dialog and discard any changes. select the Supervision pull down menu. This functionality has to be used only if there is any perturbation. The following dialogue box is opened. b) To allow alarm notification Select the Supervision pull down menu. select the Supervision pull down menu. After this operation CT and NE current alarms are consistent.5 Alarms re — synchronization The system provides the possibility to recover alarms present on the NE and to update the current problem list of the NE.N.4 Restart NE The restart operation is a software reset and can be executed in normal traffic conditions. Passing on and copying of this document. Alarm re--synchronization From the confirmation dialogue box that opens you can confirm or cancel the operation using the Ok or Cancel push buttons respectively. You can then select the Resynchronize option from the Alarms pull down menu as shown in the following figure.B. 4. Allow alarm notifications From the confirmation dialogue box that opens you can confirm or cancel the operation using the Ok or Cancel push buttons respectively. 4. Figure 16.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 48/388 .3. To re--synchronize the alarms. Select the Restart NE option from the Supervision cascading menu. Never use this operation during a correct behavior. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.B. The restart operation in any case activates the Commit (active) version. N. All rights reserved. Figure 17. You can then select the Allow Notifs option from the Alarms pull down menu as shown in the following figure. ED 01 SC. Inhibiting the alarms notification means that they are not forwarded to the CT but alarms are still generated by the NE. ED 01 SC. Passing on and copying of this document. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Figure 18.All rights reserved.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 49/388 . Restart NE confirmation Click on the Cancel push button to abort the restart NE. having in charge the NE. The dialog-box contains the following fields: • Manager list: each connected manager to the NE is highlighted in the list. All rights reserved. The user can set a manager clicking on the denomination. assigning it to the NE. Several managers can be enabled contemporaneously. Help button provides some useful information about the dialog. SY. NPOS. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.e. Select the Set Manager list option from the Supervision pull down menu. RM. ED 01 SC. the Manager misses the NE connection).1 This option is referred to the Security management and allows the user to set the Manager list and the Access Control Domain of the NE.2 Set ACD level This option allows the user to select the level of the Access Control Domain. Figure 19. The different domains could be assigned to different operators.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 50/388 .e. Set Manager list 5. EML) that work on the NE.5 SECURITY MANAGEMENT In this chapter are inserted setting options referred to the Security management: Set Manager list 5. The EML-USM administrator (SH or Craft Terminal) should set the Manager List only to remove a manager in case of emergency (i. • NE Domain field allow selecting the domain among that displayed in the list. OK button is used to validate the selection. Cancel button close the dialog without changes of the data. The Manager List contains the list of managers (i. Passing on and copying of this document. this is an operation that should be performed only during the EML-USM installation phase: • • NE level.e.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 51/388 . This only acts on the functions that can be used by different manager. Passing on and copying of this document. RM and EML). Select the Set ACD level option from the Configuration pull down menu. Figure 20. The dialog-box contains the following fields: • All rights reserved. • The Access Control Domain check level Permit to set one of two level checks. By the way. If it is changed. the ACD is not managed The default value is NE level. OK button is used to validate the selection. it is necessary to restart the EML-USM. the ACD is performed on all the NEs No Check. Close button close the dialog without changes of the data. Set ACD level ED 01 SC. Current ACD level Show the Access Control Domain level currently set. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.The ACD manage the concurrence of access among several different managers (i. Displaying external points 6. Passing on and copying of this document. ED 01 SC. a flood. relay) connected to detector. -. -. It corresponds to an external event. An external output point is used to manage a NE contact (i.6 EXTERNAL INPUT AND OUTPUT POINTS MANAGEMENT All rights reserved.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 52/388 . This chapter describes how to display and set the input/output environmental alarm (housekeeping alarm)... An external output point is independent from external input point.Expanding or reducing external points list. Opening the external points view After selecting this menu option the external points view is displayed into the current window instead of the current view.1 Select the External Points option from the Views pull down menu. Figure 21.Displaying external points. Number of relays on the NE is dedicated to check modification of the environment as for example a fire.Configuring input and output external points. The operations that can be undertaken in this section are: -. An external input point is an environmental alarm (also called housekeeping alarm). use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. which is monitored by the NE.e. The user label : a user-friendly label associated to the configurable external point (see further the paragraph External points configuration).3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 53/388 .All rights reserved. ED 01 SC. Passing on and copying of this document. The following information is given for each external point: • • The external point type : Input or Output. Figure 22. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. External points view The external points view displays a list of all input and output points. the output points or all the external points. The following dialogue box is then opened. display the alarm event and the board effected associated to the Output point (see further the paragraph External points configuration) All rights reserved. 6. Can be set for output points (ON or OFF) "Output criteria" associated to the External output point To configure an external point. External points configuration 6. a little flag is represented near the status of the concerned point. Figure 23. If the external point is active (On).1. To see either the input points. ED 01 SC. click on the concerned row.1 Expanding or reducing external points list The external points view displays a complete list of the external points but it can also be restricted to the input or to the output points. "On" when the alarm is raised. Passing on and copying of this document. Configuring external points. Expanding or reducing the external points list. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. And then select the Configuration option from the External Points pull down menu as shown in the following figure. Figure 24. Only for the “ Output”external point there is the following information: • The Output criteria: if configured. select the appropriate option from the External Points pull down menu as shown in the following figure.• The external state: represents the alarm state.2 The configuration operations available on external points are: • • • "User labels" configuration "External state". displaying information about the selected external point (Input or Output). else "Off".3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 54/388 . External output point configuration dialogue box (MANUAL) ED 01 SC.All rights reserved. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Passing on and copying of this document.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 55/388 . External input point configuration dialogue box Figure 26. Figure 25. External State: can be set to "on" (alarm) or "off" (non alarm) only if "Manual" option has been selected in the "Output Criteria" field. not depending on a particular event. Flexible. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. where the event is chosen between a set of Output Criteria (LOS.All rights reserved. in this case is also necessary to set the option "On" in the field "External State". Figure 27. It is possible to define from CT the couple event/CPO#. subsequently the TP search dialog box will be opened. The output contact is set in a fixed way. Output Criteria can be configured as: Manual (forced). ED 01 SC. Passing on and copying of this document. External output point configuration dialogue box (FLEXIBLE) Opening the dialog the current state of the selected External Point is shown. RDI and LOF) and specifies the STM-N interface which the Output Criteria refers to by clicking on Choose button.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 56/388 . For example the output contact could be used to "Manually" activate a pump drain water from the room where the equipment is placed. 1) External Input Point Configuration l l l User Label: this field can be filled by the user with a Label that indicate the associated event that must be taken under check (for example presences of water of fire in the room where the Equipment is placed) External State: this field is set to off and can't be changed by the operator Probable Cause : the field is set to housekeeping and can't be changed by the operator 2) External Output Point Configuration l l l l l l User Label: this field can be filled by the user with a Label that indicate the alarm detected or the action that must be executed if a specific event occur (for example a "Pump" activation when water is present in the room where the equipment is placed. click on the OK push button to validate the choice and close the dialogue box.When the configuration of the external point is completed.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 57/388 . All rights reserved. ED 01 SC. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Passing on and copying of this document. The Cancel push button cancels the configuration and closes the dialogue box. At the end the Event log access is introduced. which change color when the relevant alarm is active.). Passing on and copying of this document. Than is presented the abnormal condition list (as result of operator's command such us loop. Board views and Port views). are represented in all Equipment views (NE views. at all times. The different types of alarms. Select the Diagnosis pull down menu. Access to the Alarm Surveillance to show the alarm condition is detailed in the following paragraph.1 Alarms surveillance In this chapter is described the access to the Alarm Surveillance information of the NE.7 DIAGNOSIS MANAGEMENT All rights reserved. Information about the significance of equipment alarms and status is given in the Maintenance section. An icon representation is used.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 58/388 . It is possible to show all the Alarms or filter the alarms report. Thus. Alarm Surveillance ED 01 SC. Alarms are always present on the operator's workspace. 7. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. You can then select the following option from the Alarms pull down menu: • • NE Alarms : all the NE alarms are listed in the Alarm Surveillance report which is activated Object Alarms: only the alarms of the selected object are listed in the Alarm Surveillance Report Subtrees Alarm: only the alarms of the selected object and of the relevant subtrees are listed in the Alarm Surveillance report Equipment Alarms: only the alarms of the equipment management are listed in the Alarm Surveillance report Transmission Alarms: only the alarms of the transmission management are listed in the Alarm Surveillance report External Points Alarms: only the alarms of the input external point management are listed in the Alarm Surveillance report • • • • Figure 28. you know the number of alarms and their severity relating to the equipment. their number and their severity level. laser forced on etc. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. This view shows first a synthesis of the NE alarms (Counter Summary) with the sum of all alarms. All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document.Selecting any of the previously seen options. Figure 29. ED 01 SC. the Alarm surveillance report is displayed as for the example of the following figure.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 59/388 . Alarm Surveillance Detailed information for each alarm is supplied. then a detailed list of alarms of the selected filter (Alarms Sublist). 7.2 All rights reserved. Detailed description is given in the AS Operator's Handbook.For example the board in which the alarm is detected. Figure 30. SNCP and MSP if supported) are in lockout or in forced status 01 SC. (Maintenance section. Abnormal condition menu option Figure 31. the probable cause. Abnormal Condition List The abnormal condition provides the synthesis of NE "not normal conditions" listing the events that contribute to abnormal condition. where more details about alarms is given). typically during troubleshooting operation. Example of abnormal condition list The abnormal conditions are the following: • • • Loopback ALS is disable and the laser is forced on or off Protection units (in case of EPS.3: NE MANAGEMENT ED 3AL 98104 ADAA 60/388 . presented in next section. Passing on and copying of this document. The information supplied helps the operator. the status of the alarm. Select Diagnosis->Abnormal Condition List. the alarm type. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. the diagnostic associated to the hardware failure.• Board (or sub-board) is placed in a not configured slot Select an abnormal condition and click on “ OK ”to open the relative dialog window. The presence of a failure on RX or TX side for the signal incoming/outgoing from/to the active MATRIX is detected. 7. Example of loopback dialog window management The other abnormal condition types will open the corresponding management window or will open the window to navigate towards the management window. ED 01 SC.3 Internal Link Monitor This function improves. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Internal Link Monitor displays a detailed localization of the link failure: a graphical representation of all NGI link status. All rights reserved. for the active and stand-by MATRIX is shown. Figure below is opened. at the user interface level. Passing on and copying of this document. Figure 32.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 61/388 . The left side of the page displays the block representing the MATRIX board. the second one concern the spare MATRIX. As shown in Figure below. Passing on and copying of this document.Select the Internal Link Monitor option of the Diagnosis menu. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. each block displays a string contained the user label of the associated board. The first page displays the link status for the main MATRIX. In detail. all boards that detect the link failure are represented by a red block in the page of the MATRIX main: • • a”port" board in represented by a red block if a link problem is detected in the NGI Rx from the active MATRIX. In order to indicate all the possible roots of the "link failure". • The tab of the page displays the user label of the MATRIX board. each page contains the following functional blocks and graphical objects: • • • All rights reserved. the two arrows represent the link status in RX and TX side: A red arrow indicates a "link failure" A green arrow indicates a "working link" • The Refresh button allows performing an explicit refresh of all the displayed information. ED 01 SC. A red block represents the MATRIX if a link problem is detected in one of the NGI Tx from one of the possible "port" board.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 62/388 . Two arrows are displayed between the MATRIX block and each board block. The right side of the page displays the list of blocks representing the equipped boards. ED 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 63/388 . perform the following operations to have access to the Event Log file: In the Diagnosis pull-down menu. Figure 33. Passing on and copying of this document. Internal Link Monitor 7.All rights reserved. Figure 34. select the Log Browsing option. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.4 Log Browsing From the Network Element context views. Log Browsing option in Network Element context view The Proposed option: • Select the Alarm Log option (Log Id # 1) to access the Event Log file. construction data etc. A confirmation dialog box is opened.5 This paragraph describes the access to the remote inventory of this NE. All rights reserved. permitting to analyze all alarms stored in the NE. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 64/388 . permitting to analyze all events stored in the NE. Refer to the "ELM Operator's Handbook" • Software Trace Log option is reserved to Alcatel personnel only. Select the Upload Remote Inventory option of the Supervision pull down menu. ED 01 SC. View Remote Inventory: display the remote inventory data. Refer to the "EML Operator's Handbook" • Select the Event Log option (Log Id # 2) to access the Event Log file.1 Upload remote Inventory This command stores the Remote Inventory data in the Craft Terminal. Remote Inventory 7. In the Remote Inventory are stored information of identification. The Configuration and Log Browsing ELM Windows open. Passing on and copying of this document. previously stored in the Craft Terminal by means the "upload remote inventory" performed in the "Supervision" menu. 7. Remote Inventory option of the Equipment. Figure 35. The options used are: • • Upload Remote Inventory: store the Remote Inventory data in the Craft Terminal. Remote Inventory confirmation request Clicking on OK after a while an information dialog box is presented.5.The Configuration and Log Browsing ELM Windows open. 3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 65/388 . Remote Inventory completed 7. The Remote inventory data appears. View Remote Inventory Data is displayed in specific fields: • Company It indicates the Company's (Alcatel's branch) which designs the unit.5. Figure 37. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Select the View Remote Inventory option of the Diagnosis pull down menu. Passing on and copying of this document.2 View Remote Inventory This command displays the remote inventory previously stored in the Craft Terminal by means the Upload remote inventory.Figure 36. • Unit Type ED 01 SC. Refer to Alcatel for the abbreviation's meaning (four characters). All rights reserved. of the unit's resident software All rights reserved.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 66/388 .. When only the year is displayed. • Date identifier It indicates the meaning of the date that follows. • CLEI Code It indicates the CLEI code according to Belle core specs. Within the company. The number indicated is that printed on the labels or on the units' front cover plate.. • Software Part Number It indicates the id. producing the unit. TR-ISD-325 • Manufacturing plant It indicates the Company's manufacturing plant id. the format must be "YY. Refer to Alcatel for the abbreviation's meaning (four characters). Passing on and copying of this document. It is a two-digit code supplying the following information: 00 date of construction at the time of final testing 01 production order data 02 construction date of the unit lot 03 date products has been forwarded to customer 04 customer order date • Date (YYMMDD) The identification of the date depends on the indications stated in the previous field. • Serial Number It indicates the product's serial number as specified by the NR 130 Norm.It indicates the units' acronym • Unit Part Number It indicates Alcatel or Factory product's Part No.." ED 01 SC. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. a network is partitioned into domains . it may be useful to divide a adaptive routing domain into smaller routing sub domains. Each node which is connected to a foreign level 1 sub domain must become a level 2 intermediate system. Nodes not supporting these protocols. Passing on and copying of this document. these nodes will be called static routers . 8. It is not a networkplanning example. Use of IS-IS routing protocol in a TMN facilitates installation and operation due to the "self learning" capabilities of these protocols and automatic network reconfiguration in case of failure. obviously. L2.1 All rights reserved. Moreover. moreover the use of these standardized routing protocols guarantees interoperability in a MultiFinder environment.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 67/388 . these nodes will be called adaptive routers . Level 2 intermediate systems must form a connected network. Each node must belong to exactly one level 1 sub domain. it is only used to describe L1. each domain can consist of a collection of two types of nodes: • • Nodes supporting a link state routing protocol IS-IS .1.1. the OS and each other related NE in order to provide a global communication capabilities inside the network. a node which have to take routing decisions must became Intermediate Systems .8 8. all others can be made End Systems For the description of the following paragraphs use is made of Figure below. OSI Protocol on QB3/Qecc A brief description of basic concepts and terms involved in the communication and routing domain follows. there must be at least one level 2 intermediate system per level 1 sub domain. During the TMN design process. A level 1 sub domain should fulfill the following requirements: • • • • A level 1 sub domain should form a connected sub network. compared with the number of internal links. RAP and MESA. This network will be called level 2 backbones. IS-IS protocol floods the network with link state information in order to build a complete consistent picture of the network topology. level 1 intermediate systems know how to communicate only with IS in the same area.1.1 Partitioning into Routing Sub domains In order to reduce the overhead associated with distributed adaptive routing . this sub network should have only a few links to the outside world. Networks partitions consisting of the former type of node will be called adaptive routing domains . ED 01 SC. because leve l 1 path cannot be utilized for level 2 communications. called areas or level 1 sub domain. 8. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. networks partitions consisting of the later type of node will be called static routing domains .1 COMMUNICATION AND ROUTING MANAGEMENT Overview on Communication and Routing Domain The purpose of the communication and routing domain is to define configuration parameters concerning the communication protocols for the local NE. It can only be associated with a link of a level 2 intermediate systems. There is a basic rule.2 Partitioning into separate Routing Domains In certain situations it may be necessary to partition a given network into separate routing domains.In the simplest case. All rights reserved. For example. Therefore normally RAP and MESA shall never be used.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 68/388 .1. which must be followed by two neighboring level 1 intermediate systems within a sub domain: there must be at least one area address in common between their two synonymous list. In such condition. all nodes within a level 1 sub domain share the same area address. processing and traffic overhead. The Reachable Address Prefixes indicates that any packet whose destination network address NSAP matches the prefix may be forwarded via the link with witch the prefix is associated. A prerequisite for the use of manual end system adjacencies is that the area addresses of the connected nodes must be the same. otherwise they are not able to communicate with each other. within a given level 1 sub domain. because there is no exc hange of routing information between the domains. Within a pure Alcatel network there is no need to use any kind of static routing. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. On the other hand. In general it is allowed to have multiple synonymous area addresses within a level 1 sub domain even if the usage of this features should be checked with Alcatel engineers. where no routing information is exchanged between these domains. as a consequence the nodes must belong to the same level 1 sub domain. A Reachable Address Prefixes is handled in the same way as information about a foreign level 1 sub domain within the own domain. The major benefits of this partitioning are reduction of memory. which is split into two separate routing domains: • • Routing doma in A resides in a level 1 sub domain with area address "a" Routing domain B resides in a level 1 sub domain with area address "b" In order to enable the communication. ED 01 SC. The synonymous list is used to ease partitioning in the future. whereby this link crosses routing domain boundaries. 8. consider network. there can be some NEs not supporting IS-IS nor ES-IS protocol (static routing). the communication can be achieved through the use of Manual End System Adjacencies (MESA). Communication between separate routing domains must be achieved through the use of Reachable Address Prefixes (RAP). Passing on and copying of this document. the Reachable Address Prefixes in routing domain A must contain the area address "b" and the Reachable Address Prefixes in routing domain B must contain the area address "a". A Reachable Address Prefixes represents static routing information. 3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 69/388 .1. Figure 38. This would permit to use an external DCN based on IP only. packets leaving the SH are IP packets. Hence. Hence. Once the packet gets the NE through a pure IP network. Passing on and copying of this document. it encapsulates the SNMP messages of the TCP/IP protocol stack over the OSI stack.4 OSI over IP tunneling on QB3 This feature allows the Element Manager to reach the GNEs (and all the relevant NEs behind them) by using IP networking. containing the original OSI packet. ECC protocols. using CLNP. It permits to create a tunnel over OSI systems. the GNE has to strip off the IP ED 01 SC.All rights reserved. and an OSI address. OSI packets leaving the SH are encapsulated into IP packets within the SH system itself. no OSI networking would be required on the external DCN. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.1. to communicate IP management messages through an OSI network. Routing sub domain organization example 8. OSI over IP technique is used to meet the target. LAPD. In this way the message reaches its final destination 8.3 IP over OSI tunneling for ATM/IP This feature is applicable to NEs equipped with ATM/IP boards. e. because the GNE receives the IP packet containing the OSI packet. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. The application goal is to offer the TCP/IP transport (i. Passing on and copying of this document. and forwards only the OSI packet on DCCs. ED 01 SC. The default OSI lower layers networking can be replaced by IP routing capability at the bottom of the QB3/QECC communication protocol suite. Figure below depicts the protocol architecture. Figure 39. No IP packets shall flow inside DCCs. OSI over IP tunneling on QB3 8. in the complete DCN network or at least in a consistent portion of it.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 70/388 . All rights reserved. Internet compatibility) in alternative to the full ISO/OSI communication protocols. Hence. extracting the OSI packet. the internal networking of the SDH network (DCCs) is still based on OSI. The implementation adopts the RFC1006 standard to put the OSI upper layers on top of IP networking. the choice is software switchable at NE level.2 Communication and routing views To access select Comm/Routing option from the Configuration pull down menu as shown in the following figure. and to route the OSI packet as it does today using a pure OSI networking. deletes the IP header.encapsulation. The options are described in next paragraphs.The Communication and Routing Views allows to perform the following operations: • • • Local Configuration: definition of the local NE addresses OS Configuration: addressing of the main and spare OSs connected to the local NE NTP Server Configuration: addressing of the main and spare NTP servers connected to the local NE Interface Configuration Subdivided in: § LAPD Configuration: definition of the LAPD port parameters for each LAPD channel on the local NE Ethernet Configuration: definition of configuration parameters needed to manage a local NE which provides a LAN Ethernet interface • All rights reserved. § • OSI Routing Configuration Subdivided in: § RAP Configuration: configuration of parameters necessary to the addressing of NE connected by Reachable Address Prefixes in a domain different from the one of the local NE. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. MESA Configuration: configuration of parameters necessary to the addressing of non IS-IS NE in the same domain as the one of local NE.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 71/388 . Of Point-to Point Interfaces: definition of the Equipment Controller IP address § ISA board IP address : definition of the ISA board IP address • Tunneling Configuration Subdivided in: § OSI over IP: definition of destination IP address for IP for OSI over tunneling § IP over OSI: definition of destination NSAP address and type of IP routing for IP over OSI tunneling All the previously cited operation can be entered choosing the relevant option of the menu. • ED 01 SC. This information are stored in MESA table. § IP Configuration Subdivided in: § IP Static Routing Configuration: definition of Host/Network destination address for IP static routing § OSPF area Configuration: definition of Open Shortest Path First address § IP Address Config. This information is stored in RAP table. Passing on and copying of this document. as shown in the figure. a Transport Selector (T. the length of NSAP address is variable from 16 characters to 40 characters: o The value of AFI 49 identifies the local format of variable length (from 16 characters to 40 characters). o The value of AFI 47 identifies the GOSIP-V2 format of 40 characters long.Sel) identifies a presentation entity at the location identified by the NSAP Address. Sel) identifies a transport entity at the location identified by the NSAP Address. AFI. Figure 40. Comm/Routing options 8. determines the NSAP format. o The value of AFI 39 identifies the ISO-DCC format of 40 characters long. The AFI filed is 2 characters long (2 hexadecimal digits) and. The following fields are present: • a Local Address section contains the following graphical object: § § § § a Presentation Selector (P. a Network Service Access Point (NSAP) Address identifies a location in the network. Selector) identifies a section entity at the location identified by the NSAP Address. The presented value must not be modified. The presented value must not be modified. depending on the its value.3 Local Configuration Select the Configuration pull down menu. The first field of the NSAP address.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 72/388 . The dialog-box opens and allows configuring the local address of the NE. In all cases the last two fields of the NSAP address are: ED 01 SC. Passing on and copying of this document. Select the Comm/Routing option and then from the cascading menu the Local Configuration option. The presented value must not be modified. a Section Selector (S.All rights reserved. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. the dialog is visible until the end of the operations and a wait cursor is displayed. the last two fields. Ok button is used to perform a configuration change of the data contained in the dialog-box and closes it. Cancel button close the dialog without changes of the data. ED 01 SC.o System Id: uniquely identifies a NE in an area and is 12 characters long. o Network Selector: provides the distinction among users of the network service and is 2 characters long (value is "1d"). inserted in the NE or the operator might select it. • Synonymous Area Addresses section allows having multiple synonymous area addresses within a level 1 sub domain.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 73/388 . System Type section determines whether the local NE acts as a "intermediate system level 1" or as a "intermediate system level 2" or as a "End System". End System is not operative. System Id and Network Selector. Note that a level 2 intermediate systems performs functions of a level 1 too. Passing on and copying of this document. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. of the mandatory address and of the synonymous addresses must be the same. the NSAP is managed as simple strings of characters without any preformatting because of the variable format: o a first string of two characters that identifies the AFI field o a second string of variable length that identifies the remaining NSAP address • All rights reserved. Help button provides some useful information about the dialog. The compilation of the two network addresses is optional and if they are inserted. It might be the equipment MAC Ethernet address. level 2. In the view. the dialog is visible until the end of the operations and a wait cursor is displayed.All rights reserved. Figure 41.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 74/388 . The dialog-box opens and allows configuring the addresses of the Main and Spare OSs connected to the local NE. Cancel button close the dialog without changes of the data. Select the Comm/Routing option and then from the cascading menu the OS Configuration option. ED 01 SC. Spare OS Address section contains the same graphical object of the Local Address Section in the Local Configuration dialog-box. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.4 OS Configuration Select the Configuration pull down menu. Local Configuration 8. The following fields are present: • • Main OS Address section contains the same graphical object of the Local Address Section in the Local Configuration dialog-box. Help button provides some useful information about the dialog. Passing on and copying of this document. Ok button is used to perform a configuration change of the data contained in the dialog-box and closes it. the same NSAP address of the OS must be assigned. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. OS Configuration 8. Cancel button close the dialog without changes of the data. If the NTP server is coincident with the OS (same hardware). The dialog-box opens and allows configuring the addresses of the Main and Spare NTP (Network Protocol synchronization Time) Servers connected to the local NE. Main NTP Server Address section contains the same graphical object of the Local Address Section in the Local Configuration dialog-box. The following fields are present: • • • Enabling NTP Protocol section allows enabling or disabling the NTP Protocol.All rights reserved. Ok button is used to perform a configuration change of the data contained in the dialog-box and closes it. Spare NTP Server Address section contains the same graphical object of the Local Address Section in the Local Configuration dialog-box. ED 01 SC. the dialog is visible until the end of the operations and a wait cursor is displayed. Select the Comm/Routing option and then from the cascading menu the NTP Server Configuration option.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 75/388 . Passing on and copying of this document. Figure 42.5 NTP Server Configuration Select the Configuration pull down menu. used for time distribution in the network. A section named LAPD Interfaces List that allows the user: • To display the list of configured LAPD Interfaces using a graphical table. the table displays: . NTP Server Configuration 8. for each LAPD Interfaces.This section contains the following graphical objects: • The number of LAPD interface displayed in the LAPD Interface List. • The LAPD Interface List that lists all the configured LAPD Interfaces. • Change Role button that allows too change the role (User or Network) of the LAPD Interface selected in the table. • To create a new LAPD Interface . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Figure 43.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 76/388 . • To change the role of the LAPD Interface selected in the LAPD Interface List.The LAPD role that contains one of the following value: • User • Network • Delete button that allows to delete the LAPD Interface selected in the LAPD table.6 LAPD Configuration Select the Configuration pull down menu. ED 01 SC.The user label of the TTP containing the configured LAPD Interface (MS/RS TTP).Help button provides some useful information about the dialog. . All rights reserved. • To delete the LAPD Interface selected in the LAPD Interface List. It contains the following functional block and graphical objects: . Select the Comm/Routing-> Interface Configuration option and then from the cascading menu the LAPD Configuration option. The "LAPD Configuration" dialog opens (this example has one LAPD Interface configured). Passing on and copying of this document. • A section LAPD Role that allows configuring the role (User or Network) of the LAPD Interface to be created. Named Create LAPD Interface. The LAPD Interface List will be updated on reception of the Delete/Create/Change DCC CTP notification.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 77/388 .Create button that allows to create a new LAPD Interface. the section contains the following graphical objects: • The field Interface Type that allows to select the type of the LAPD's to be displayed in the LAPD Table. the field will manage both ADM and WDM DCC type. the TP Search dialog will be configured in order to display in the right tree only the allowed TTP of the LAPD Interface. the message "No LAPD Interface" will be displayed near LAPD Interface counter (that it is at zero) • All rights reserved. the value "Ignore" will allow to display all the LAPD types. . This Create LAPD Interface dialog contains the following functional blocks and graphical objects: • A Choose button that allows the operator to select the superior TTP of the LAPD Interface to be created. this buttons can be used to refresh the LAPD table too. This connection is a must to establish connection between two NE's: if one is configured with User role.a section named Search Criteria that allows the user to display only the LAPD's of the selected type in the LAPD Table. it is disabled when the maximum number of LAPD Interface has been configured. Passing on and copying of this document. the other one connected must be configured with Network role. If no LAPD Interface is configured in the equipment. this button starts the TP Search dialog. • The Search button starts the search of the selected LAPD type. ED 01 SC. this button starts a new dialog. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. 3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 78/388 .All rights reserved. LAPD Configuration dialog Close button close the dialog without changes of the data. Passing on and copying of this document. Figure 45. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Figure 44. Creation LAPD Interface ED 01 SC. 7 Ethernet Configuration Select the Configuration pull down menu. o L1 Default Metric is a not modifiable field. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Close button close the dialog without changes of the data. OSI Section: o L2 only Parameter field indicates if the port shall be used for level 2 traffic only. Priority field can be set (default value for Ethernet is 64) • IP Section allows to define the “ node”IP Address. Confirmation to change LAPD Role All rights reserved. it is a read-only field.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 79/388 . IP Mask and the Routing IP Protocol used. Apply button performs a configuration change of the data. The dialog-box opens (figure below) and allows defining the parameters needed to manage a NE. thus avoiding transmitting L1 packets. 8. Passing on and copying of this document. which provide a LAN Ethernet interface. also the “ Associated OSPF Area”must be set. MAC Address section allows displaying the address of the Network Element in the Ethernet LAN. If “OSPF” or “Both” options of Routing IP Protocol field are selected. Note that the flag shall be set to No if some other nodes (NEs or OSs) of the same area of the relevant NE are connected to the Ethernet. ED 01 SC. Select the Comm/Routing-> Interfaces Configuration option and then from the cascading menu the Ethernet Configuration option. Priority field can be set (default value for Ethernet is 64) o L2 Default Metric is a not modifiable field.Figure 46. The following fields and data are present: • • • Ethernet Interface field allows defining or removing a Local Area Network Port for the access to the Data Communication Network. Passing on and copying of this document. Ethernet Configuration 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 80/388 .All rights reserved. ED Figure 47. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. If the addressed element is the OS. The dialog-box opens and allows configuring the Reachable Address Prefix table. ED 01 SC. Apply button is used to perform a configuration change of the data contained in the complete RAP table and close the view. Delete button is used to delete the selected page. each page contains the following data: • • • Physical Interface button o If the element is empty.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 81/388 . each page represents a particular element of the RAP table and the respective pointing device displays the element counter. Area Address Prefix section allows the user to address the separate domain. Passing on and copying of this document. Each element of the RAP table allows to link a LAPD port or a LAN port of the local NE to a separate domain. Figure 48. New button is used to insert a new page. In detail. The view simulates a real notebook. it allows the user to select the pages of the notebook using the pointing device. Ethernet Configuration -. the separate domain is selected by the address Prefixes. Select the Comm/Routing -> OSI Routing Configuration option and then from the cascading menu the RAP Configuration option. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. displays the selected port and allows to change it. displays the "none" value and allows to select a LAPD ports or a LAN port which will be used to reach the addressed area. o If the element isn't empty. the LAN port will be used. MAC Address section allows addressing the element of a domain to be reached the Ethernet LAN. the view is visible until the end of the operations and a wait cursor is displayed.All rights reserved.L2 only parameter 8. the field is managed as a simple string of 12 digits. The Area Address Prefix represents a NSAP address without the fields System Id and Network Selector.8 Reachable Address Prefixes Configuration Select the Configuration pull down menu. If the addressed element is the OS. each page contains the following data: • Physical Interface button o If the element is empty. 01 SC. each page represents a particular element of the MESA table and the respective pointing device displays the element counter. Select the Comm/Routing -> OSI Routing Configuration option and then from the cascading menu the MESA Configuration option.9 Manual ES Adjacencies table Configuration Select the Configuration pull down menu. it allows the user to select the pages of the notebook using the pointing device. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. The view simulates a real notebook. The dialog-box opens and allows configuring the Manual ES Adjacencies table. Each element of the MESA table allows linking a LAPD port or a LAN port of the local NE to a End System element. displays the selected port and allows changing it. o If the element isn't empty.3: NE MANAGEMENT ED 3AL 98104 ADAA 82/388 . Figure 49. the LAN port will be used. the ES element must be in the same area as the one of the local NE. In detail.Close button close the dialog without changes of the data. Passing on and copying of this document. All rights reserved. which will be used to reach the End System element. displays the "none" value and allows selecting a LAPD ports or a LAN port. RAP Configuration 8. All rights reserved. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.• • System Id section represents the System Id of the ES element. New button is used to insert a new page. Apply button is used to perform a configuration change of the data contained in the complete MESA table and close the view. the view is visible until the end of the operations and a wait cursor is displayed. ED 01 SC. Close button close the dialog without changes of the data.10 IP Configuration The options listed in the menu Configuration – > Comm/Routing – > IP Configuration and also in Configuration – > Comm/Routing – > Tunneling Configuration is relevant to the configuration of messages communications for the management of ATM or IP boards (ISA) inside the equipment and in the network. Delete button is used to delete the selected page. Figure 50. Passing on and copying of this document. MAC Address section allows addressing the element in the Ethernet LAN.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 83/388 . the field is managed as a simple string of 12 digits. MESA Configuration 8. • “ ISA Board IP Address”it defines the IP address for the ATM or IP boards (ISA). It is to be defined on a a Gateway Network Element (GNE) equipped with the QB3 interface. allows defining the IP Address IP Mask to reach a network.1 IP routing configuration for ATM/IP boards management In order to manage the ATM/IP boards inserted into the equipment. [5] IP Point-to-Point Interface Id: allows to use point to point interfaces made available by EC. This should be the first addressing operation • Routing configuration. 8. The dialog box opens and allows configuring the parameters for IP Static Routing Configuration. NOTE: this addressing must be carried out at both end nodes of the tunnel. the following operations are to be done: • “ IP Address Configuration of Point– to– Point Interface ”defines the IP address for the Equipment– Controller (EC). Select the Comm/Routing -> IP Configuration and then from the cascading menu. when an OSI management message passes through an IP network.8. when the ATM/IP management message passes through an SDH/OSI network.10. so that they can see each other. if equipped with ATM/IP boards. it is to be defined for every ISA board hosted by the equipment. the IP Static Routing Configuration option. so that they can see each other. NOTE: this addressing must be carried out at both end nodes of the tunnel. i. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. they must have the same address) • “ IP over OSI Tunneling”it defines the OSI address (NSAP) of the destination node to be reached (for instance the GNE connected to the TMN). [3] Default Gateway IP Address: allows defining the address of the next hop gateway [4] CLNP (Connection Less Network Protocol): allows to use a pre-define IP over OSI tunnel to towards a gateway. The following fields and data are present: [1] Destination Host IP Address: allows defining the IP address necessary to reach a specific Host [2] Destination Network: it is alternative to Destination Host IP Address. NOTE: if the ISA boards are in EPS 1+1 configuration. by means of the options: –“ IP Static Routing Configuratio n”if using static routing –“OSPF Area Configuratio n”if using the automatic OSPF routing All rights reserved. where the QB3 is connected to a LAN/IP network. • “OSI over IP Tunneling”it defines the IP address of the destination node to be reached (for instance the IP router where the TMN is connected). ED 01 SC. it is to be done for every SDH– NE of the network. Passing on and copying of this document.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 84/388 .e.11 IP Static Routing Configuration Select the Configuration pull down menu. 3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 85/388 . Points from [3] to [5] are alternative Apply button is used to perform a configure change of the data contained in the column of the table and close the view. Select the Comm/Routing -> IP Configuration and then from the cascading menu. the view is visible until the end of the operations and a wait cursor is displayed. Figure 51.B. Delete button is used to delete the selected page.N. Close button close the dialog without changes of the data. New button is used to insert a new page. Passing on and copying of this document. the OSPF Area Table Configuration option. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.12 OSPF Area Table Configuration Select the Configuration pull down menu. All rights reserved. ED 01 SC. IP Static Routing Configuration 8. 13 IP Address Configuration of Point-to-Point Interfaces Select the Configuration pull down menu.The dialog-box opens and allows configure the parameters for OSPF (Open Shortest Path First) Area Table Configuration. OSPF Area Table Configuration 8. Delete button is used to delete the selected page. Passing on and copying of this document. Both fields gives a synthetically information that includes all the addresses (specific a NE and to a Network) in an Area. Apply button is used to perform a configuration change of the data contained in the complete RAP table and close the view is visible until the end of the operations and a wait cursor is displayed. Close button close the dialog without changes of the data.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 86/388 . the IP Address Configuration of Point-to-Point Interfaces option. New button is used to insert a new page. The dialog-box opens and allows setting the Equipment Controller IP address used to communicate with the ISA board. Select the Comm/Routing->IP Configuration and then from the cascading menu. Figure 52. ED 01 SC. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. The following fields and data are present: • • OSPF Area IP Address OSPF Area Range Mask All rights reserved. The dialog-box opens and allows setting the IP Address of the ISA Board that communicate with the Equipment Controller (EC). use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. the dialog is visible until the end of the operations and a wait cursor is displayed. Cancel button close the dialog without changes of the data. the dialog is visible until the end of the operations and a wait cursor is displayed Cancel button close the dialog without changes of the data.OK button is used to perform a configuration change of the data contained in the dialog-box and closes it.14 ISA board IP Address Select the Configuration pull down menu. Passing on and copying of this document. Select the Comm/Routing->IP Configuration and then from the cascading menu. the ISA Board IP Address option. IP Address Configuration of Point-to-Point Interfaces 8. All rights reserved. OK button is used to perform a configuration change of the data contained in the dialog-box and closes it. Figure 53. ED 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 87/388 . Figure 54.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 88/388 . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.All rights reserved. The dialog-box opens (Figure below) and allows configuring the Remote Destination IP Address of the Equipment Controller. ISA Board IP Address 8. Passing on and copying of this document.15 OSI over IP Select the Configuration pull down menu. OSI over IP Tunneling configuration ED 01 SC. the OSI over IP option. Figure 55. Select the Comm/Routing->Tunneling Configuration and then from the cascading menu. All rights reserved.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 89/388 . It might be the equipment MAC Ethernet address.Apply button is used to perform a configuration change of the data contained in the complete table and close the view. The following fields are present: • Destination NAPS Address: A Network Service Access Point (NSAP) Address identifies a location in the network. Network Selector: provides the distinction among users of the network service and is 2 characters long (value is "1d") In the view.16 IP over OSI Select the Configuration pull down menu. Passing on and copying of this document. The dialog-box opens and allows configuring the Destination NAPS Address and the IP Routing Type. AFI determines the NSAP format. Close button close the dialog without changes of the data. the length of NSAP address is variable from 16 characters to 40 characters: • • The value of AFI 39 identifies the ISO-DCC format of 40 characters long The value of AFI 47 identifies the GOSIP-V2 format of 40 characters long In all cases the last two fields of the NSAP address are: • • System Id: uniquely identifies a NE in an area and is 12 characters long. Select the Coo/Routing->Tunneling Configuration and then from the cascading menu. level 2. • • • • OSPF (Open Shortest Path First) RIP (Routing Information Protocol) Both None ED 01 SC. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. the NSAP is managed as simple strings of characters without any preformatting because of the variable format: • • A first string of two characters that identifies the AFI field A second string of variable length that identifies the remaining NSAP address • IP Routing: allows to choose the type of IP routing supported as follows. New button is used to insert a new page. Delete button is used to delete the selected page. the view is visible until the end of the operations and a wait cursor is displayed. the IP over OSI option. 8. depending on the its value. inserted in the NE or the operator might select it. The first field of the NSAP address. The AFI field is 2 characters long (2 hexadecimal digits) and. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.If "OSPF" or "Both" options are selected. New button is used to insert a new page Delete button is used to delete the selected page All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document. also the "Associated OSPF Area" must be set. IP over OS ED 01 SC. Close button close the dialog without changes of the data. Apply button is used to perform a configuration change of the data contained in the complete table and close the view is visible until the end of the operations and a wait cursor is displayed.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 90/388 . Figure 56. ED 01 SC. na med SRFAN The Fans Subrack presence is managed with the Set option as for the boards of the 1662SMC Subrack Further. It is possible to go back to the upper level of representation by pressing the <ESC> key on the keyboard. It is also possible to: • • Go back to the previous view. by selecting the Forward option from the view menu N. Passing on and copying of this document.1 Equipment Management Introduction and navigation All rights reserved. by double clicking on a board body.B. The port view displays the inner TPs. the board level of the Equipment view can be reached. by double clicking on a port body contained in the board. The NE hierarchy is organized in the following way: subrack > board > port > TP Double clicking on the objects performs the navigation through different levels of the NE hierarchy: • • • • The first level shows the subrack level of the Equipment view. the port level of the Equipment view can be reached. This section deals mainly with the setting and changing of the boards present on the Equipment and undertaking board protection operations. selecting in the Rack level view the Show supporting equipment option from the Equipment menu. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. named SR62C At the bottom the Fans Subrack.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 91/388 . two subrack are presented: • • At the top the 1662SMC Subrack. selecting in the Rack level view the Show supporting equipment option from the Equipment menu. Further. further. Navigation is done from higher to lower levels. the Equipment level view is presented. by selecting the Backward option from the views menu Go to the next view. Further. select the Equipment option from the View pull down menu The first level of the "Equipment Overview" representation will be displayed directly into the current window The Equipment Overview enables a fast navigation through all levels of the equipment hierarchy. the Rack level view is presented. Using the menu options. Selecting in the first level of the Equipment view (subrack level) The Show supporting equipment option from the Equipment menu. the Equipment level view is presented.9 9. In the Rack level view. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Passing on and copying of this document.All rights reserved. Equipment Overview -.3: NE MANAGEMENT Figure 57. ED 01 SC.Subracks level 3AL 98104 ADAA 92/388 . 3: NE MANAGEMENT Figure 58. Passing on and copying of this document. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.Rack level (without Fans subrack) 3AL 98104 ADAA 93/388 . ED 01 SC.All rights reserved. Equipment Overview -. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.Rack level (with Fans subrack) 3AL 98104 ADAA 94/388 . Equipment Overview. Passing on and copying of this document.All rights reserved. ED 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT Figure 59. All the options offered by equipment menu are described in the next paragraphs.NE level In the Subrack view it is possible use the options offered by the Equipment menu clicking on it in the menu bar. ED 01 SC. Board administrative state that decides on the "in/out of service" of the board is also described.All rights reserved. Figure 60. Set and change the boards present on the Equipment is the main function. Details about these alarms indication are given in the Maintenance section.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 95/388 . Passing on and copying of this document. Alarms indications are present at every NE level. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Equipment Overview . • • • Click on the empty slot in which a board/subrack has to be added. The contour becomes highlighted to show that operatio ns can be done on it.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 96/388 . Figure 61. or on an existing Out of Service board in order to change it. The following example of dialogue box containing a list of the different types of boards/subrack is displayed. a ) Setting or changing a board/subrack A new board/subrack may be created in either an empty slot or it may replace an existing Out of Service board/subrack (without the lock symbol). Equipment menu Equipment setting operation are defined according the following sequences: . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. In fact.Configuration of a new board • Configure the board using the option "Set" - Change of board type • • "Set out of service" the board Configure the board using the option "Set" - Remove a board • • "Set out of service" the board "Remove" the board Set and change or remove board/subrack 9. ED 01 SC. Select the Set option of the Equipment pull down menu. Passing on and copying of this document.2 The boards can be set.All rights reserved. changed or removed using the menu options of the Equipment view. the Set option is available only after selecting an empty slot or an Out-of-service board. 3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 97/388 . Figure 62. Passing on and copying of this document. The list of different boards relative to an NE slot (example) N. which the equipment may accept in the selected slot. The list of boards/subrack displayed during a "Set Board" operation is restricted to those. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Therefore the list will vary depending on which slot has been selected.All rights reserved.B. ED 01 SC. Figure below. • • • If the slot you are working on is already empty no name appears under the slot. The outline of the slot becomes highlighted. the Cancel push button cancels the operation and closes the dialogue box. The board representation appears on the N. • • Choose the board/subrack type required. • In the Create/Modify dialogue box. Select the Modify option of the Equipment pull down menu. This procedure can be done to replace an existing optical module with another of different type without previously remove it.3 This command enable the Fan Subrack alarms management from CONGI in slot 10 or slot 12 according to the option selected in the Equipment menu.B. A lock representation appears over the boards ("in-service") All rights reserved. Shows an example Select the CONGI board ED 01 SC. The outline of the slot becomes highlighted to show that operation can be done on it. Chose the optical module type required by clicking on the corresponding item in the list. • • • • • • Click on the optical module to replace.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 98/388 . The name of the board is highlighted. The Help push button opens a Help view giving information about the context. view in the slot when the board change is effective. From the confirmation dialogue box that opens you can confirm or cancel the "Remove" operation.E. Passing on and copying of this document. Click on OK push button to validate the choice. c) Modify a board N. A padlock representation appears over the board. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Select the Remove option the Equipment pull down menu. It is possible remove a board only if it is not involved in any type of cross connection (OH bytes included) or Performance monitoring. Connect Fan to CONGI board 9. b) Removing a board/subrack • Click on the board/subrack to remove. N. the name of the module is highlighted. by clicking on the corresponding item in the list.B.For details on the board/subrack identified by acronyms and NE physical composition please refers to the Technical Handbook. A dialog box containing a list of different types of optical module is displayed. This indicates that the board is selected and that operations can be done on the slot. The board/subrack representation appears on the NE view in the slot when the board change is effective. Click on the OK push button to validate the choice. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 99/388 . Figure 63. Connect FAN to CONGI It is possible to disable this function by selecting the relevant CONGI board and than choosing the Remove Fan connection from CONGI#10 option of the Equipment menu. Passing on and copying of this document. ED 01 SC. All rights reserved.To enable this function select the Connect Fan to CONGI#10 option (or as alternative Connect Fan to CONGI#12) of the Equipment menu if the supervision Fan Subrack cable is connected to CONGI unit inserted in slot 10. In the equipment view. N. Figure 64.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 100/388 .All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document. a lock representation appears over the boards which are in "in service" state. click on the board in order to select it. ED 01 SC.1 • • Setting a board in service In the Subrack NE view. Remove FAN connection from CONGI 9. if the NE allows it.B. Select the Set in service option of the Equipment pull down menu. 9.2 • Setting a board out of service In the Subrack NE view. A lock representation appears over the boards.4 Board administrative state The operator decides to set a board in service or out of service. click on the board in order to select it. 9. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.4.4. • Select the Set out of service option of the Equipment pull down menu. Passing on and copying of this document. All rights reserved. Figure 65. Select the Ok push button in the confirmation window that appears. Consulting a board’ s administrative state ED 01 SC. substituted by the symbol over the boards.. A lock representation disappears.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 101/388 . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.4. 9.3 Consulting a Board's Administrative state The board's administrative ("in service" or "out of service") state is indicated on the board view as shown in the following figure. 3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 102/388 . • • All rights reserved. Click on the Close push button to close the dialogue box. 9. Opened dialogue box contains as many folder sheets as there is software in the selected board. Software Description dialogue box. This indicates that the board is selected and that operations can be done on the slot. The outline of the slot becomes highlighted. Board level : show the remote inventory data of the selected board ED 01 SC.5 Software description This function allows the operator to visualize information about the software(s) which is (are) present in the selected board. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Passing on and copying of this document. Two options are available: • • Subrack level : prints or write on a file the remote inventory data of the subrack.6 Remote Inventory This command displays the remote inventory data present in the Subrack and Boards. Select the Software description option of the Equipment pull down menu. Click on a board in which the software is wanted to know (EQUICO or MATRIX unit). • Select the Remote Inventory option of the Equipment pull down menu.9. Figure 66. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Appear. For the Board level a dialog similar to Figure below. Remote Inventory The remote inventory data of the Subrack level can be printed on the default printer or to a file in postscript or ASCII format. ED 01 SC.All rights reserved. Figure 67. Passing on and copying of this document.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 103/388 . If no printer is installed. there is no error message displayed to indicate this.All rights reserved.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 104/388 . Select Printer N. Select Output Format for file 9. ED 01 SC. Figure 68.B. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Figure 69. Passing on and copying of this document.7 Show supporting equipment Click on Show Supporting Equipment menu option of the Equipment menu to navigate to the equipment that supports the selected board. Equipment Overview -. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Passing on and copying of this document.3: NE MANAGEMENT Figure 70.Subrack level 3AL 98104 ADAA 105/388 .All rights reserved. ED 01 SC. 10 Board view 10.1 Introduction The Board View permits to show the physical port available in a specific board and to access the Port view. The "Board view" is reached selecting the Equipment option in the View pull down menu, then double clicking on the selected board to show the relevant Board view, presenting the ports. In case of board with multi access SDH another view permits to select the SDH port. An example of "board view" with the presented port is in Figure 72. Alarms and Status indications referred to the board level are present at the bottom of the view, as indicated in the example (Administrative State and Board Alarms/Status). This information are "In/Out of service" of the board (Administrative State) and board alarms and status like "missing" (RUM) or "mismatch" (RUTM), EPS condition if supported and other indications typical of each unit. In the Maintenance section details on this indication are given. All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. ED 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 106/388 All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. ED 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT Figure 71. Equipment view: select the SDH port on a board 3AL 98104 ADAA 107/388 All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Figure 72. Example of a Board View A port type is described with a board rectangular view and port identification. The port identification is usually internal to the rectangular board (see Figure below. one example of optical port) ED 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 108/388 (SDH) (ATM or IP) (PDH) (GBit ETHERNET) Figure 73. Example of a Port identification and alarm synthesis The following information is available: • • • All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Type of port (name) State of port (alarm status synthesis) Symbol of the port The operator is provided with a representation of the port alarm synthesis on each port. The messages displayed at the top view provide port denomination. The messages displayed at the bottom provide information about Board alarms. A message under the mouse facility provides the name and the port type or the alarms name. A message appears in the message area in the bottom left corner of the view. By double clicking on a board view, it is also possible open the corresponding port view. 10.2 Board View Menu Selecting the "Board" option in the menu bar the complete pull down Board menu is presented: • Port Access: Access the "Port" view. Note : this option is accessible after the selection of a port contained in the view. • • • Change Physical Interface: Change the SPI or PPI object into PPI or SPI (and vice versa) on the bi- mode port (140Mbit/s / STM-1 switchable). Show supporting equipment: Navigate to the upper subrack level. ISA Port Configuration: It allows configuring the TPs for the ATM connections. Figure 74. Board menu options These options are described in next paragraphs. 10.2.1 Port Access Click on Port Access menu option of the Board menu to access the "Port View" Navigation to the Port view permits to show a detailed alarm presentation of the port and to set the releva nt configurations. ED 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 109/388 All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Figure 75. After “ Port Access”selection (example) 10.2.2 Change Physical Interface This command allows to change the type of physical interface in a bi- mode port (140 Mbit/s / 155 Mbit/s switchable port) i.e. it cha nges the SPI or PPI object into PPI or SPI Select the Symbol of the port in the "Board view". Click on Change Physical Interface menu option of the Board menu. ED 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 110/388 Figure 76. Change Physical Interface The following dialog box is opened: All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Click on the OK push button to change the physical interface. Click on the Cancel push button to abort the change of the physical interface. 10.2.3 Show supporting equipment Click on Show Supporting Equipment menu option of the Board menu to navigate to the subrack that supports the selected port view. ED 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 111/388 All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. ED 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT Figure 77. Subrack level 3AL 98104 ADAA 112/388 11 Port view 11.1 Introduction This section describes the operations necessary for the consultation, modification and configuration of each port. The Port View permits to set and show the transmission resources (i.e. the Termination Point, TP) referred to the specific Port; it permits to check the detailed alarms presented by each TP of the Port, and the available menu permits to configure the port , (many setting options listed in the port menu are common with the "Transmission" view). In these views are presented only the TP specific of the port. The menu differs according the port type (SDH, PDH, HOA, ATM/IP/ETH). The Port View can be accessed from the Equipment or Transmission Views. The "Port view" is reached selecting the Equipment option in the View pull down menu then double clicking on the presented rack/subrack to present the subrack view, as described in chapter "Show supporting equipment" Double clicking on the selected board the relevant Board view is available presenting the ports. By double clicking on a board view, the corresponding port view is opened. The "Port view" is also reached selecting the Transmission option in the View pull down menu. Then the Add TP option of the Transmission menu permits to select and confirm a TP. On the transmission view, which appears, select the TP and on the Transmission menu select the Navigate to a port view option. The HOA port view can only be reached from the Transmission view, selecting a VC or TU TP. The ATM/IP/ETH TPs are not automatically created when the board is inserted in the subrack but must be created as explained in chapter ATM/IP/ETH Configuration From the Port view It is possible to Navigate to Transmission view. The port types contain the following TP: • SDH port: Electrical or Optical SPI TTP, RS TTP, prot TTP (MSP TTP), AU4 CTP, Trail Monitor (only with enabled POM) • PDH port: PPI TTP, En CTP, VCn TTP • HOA port: VC4 TTP, TUG3, TUG2, TU3, TU12, Trail Monitoring (only with enabled POM) • ATM port: VC4C TTP, VC4 TTP, VC3 TTP, VC12 TTP, s31 TTP and E1 TTP • PR_EA port: VC4 TTP, VC3 TTP and VC12 TTP • Fast ETHERNET port: MAU, PTC, VC3XV, VC12XV, VC4 TTP, VC3 TTP and VC12 TTP • Gigabit ETHERNET port: MAU, PTC, VC4XV, VC4 TTP, VC3 TTP and VC12 TTP All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. ED 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 113/388 All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Figure 78. Example of a SDH Port View On the port view, the messages displayed at the top view in the form of message boxes provide more information concerning the type and the alarms of the port. On the other hand the messages displayed at the bottom provide information about MSP protection and ALS state (if they are supported). A message under the mouse facility provides the name and the port type. A message appears in the message area in the bottom left corner of the view. ED 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 114/388 • Loop state If the condition of the resource is under loop. Termination or Compound Adaptation and Termination. so port menu refers to the selected TP. The color of the boxes changes according to the alarm severity.11. an icon with a L appears beneath the box • Selected state An orange frame around the box identifies the TP selection. Passing on and copying of this document. an icon with a x appears beneath the box. an icon with a P appears beneath the box. Figure 79.2 Port View: elements on the TP The symbols of the TPs have the following meaning: • Alarm Icon Area The icon boxes represent alarms.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 115/388 . Termination TP box. • Cross-connected state If the condition of the resource is cross-connected. • Performance State If the condition of the resource is under performance monitoring. • All rights reserved. ED 01 SC. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. TP Role The icon boxes represent the function: Adaptation. 703/G.3 Port View Menu Selecting the "Port " option in the menu bar the complete pull down Port menu is presented. TC) all TP's. Set Retiming: Enable/disable the retiming feature on the outgoing 2 Mbit/s signal. Physical Media : Manage the physical setting of the TP of the port. Show supporting board: Navigate to the upper board level. Loopback: Manage the loopback commands.783 Adaptation TP box. 11. opening all TP's Navigate to Monitor view: permit to show an overview about the monitoring operation (POM. ED 01 SC. Navigate to Transmission view: permit to show a complete overview about the signal flow. G. Figure 80. It is described in this chapter.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 116/388 . SUT. AU4 Concatenation: Only for SDH ports views. for commissioning or maintenance purposes MSP Manage the Multiplex Section Protection of the NE. It is described in the following paragraph. Not applicable to HOA port. HOA and ATM). Passing on and copying of this document.704 or ISDN-PRA management. Performance: See and Show Performance Monitoring parameters and data. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. and is introduced in the following: • TP configuration: Set parameters for the Signal Label and Path Trace overhead on Synchronous TP's. PDH. Not available for PDH port. Cross Connection: Manage the connection of the paths.All rights reserved. • • • • • • • • • • • • • TP Threshold Configuration: Set B2 excessive BER and Signal Degraded parameter TP Frame Configuration: Set parameters for 2Mbit/s G. The menu differs according the port type (SDH. Monitoring Operations: Set parameters for POM/SUT and TC (Tandem Connection) TPs. 3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 117/388 . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. ED 01 SC. Figure 81. Select the Set Retiming->Enable option from the Port menu.4 Set Retiming The Retiming feature applies to the outgoing 2 Mbit/s and its purpose is absorb the jitter / wander that is transferred to the PDH signal when SDH pointer justification occur. The feature is set individually per port. Examples of port menu options (SDH.All rights reserved. the color of the state information at the bottom of the window is brown and the label "Retiming State Disable" is written. Select a 2Mbit/s port and zoom in to open the port view. When the Retiming feature is disabling. Passing on and copying of this document. PDH and ATM port) 11. Figure 82. Set Retiming enable (before) As result of this operation the state information color become green and the label "Retiming State Enable" is written All rights reserved. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. ED 01 SC.5 AU4 Concatenation Select a STM-16 or STM-4 optical interface to configure as AU4 concatenation structure.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 118/388 . Set Retiming enable (after) 11. Figure 83. Passing on and copying of this document. Zoom in to open the board and then the port view menu. AU4#9.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 119/388 . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Click on the Cancel key to exit and come back to the previous window. Therefore for concatenated action of for AU4s in one AU4c these AU4 streams are deleted and substituted by the new AU4c component. AU4 concatenate/deconcatenate commands ED 01 SC. All rights reserved. Select the supported concatenation Number =4 (selection 64 is not operative) to visualize the available group/groups then select the group to concatenate and click on the Concatenate push button. Passing on and copying of this document. (In this example a STM-16 view is shown) The STM-16 stream appears divided into different groups: not all AU4s can be chosen as first AU4 but only AU4#1 AU4#5.Select the AU4 Concatenation option from the Port menu to open Figure below. Figure 84. AU4#13 for AU4c. Shows an STM4 interface with four AU4 concatenated in one AU4c. ED 01 SC.The Concatenate button will be enabled and the Deconcatenate button will be disabled when is selected a non concatenated AU4.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 120/388 . Figure 85. The AU4c appears as a single icon that has the same size of the actual AU4 blocks. Cross-Connection states and Performance Monitoring information as standard AU4 streams. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. vice versa when is selected a concatenated AU4. The AU4c streams support the Alarm synthesis. All rights reserved. Examp le of a concatenated AU4 transmission view The port view represented in Figure up. Passing on and copying of this document. Click on the Deconcatenate push button to apply the command or on Cancel to exit. It opens a menu that differs according the port type: • SDH port: .ALS Management .Tx Quality Configuration . Figure 86. All rights reserved. Not operative ED 01 SC.To deconcatenate an AU4c select again the "AU4 Concatenation" option in the Port View menu and then select the AU4c to deconcatenate.Ms Configuration • PDH port: . Passing on and copying of this document. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.6 Physical Media option menu The Port -> Physical Media options permit to set physical configuration of each TP of the port.Show Optical Configuration . . The Physical Media options are also accessible from the Transmission menu.Single Fiber Configuration . Example of a concatenated AU4c 11.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 121/388 .Line Length Configuration.HDSL Configuration.LAPD Configuration . . Figure 87. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. ED 01 SC. These options are described in next paragraphs except the previously referenced. Not operative All rights reserved. Physical media menu (SDH port example) 11.NT G703/704 Configuration.Control Path Activation. Not operative .3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 122/388 .1 Automatic Laser Shutdown Configuration The aim of this paragraph is to describe the optical port hence the laser sources. Not operative . Passing on and copying of this document.ATM/IP/ETH Configuration . Not operative • ETHERNET port: . .Ethernet Mapping Protocol. . Select the SPI block in the port view and then select the Port pull down menu.Ethernet Port Configuration .Remote Laser Management..ALS Management. The automatic laser shutdown function can only be configured from the optical ports of the equipment.NT X21 Configuration.6. The Automatic Laser Shutdown State dialogue box opens. For safety reasons it may be necessary to shutdown the laser to enable the fixing of the communication link. . Automatic laser shutdown (ALS) is useful in case of a loss of communication between two NEs due to optical fiber breakdown. Select the Physical media option and then from the cascading menu the ALS Management option. When the laser is forced to ON or OFF. 2) Force laser OFF. The following actions are available a) Allow Automatic Laser Shutdown. Passing on and copying of this document. b) Forcing the Laser to start or stop.All rights reserved. To allow the automatic laser shutdown functionality. Automatic Laser Shutdown Management The dialogue box enables the ALS Management and the Restart parameters.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 123/388 . 1) Force la ser ON. it is restarted or stopped and the Automatic Laser Shutdown is disabled. if it was not already so. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Figure 88. select the ALS Enabled option of the ALS Function: option button. select the Laser Forced ON option of the ALS Function then click on Apply and then or close push button to close the dialogue. ED 01 SC. To carry out a laser forced ON. the manual restart permits to permits to perform a laser restart for single time period. returning to the state.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 124/388 . ED 01 SC.To carry out a laser forced OFF. Automatic Laser Shutdown Management (after ALS Function delete) d) Enabling or Disabling Automatic / Manual Laser Restart. To enable (disable) an automatic laser restart following an automatic laser shutdown (periodic restart). e) Wait to restart time The Wait To Restart Time: field indicating the delay period in seconds. From this window it is only possible to create the ALS function (all ALS commands are grey) All rights reserved. The test restart is similar to the manual restart but the laser remains "ON" for a longer time in order to make a measurement of the received optical power. f) ALS Manual restart When the ALS Manual Restart is Enabling it is possible to enter two different commands: Manual or Test Restart. Passing on and copying of this document. in periodic mode. select the Laser Forced OFF optio n of the ALS Function then click on Apply and then or close push button to close the dialogue c) Delete: this option deactivates the ALS function. The manual command immediately activates a single laser restart: this command overrides the wait to restart time. occurring before an automatic laser restart is launched (following an automatic shutdown). use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. select the Enabled (Disabled) option of the ALS Auto Restart . The laser will be ON for 2 secs and OFF for 70 secs. The same procedure is applicable for the ALS Manual restart: while the ALS auto Restart is disabled. The restart time period for this equipment is fixed to 70 secs. Figure 89. 6. Figure 90. ALS and Laser current state (example) 11. When all the different parameters have been configured.2 Show Optical Configuration This command permits to get detailed information on the optical characteristics of the port that is visualized. ED 01 SC. Forced off = ALS forced off by operator command. Undefined = The ALS is not present (not created). Selecting only the Close button allows you to cancel the choices made. select the Apply button to confirm the setting and close the dialogue box. Shows an example of the parameters of the selected interface. This dialogue box can only be read. In test = the laser restart has been automatically activated. displayed by the functional state message area of the optical port. N. Active = The ALS has been activated (On). Note that the ALS procedure is activated ( if enable ) only when the fiber has been interrupted and the ALS state has not to be confused with the laser state.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 125/388 . Firstly select an optical board and the SPI block. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Laser state: On = all OK or ALS not present (not created). Forced on = ALS forced on by operator command.B. are: ALS states: Inactive = No ALS has been activated (Off) or the laser has been Forced ON/OFF.All rights reserved. then click on Show Optical Configuration option from the Physical media pull down menu to visualize the parameters of the selected optical port. You cannot write in the entry boxes. Passing on and copying of this document. Off = Laser off (when ALS is created). ALS states (see example of). Figure 91.3 Single Fibber Configuration The single fiber configuration can be realized with passive optical couplers. The use of the port : describes whether the laser port is used for interoffice transmissions on long distances (Long Haul) 40 km) or for interoffice transmissions on short distances (Short Haul ] 15 km). Example of Figure below.All rights reserved. 11. Shows that are accepted the label "1" from Tx1 to Rx2 while is accepted label "2" from Tx2 to Rx1.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 126/388 . the Rx part in the remote receive side checks the congruency between the received and the expected labels. an identification label has been assigned to the local Tx side. Passing on and copying of this document.6. Visualizing a port optical parameters The laser ports are identified by three major characteristics: • • • STM Level: describes the input/output optical interface types : STM1/STM4 The wavelength of the laser source : the units are nanometers (nm = 10-9 m). ED 01 SC. an alarm (AIS and RDI) will be generated. The Colored Interface Parameters section is not applicable in the current release To close the dialogue box click on the Cancel push button. If a signal label mismatch is recognized on the received section. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. The optical coupler must not loop the Tx signal onto the local Rx. For this purpose and in general to avoid a low Tx/Rx decoupling also when the optical line is interrupted. select the transmit mode on the single fiber (enable or disable).assigned label to Tx (0-14) Transmitted Media Type . the following fields have to be considered: • • Allow Single Fiber .overhead byte used for the communication: . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. In the figure that opens. Figure 92. Bidirectional Transmission on a single fiber Select the Physical media option and then from the cascading menu the SDH Single Fiber Configuration option.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 127/388 .S1 byte of Multiplex Section (the part not used for the SSM) • Received Section: • • Received label Expected label (0-14) ED 01 SC.All rights reserved.Media Dependent byte of Regeneration Section or . Passing on and copying of this document. Transmitted Section: • • Transmitted Media Byte . The OK button validates the configuration and closes the dialog box. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. ED 01 SC. This dialog allows selecting between SDH or SONET networks. Passing on and copying of this document.5 Line Length Configuration To manage the Line Length configuration click on Line Length Configuration menu option of the Physical Media menu. Figure 94.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 128/388 . After the selection click on Apply and then on Close to close the dialog. Figure 93. Click on Ms Configuration menu option of the Port menu. Select the MSP TP. Ms Forced AIS is not supported in the current release. Single Fiber Configuration View 11.6.4 Ms Configuration The Ms Configuration menu allows the SS bit provisioning for Multiplex Section Object (MSTTP) in SONET/SDH network interworking. This dialog allows configuring the line length for a PDH PPI TP of a 45 Mbit/s port.6. Ms Configuration 11.All rights reserved. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Figure 95.The Cancel button removes the dialog All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document. Figure 96. PDH Line Length Configuration View 11. Ethernet Port Configuration options ED 01 SC.6.6 Ethernet Port Configuration To set Ethernet port parameters.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 129/388 . select the Ethernet Port Configuration option of the Port -> Physical Media menu as shown in Figure below. Auto navigation “ : enable allows to configure the "Rate" to be negotiated (10 or 100 Mb/s). if parameters has been changed before pressing the Restart button. Ethernet Port Configuration Dialog For the Fast Ethernet (10/100 Mbit/s) port it is possible to choose between two “Configuration Type” : 1. "Manual” : allows forcing the "Rate" at 10 or 100 Mb/s. The "Directionality" is always Full Duplex Moreover It is possible to Restart the “Auto Negotiation” by depressing the relevant button. All rights reserved. Information dialog In read only mode there are indicatio n if the Auto negotiation on remote side is activated (Remote ED 01 SC.Subsequently Figure below. Figure 97. Will be opened. a question dialog is displayed to advice that the user has changed data but not applied them. Passing on and copying of this document. Figure 98. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. The "Directionality" (Full Duplex) and the "Flow Control" (Activated) are always enabled and can't be changed.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 130/388 . 2. 3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 131/388 .Auto Negotiation) and what parameters are allowed on remote (Remote Allowed Parameters). Passing on and copying of this document. In both cases is possible to check the “ Auto negotiation Current State”with the possible massage: –Completed OK –Completed KO –Configuring –Deactivated –Parallel Defect Fail –Other All rights reserved. At the bottom of the port view are displayed the following indications): –The “Interface Type” : • S1000 Base SX (only for Gigabit Ethernet board) • S1000 Base LX (only for Gigabit Ethernet board) • S1000CX (only for Gigabit Ethernet board) • S100BaseTX • S100BaseFX • Unknown • S10BaseT –The “Bit Rate”(only for fast Ethernet board): • 10 Mb/s • 100 Mb/s ED 01 SC. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. All rights reserved. Figure 99. Gigabit Ethernet port view (example) 11. Passing on and copying of this document.7 Ethernet Mapping Protocol Select a VC TP.6.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 132/388 . Click on PortEthernet Mapping Protocol option of the Port– > Physical Media menu. Figure below opens. ED 01 SC. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Figure 100. ED 01 SC. Passing on and copying of this document. The options available are the following: –FAST ETHERNET boards: • GFP null extension Header with FCS • GFP null extension Header without FCS • GFP for packed concatenation extended –GIGABIT ETHERNET boards: • GFP null extension Header with FCS • GFP null extension Header without FCS 11.8 Control Path Activation This dialog allows modifying the state of the Ethernet port virtualTPs.All rights reserved.6. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. a similar window is display when a new concatenated VCX is created in the “ ISA/IP/ETH configuration”window. This dialog aims to show the activation state of the virtualTPs present in the Ethernet Port View and to change the number of virtualTPs active. Select a TP in the Ethernet port view window.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 133/388 . Ethernet Mapping Protocol (EXAMPLE) This dialog aims to show the actual Ethernet mapping protocol used and allowing the user to change it. The Active state is reached by choosing the number of “ Virtual TPs to be active”and click on the Apply button. Click on Control Path Activation option of the Port– > Physical Media menu. A new window will be opened. Click on the Refresh button to update the changes. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Figure 101. ED 01 SC. Example figure below is the Active state. Passing on and copying of this document.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 134/388 .All rights reserved. Control Path Activation (example on Fast Ethernet board) On the contrary to change in Idle the Active state of a TP decrease the “ Virtual TPs to be active” field and then and click on the Apply button. Click on Close button to close the Control Path Activation window. The button "Apply" will set the configuration if the LCAS protocol is enabled. Passing on and copying of this document.6. a similar window is display when a new concatenated VCX is created in the “ ISA/IP/ETH configuration”window... ED 01 SC. This dialog aim is LCAS (Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme) protocol management of the TPs present in the Ethernet Port View. 11. Click on LCAS Configuration option of the Port– > Physical Media menu.).3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 135/388 . A new window will be opened.9 LCAS Configuration This dialog allows modifying the state of the Ethernet port. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.All rights reserved. Select a TP in the Ethernet port view window. In the following picture we can note that are managed all the attributes described before and the two actions are managed by means of the two buttons (Enable/Disable and Monitoring. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Passing on and copying of this document.All rights reserved.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 136/388 . LCAS Configuration The "Monitoring." button start the "LCAS protocol monitoring" view like the figure below. ED 01 SC. Figure 102... defect detection and consequent actions. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.All rights reserved. Moreover.703/G. it generates substitution frames in case of detection of LOS on the signal coming from a Terminal Equipment. The PRA functionality has been extended in order to manage proprietary handling of the bits of Time Slot 0 (Framed with leased line PRA option) in terms of state.703/G.704 frame management. it extracts in sink direction and writes in source direction particular bits (E.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 137/388 . TP Frame Mode Configuration can also be accessed from the “ Transmission”and ED 01 SC. This TP Frame Mode Configuration option is available for: –P12– CTP Select the desired P12– CTP and then the Port – >TP Frame Mode Configuration option. Figure 103. PRA management The PRA functionality performs termination bi– directional function for Time Slot 0 on framed with CRC– 4 2 Mbit/s signal. G. In detail. Passing on and copying of this document.704 management This functionality allows to activate the adaptation function to process a framed (G.703 interface) 2Mbit/s signal. Sa6 and A) of the Time Slot 0.7 TP Frame Mode Configuration This menu item enables the configuration of the most important transmission parameters concerning the Primary Rate Access (PRA) and G. Sa5. LCAS Monitoring 11.704 interface) or not framed (G. defect detection and consequent action. Figure 104. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. • “Framed without PRA”(G.703 interface): the PRA function cannot be activated. Passing on and copying of this document. the user can choose one of the following value: • ”Not Framed” (G.704): the behavior according to ETS 300– 233 is applied in the handling of bits of Time Slot 0 in terms of state. the possible value are: • “ Disabled”that disables the CRC– 4 • “ Forced”that configures CRC– 4 with consequent actions • “ Automatic”that triggers the CRC– 4 algorithms in order to allow interworking of pieces of equipment with and without a CRC4 capability.“ Synchronization”view menu. • “Monitoring Enabling”: enable or disable the CRC– 4 error counting • ”Remote Indication”: read– only field that indicates if status of CRC– 4 error counting ED 01 SC. TP Frame Mode Configuration The windows contains the following graphical objects: –” Framed Signal Mode”that allows to configure the attribute framed Signal Mode. • ”Framed with PRA” : PRA function is activated • ”Framed with leased line PRA”: a proprietary leased line behavior is applied. The following dialog appears: All rights reserved. –“ CRC4 Status“that defines the monitoring capabilities applied to the signal with a CRC multiframe: • “Operation”: allows to configure the CRC– 4 processing modalities.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 138/388 . –“ Loss of Synch Consequent Action”allows to perform the consequent action on the transmitted 2M/s signal with retiming when the CRU is in Holdover or Free running mode. 11. the consequent action is performed only if PRA or leased line application ha been configured on the associated P12– CTP. Passing on and copying of this document. –“ Frame Status”is a read– only field that reports an indication of the received signal: •” No indication” • “ The 2Mb/s signal is multi– frame” All rights reserved. (Example) opens.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 139/388 . ED 01 SC. Press Ok to apply the parameters or Cancel to close the dialog.8 Show Supporting Board Select a TP.functionality of far– end NE is enabled or disabled. Figure below. Click on Show Supporting Board menu option of the Port menu to navigate to the board that supports the selected port view. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Board View Example. 11.9 Navigate to Transmission View Select a TP. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Figure 105. Passing on and copying of this document.All rights reserved. Navigation to the Transmission view permits to show a complete overview about the signal flow as for the example of the following figure. Click on Navigate to Transmission View menu option of the Port menu to navigate to the corresponding Transmission View that is related to the selected TP.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 140/388 . ED 01 SC. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. ED Figure 106.All rights reserved.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 141/388 . Passing on and copying of this document. “ Navigate to Transmission view”selection 01 SC. 10 Navigate to Monitoring View Select a TP where are configured some Monitoring Operations (POM. In Figure below is shown an example of Monitoring View of a TP with POM and TCM both before and after matrix. SUT. ED 01 SC. Figure 107. SUT.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 142/388 . Passing on and copying of this document. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. After “ Navigate to Transmission view”selection 11. Navigation to the Monitoring view permits to show a complete overview about the Monitoring Operations (POM.All rights reserved. TC) Click on Navigate to Monitoring View menu option of the Port menu to navigate to the corresponding Monitoring View that is related to the selected TP. TC) as for the example of the following figure. All rights reserved. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Passing on and copying of this document. View of Monitoring Operations (example) 3AL 98104 ADAA 143/388 .3: NE MANAGEMENT Figure 108. ED 01 SC. Group type: 1+1 or 1+n The group type specifies if one or more unreliable resources for protection can be assigned to one or more reliable resources. the switch to the protecting element is maintained even after a recovery from failure. consequent to equipment failure. handling millions of communications. 1+n group type means that only one protecting unit protects n working elements. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.1 Introduction It is unthinkable to launch a telecommunications system. which can be configured: • All rights reserved.. This protection is realized according to a protection scheme. 2. ED 01 SC. the protection wait to restore time prevents several protection switches due to an intermittent failure. The actions that can be undertaken are of the following type: • • Consult and modify an Equipment Protection Scheme (EPS). • Protection wait to restore time: Used when revertive mode is active.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 144/388 . • Protection priority: A priority can be assigned to protected units in 1+n protection schemes. An equipment protection scheme is composed of the following parameters. In non-revertive mode. Everything must be done so that the communications can continue smoothly and so that the equipment failure remains transparent to the users. Board duplication remains the easiest way to ensure equipment protection in a system. Force Switch EPS. or n. 1+1 group type means that one protecting unit protects a working element. Protection management deals with this aspect of the EML-USM. . a protected service will be switched back to its protected element when it has recovered from its failure. • Configuration type: revertive or non revertive In revertive mode. 1 being the highest priority.12 Equipment Protection management (EPS) 12. Switching the board supporting the protected service when this board fails to a protecting board capable of supporting the same service performs the protection. without the possibility of replacing equipment in a real time way. This priority can be 1. A protected element must be fault free during this fixed period of time before a protected service is switched back to it. Passing on and copying of this document.. Select the EPS pull down menu.. The functional state message area of the boards involved in an equipment protection scheme displays EPS protection states. • • Select the Equipment option in the View pull down menu. 12. The available protection schemes are coherent with the NE type and release.. All rights reserved.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 145/388 . The current release of this NE fixes the following protection: • N+1 (with N 6) "P63E1 or P63E1N" protection . Passing on and copying of this document.Board of slot MAIN (protected): P63E1 or P63E1N. The right side of the dialogue box allows modifying the EPS configuration.In Board view. EPS Management dialogue box The EPS Management dialogue box shows the current NE protection schemes in the left side . Figure 110. Consulting EPS The following dialogue box is opened.2 Management: consulting and modifying EPS In order to consult EPS. perform the following operations: The "Port view" is reached selecting the Equipment option in the View pull down menu to present the subrack view. the board whose content is represented is considered as implicitly selected. slots 24-27-30-33-36-39 ED 01 SC. Then select the Management. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. The list gives for each protecting board the protected board(s). Figure 109. The spare card position can be assigned in a flexible way. no restriction for position of main and spare ATM MATRIX is present. no restriction for position of main and spare ATM MATRIX is present. In this configuration the ATM MATRIX and all indirect interfaces connected to it are protected against ATM module failure. • 1+1 ISA PR_EA (PREA4ETH.Board of slot SPARE (protecting): P4ES1N. In this configuration the ISA PR_EA and all indirect interfaces connected to it are protected against module failure. The only constraint is the following: • • • • • The access card corresponding to the protecting board must be an HPROT card The HPROT card has to be plugged at the left side of the access card group The main/spare boards have to be adjacent The protecting board has to be plugged at the left side of the protected group of boards The protecting/protected group of ports have to be of the same type • 1+1 "ATM MATRIX 4x4" protection The ATM MATRIX board can be protected in 1+1 equipment protection scheme.B.Board of slot MAIN (protected): P4E3/T3. The spare board position can be assigned in a flexible way.Board of slot MAIN (protected): P4ES1N. from slot 24 to 38 • All rights reserved. For P3E3/T3 and P4ES1N more than one protection group N+1 revertive can be created. The spare card position can be assigned in a flexible way.. This does not apply to the local STM-1 interface so the traffic on it is lost.Board of slot SPARE (protecting): P3E3/T3. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. depending on the equipment configuration. N+1 (with N 15) "P4ES1N" protection . A maximum of two protection group 1+1 not revertive can be created. This does not apply to the local interface so the traffic on it is lost. from slot 25 to 39 . from slot 25 to 39 . slot 32 • N+1 (with N 15) "P3E3/T3" protection . A maximum of two protection group 1+1 not revertive can be created. The spare card position ED 01 SC. PREA1GBE)”protection The ISA PR_EA boards can be protected in 1+1 equipment protection scheme.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 146/388 . A maximum of two protection group 1+1 not revertive can be created.Board of slot SPARE (protecting): P63E1 or P63E1N. from slot 24 to 38 N. Passing on and copying of this document. • 1+1 "ATM MATRIX 8x8" protection The ATM MATRIX board can be protected in 1+1 equipment protection scheme. In this configuration the ATM MATRIX and all indirect interfaces connected to it are protected against ATM module failure. no restrictions for position of main and spare ISA PR_EA are present. This operation fills the protecting element text field and the protected list with the board user name. The upper part provides a message field with the name of the Protecting board and a choose button to display the list of boards available. Passing on and copying of this document. The board are listed opening the NE>rack>subrack levels. If user clicks where there is no item displayed. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.can be assigned in a flexible way. In this way the right part is displayed empty and the Choose Protecting button is sensitive. The Cancel push button closes the dialog box. always using the same "Board Selection" list dialogue box presented. the right part is displayed empty. MATRIX spare (protecting) All rights reserved.Board of slot 23. The Cancel push button cancels the creation and closes the dialog box.B. a) Scheme displaying To display a specific scheme. N. For each type of failure on the MATRIX main board (CRU. user could add protected boards. the user selects a scheme in the left list. user could delete the scheme. A delete button enables user to remove a protected board from a scheme. This right side is divided into two parts. b) Scheme creation To create a new protection scheme. the OK button close the dialog box and create the scheme (the new list is update re-opening the EPS Management dialogue box). don't click on item in the left list. Choose Protecting button becomes insensitive and Choose Protected becomes sensitive. Using the Delete button. The lower part provides a list to display the Protected boards currently in the displayed scheme. After that operation. the user selects a scheme in the left list. A choose button is provided to display the list of boards which could be added as protected. Using Choose button for protected elements. Press this button to displays a window to choose a board in the "Board Selection" list. ED 01 SC. c) Scheme deletion To delete an existing protection scheme. It is not created with the EPS menu described in this chapter. When the right part of window is correctly filled. user selects an item on the left list. The user can add. MATRIX main (protected) . as many protected boards as wanted. Shelf Controller) a switch is performed to the spare boards The MATRIX protection is automatically presented in the left side of the dialog box when the SPARE MATRIX is created in the Set option of the Equipment menu.Board of slot 40. • 1+1 "MATRIX" protection .3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 147/388 . d) Scheme modification To modify an existing protection scheme by adding or removing protection units. Passing on and copying of this document. EPS: choose protected The EPS functional state of a board selected in the board view is displayed at the bottom of the view as shown in the following figures. ED 01 SC. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. the OK button close the dialog box and modify the scheme. All rights reserved.By selecting a protected board and using the Delete Protected button. The Cancel push button cancels the creation and closes the dialog box. user could remove protected elements from scheme. Figure 111.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 148/388 . EPS: board selection Figure 112. When the right part of window is correctly filled. Figure 113. Select the EPS pull down menu. EPS functional state from protected active board view All rights reserved. perform the following operations: • • Select a transmission board in the Equipment view. EPS functional state from protecting active board view 12. In order to configure. Figure 115 Configure EPS The following dialogue box is opened. EPS Management dialogue box The dialog box provides configuration for elements such as: ED 01 SC. Figure 116.3 Configuration: revertive and WTR for EPS This functionality configures Revertive and Wait Time to restore in a protection scheme. Passing on and copying of this document. Figure 114. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Then select the Configure.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 149/388 . 4 Switching EPS This functionality enables to force a protecting board to work even if there is not failure. The Cancel push button cancels the configuration and closes the dialog box. Select the EPS pull down menu. ED 01 SC. Notes: in the current release the Wait Time to Restore is fixed to 5 minutes. All rights reserved. The forced switch will fail if the other board is already forced switched or if the protecting board has a failure condition. Switching EPS The following dialogue box is opened. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Passing on and copying of this document. 12. In order to switch an EPS. perform the following operations: • • Select a transmission board in the Equipment view. from 60 to 600). Only for N+1 EPS. Figure 117. The available values are revertive and non revertive The wait time to restore time value (steps of 30 seconds. Then select the Switch.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 150/388 .• • • • • The name of the protecting element as a label The Equipment Type (board) of the protecting element as a label A list displaying the protected elements owned by the scheme The Revertive Mode flag as an option menu. For this NE: • • • • • • • 1+1 ATM MATRIX 4x4 is Not Revertive only 1+1 ATM MATRIX 8x8 is Not Revertive only 1+1 PR_EA is Not Revertive only 1+1 MATRIX is Not Revertive only N+1 63 x 2 Mbit/s (P63E1 or P63E1N) protection is Revertive N+1 3x34/45 Mbit/s (P3E3/T3) protection is Revertive N+1 4xSTM-1 ELECTRICAL port (P4ES1N) protection is Revertive When the configuration of the equipment protection scheme is completed confirm closing the dialog box by clicking on the OK push button. 5 EPS Overview EPS Overview allows displaying as well as search for EPS states.All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document. Clicking on the OK push button will initiate the switch and close the dialogue box.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 151/388 . only the Lockout options. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Figure 118. The Manual to command perform the "manual" switch. Opens ED 01 SC. EPS Switch dialogue box This dialogue box displays in its left part the EPS of the selected board. 12. Selecting the EPS Overview option from the Configuration pull down menu Figure below. in the current release. From this dialogue box the operator can configure. by clicking on the relevant radio button. The Cancel push button cancels the operation and closes the dialogue box. active only if the other board is not alarmed. the following filters values should be offered (examples) • • • • • • • • • Ignore SYNTH1N MATRIX MATRIXN P3E3/T3 P63E1 P63E1N P4ES1N ATM4X4 01 SC.All rights reserved. Figure 119. The search criteria can be chosen with the help of a combo box: . a filtering for all protection units located on a dedicated Board Type as well as a filtering for protection units carrying a specific Status.3: NE MANAGEMENT ED 3AL 98104 ADAA 152/388 . EPS overview To Search the EPS groups two different ways of filtering are supported. Passing on and copying of this document. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.Board Type: allows filtering for the EPS protected boards. the field below the Search button will be updated (see Figure below.) Figure 120. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Passing on and copying of this document. Ignore Normal DNR Auto-Fail Auto-WTR Manual Force Lockout After the filter selection click on Search button to start. 40) ED 01 SC. EPS overview after Search (Example) Each protection unit is presented with the following information: Protection Group (example protection Groupld. the following values should be offered (examples): • • • • • • • • All rights reserved..3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 153/388 .Status: allows filtering for all possible EPS protection states. Cyan (Indicative) for protecting protection unit active and no fail condition present in the schema (Do Not Revert State) At the button of the EPS Overview windows are available five buttons that allows navigating through the EPS management views and subrack view. N.B. A S F (Active) (Standby) (Faulty) - Protection Status: defines the current state of the protection unit follow • • • • • • • Normal DNR Auto-Fail Auto-WTR Manual Force Lockout (Do Not Revert) (Auto switch Equipment Fail) (Auto switch Wait Time to Restore) (Manual switch) (Force switch) The colors used for each row have the following meaning: .- Board Id (example r01sr1/board#40) Board Role: • • Ped Ping (Protected) (Protecting) - B Status (board status) • • • All rights reserved. Before to click on one of the five buttons select a row The buttons available are: . board view.) The possible protection states and the relevant symbols are explained in the following: Symbol EPS protection status No Request Do not Revert Lockout Auto Switch (WTR.Green (OK): for protected protection units active . protection unit in lockout or active on auto switch or commands .Red (Critical): for protected protection units in fail condition.Open Subrack View: opens the Subrack view showing the protection states with icons on the boards (see Figure below.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 154/388 . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Passing on and copying of this document. In this way the operator has a quick link towards the views showing the correlation between the alarms and the protection states.Orange (Major): for protected units in standby after a command and protecting protection unit in standby for auto switch or commands . Fail) ED 01 SC. and the relevant description. and the relevant description. and the relevant description. Passing on and copying of this document. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.Manual Forced All rights reserved. - Clock on Close button to exit from the EPS Overview window ED 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 155/388 . EPS Management: opens the EPS Management dialog box. Open Board View: opens the board view showing the alarm and the board administrative states Open Commands: opens the EPS Switch dialog box. EPS Parameters: opens the EPS Configuration dialog box. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Subrack view after “Open Subrack View” command 3AL 98104 ADAA 156/388 .3: NE MANAGEMENT Figure 121.All rights reserved. ED 01 SC. Passing on and copying of this document. Board view after “Open Board View” command 3AL 98104 ADAA 157/388 .All rights reserved. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. ED 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT Figure 122. Passing on and copying of this document. Architecture 1+1 Proprietary (not used) The reference switching criteria are SF and SD. G. For this NE is applicable the APS 1+1 Proprietary. the possible choice are: ED 01 SC.783/G841 as architecture 1 : n (with n=1). The APS 1+1 (not revertive) feature permits a 1+1 protection in a linear link. the system switches to the other cable and port. In dual ended mode (bidirectional) the protection is accomplished by switching both the affected and the unaffected signals. The SD threshold reference values depend on the NE selected threshold on the MS termination point. The reference switching criteria are SF and SD.1 Architecture types The Multiplex Section Protection in the connection between two NEs protected by cable and port duplication.3: NE MANAGEMENT All rights reserved. When occurs a multiplex section failure. The WTR time is used with revertive mode. 13. G783/G841. At the source the signal is duplicated and sent to the sink via two independent cables. No k1/k2 communication protocol is provided thus this protection can be only single ended. 3AL 98104 ADAA 158/388 . It provides a k1/k2 communication protocol thus this protection can be single or dual ended.Double click on the port icon to open the port view . Architecture 1+1 Optimized (not used) Architecture 1 : 1 Standard (not used) Described in ITU-T Rec. Passing on and copying of this document.13 Multiplex Section Protection Management 13.Double click on the SDH optical board to configure to open the port icon . The reference switching criteria are SF and SD.2 MSP Options Introduction All the MSP options are available starting from the Port View following the step explained below: . The MS Linear Trail Protection can be applied to any NE where it is possible to configure a linear APS (single ended/dual ended) line protection. The protection can be set both in single (unidirectional) and in dual (bidirectional) ended mode. The spare interface can be used to transport "low priority traffic". Signal Degrade (SD) software setting enables the MSP protection mechanisms when a SD is recognized on the working port. In single ended mode (unidirectional) the protection is accomplished by switching only the signal affected by the failure. where a path signal is protected by another dedicated path carrying the same signal. m the APS 1+1 Standard and the APS 1:1 Standard dual ended. It provides revertive mode managed by k1/k2 protocol and thus this protection can be single or dual ended.Select the MSP block in the port view and then choose the MSP options by clicking on Port -> MSP menu.Select Equipment from the Views menu . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Architecture 1+1 or N+1 Standard Described in ITU-T Rec. MSP Create Option Figure 124.) to open the MSP Schema Creation. Figure 123. MSP Schema Creation ED 01 SC.3 MSP Create All rights reserved. MSP Management. Select the MSP Create option from the Port -> MSP menu (see Figure below. MSP Commands and MSP Delete can also be accessed from the Transmission-> MSP menu 13.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 159/388 . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.• • • • MSP Create MSP Management MSP Commands MSP Delete MSP Create. Passing on and copying of this document. Passing on and copying of this document. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Figure below is opened ED 01 SC. Following steps are necessary: Choose Port Select a Port Role (protected or protecting) Define Channel Id (mandatory for MSP N: 1) Define SDH Priority (type of traffic. Is opened All rights reserved.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 160/388 .In this release two MSP Protection Schemas are supported: MSP 1+1 standard MSP N: 1 standard Select one and then click on Add Port button in the Ports field to create a MSP schema. High or Low) Figure 125. MSP schema creation Port dialog Select the Choose Port button to define the "Protected Port" and "Protecting Port" units. Figure below. On this right side select the OpS TP of the chosen board and then click on the OK button.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 161/388 . The "Filter Section" is divided into different fields. TP Search Click on Rack-Subrack and select the Board (Protected/Protecting) on the "Equipment" window (left side). The "termination Points" list (right side) is available. It permits to visualize a reduced TP Class.All rights reserved. OpS class must be selected. The comp lete TP research description is reported in the "Transmission View". Figure 126. It is possible to select the board through the "Board History" button selecting the board list menu. If used. Passing on and copying of this document. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. ED 01 SC. If it has been selected a Protected/Protecting port configured in a previously MSP schema protection an error message of access denied will be appear on the screen. MSP 1+1 standard protection schema (example) 13.Click on the OK button and repeat the operation for both “ Protected Port" and "Protecting Port". At the end click on the OK button to confirm the MSP protection schema configuration.4 MSP Management Select the MSP Management option from the Port -> MSP menu (see Figure below) to open the MSP Schema Configuration.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 162/388 . ED 01 SC. Passing on and copying of this document. An error message will be appear if the NE does not support the selected schema Figure 127. Also configure the MSP protection schema with the chosen Protection Schema and enter the related Schema Parameters according the following rules: • • All rights reserved. In the dialogue of Figure below. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. No revertive N+1 Standard can be only dual-ended Revertive. 1+1 Standard can be dual-ended or single-ended. An error message will be appear if the selected schema in not supported by the NE. Enable Switch on SD is not operative in current release. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. setting and state (protected or protecting) of the current SDH-n port.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 163/388 .All rights reserved. - Ports area display the current MSP schema: • • • • Port Id: identify the location of the board Role: identify the role of the board ("Protecting" or "Protected") Channel Id: mandatory for MSP N:1 (max. High or Low Configure the MSP protection Schema with the chosen protection schema and enter the related schema parameters.Schema Parameters: • • • • Dual Ended / Single Ended protection switch and directionality. Revertive/Non Revertive mode The WTR Time (Wait to Restore) is the delay time for switching protection and protecting port after recovery from failure / defect. value is 14) Priority: type of traffic. At the end click on the OK button to configure the MSP protection schema. MSP Management Option The MSP Schema Configuration dialog shows the current state of the MSP schema. ED 01 SC. Figure 128. Passing on and copying of this document. This dialog allows setting the configuration parameters for the designated multiplex section: Protection Schema reported in the previous paragraph Architecture Types . Passing on and copying of this document. If the operator wants to change the protection schema architecture or the ports involved in the MSP schema. all active switches must be cleared (manual switch. 13.).1 MSP modification The same MSP Management option can be used to modify the schema parameters of an active MSP configuration.All rights reserved. MSP Management View 13.4.) to open the "MSP Schema Deletion". lockout. Figure 129. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Before changing a single ended (unidirectional) schema into a dual ended (bidirectional). the current schema must be removed and re-created.5 MSP Delete Select the MSP Delete option from the Port->MSP menu (see Figure below.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 164/388 . ED 01 SC. MSP Group Status. The active protection status is referred to a protected/protecting port (where the traffic is transported): when a failure is detected. idle condition. the protecting port is ready to save the traffic (and becomes active).3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 165/388 . MSP Schema Deletion Click on "OK " button to delete the selected MSP Schema Configuration 13. "Own Unit" stands for the currently displayed unit in the port view.Active (red color) or Standby (orange color). Some examples are reported in Figure below.(green color) Displayed if an automatic switch is requested. the traffic is on the main port DNR: (abbreviation of Do Not Revert). "Related Unit" stands for the related unit of the same protection group. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. The standby protection status is referred to a protecting/protected port that is ready to save the traffic. Figure 131. normal. MSP Delete option All rights reserved. the SF or SD has been recovered but the traffic is switched on the spare port PF: a protection failure has been detected on the port RF: a release command has been failed ED 01 SC. The status indications are: NR: (abbreviation of No Request).6 Display of Protection State The MSP protection state of a port is displayed at the bottom of the Port view.Figure 130. The following states are always displayed: Port Status . Passing on and copying of this document. MSP Own Unit and MSP Related Unit . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.Failure (in case of FOP) ED 01 SC. The following values are possible: . A remote switch cannot be released locally.FOP: a failure of protocol has been detected Complete: = the bridge/switch actions are completed Pending: = the bridge/switch actions are pending The "complete" and "pending" indications precede the following statuses: AS: automatic protection switching enabled All rights reserved. Only present when a command is operative. but can be overwritten by a switch with higher priority.(green color) indicates where the operator commands (force/manual/lockout) have been performed. MS: a manual local protection command has been activated FS: a forced local protection command has been activated LO: a lockout local protection command has been activated SF/SD: Signal Failure or Signal Degraded has been detected WTR: wait time to restore status MSP Request Source .Local: switch due to near end SD/SF or local user switch command . .Remote: switch due to received K1/K2 bytes.OK . MSP Protocol Status This parameter indicates the current APS Protocol status. Passing on and copying of this document.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 166/388 . All rights reserved. with a forced command on the protecting group. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. with an automatic protection switching and with a forced command. shows where the forced command is applied.7 MSP Commands Select the MSP Commands option from the Port -> MSP menu (see Figure below) to open the "MSP Command window". In any situation are represent the statuses displayed on both protected/protecting Port views. ED 01 SC. The Active status indication. Figure 132. Represent a MSP configuration with a normal condition. 13. Passing on and copying of this document. MSP Protection Status Examples Figure up.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 167/388 . For 1+1 non-revertive system. The Force to command switches the working cha nnel (Protected port) to the protection section (Protecting port). ED 01 SC. by issuing a "Manual" switch request for that port (on the "Protection Status)" of MSP Management). manual switch no working channel transfers the working channel back from protection to working section. The lockout of protection command denies working channel access to the protection section by issuing a "Lockout" of protection request (on the "Protection Status" of MSP Management). unless a failure condition exits on the protection section or an equal or higher priority switch command is in effect. For 1+1 non-revertive system. by issuing a "Forced" switch request for that port (on the "Protection Status " of MSP Management). forced switch no working channel transfer the working channel back from protection to working section. unless an equal or higher priority request is in effect. Since forced switch has higher priority than SF or SD on working section. Is also possible to switch back to the working channel using again the "Manual to" Protected port command. Protected Port: the location of the board hosting the protected port is displayed. Since manual switch has lower priority than SF or SD on working section. It is also possible to switch back to the working channel using again the "Forced to" Protected port command. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 168/388 . unless an equal or higher priority request is in effect. this command will be carried out only if the working section is not in SF or SD condition The Clear WTR command cancels the delay time for switching protection and protecting port after recovery from failure/defect. Figure 133. Passing on and copying of this document.All rights reserved. this command will be carried out regardless of the working section condition. to remove the lockout commands select Release Ping (for the protecting) and Release Ped (for the protected). MSP Commands option Protecting Port: the location of the board hosting the protecting port is displayed. unless an equal or higher priority switch command is in effect or SF condition exits on the protection section. The Manual to command switches the working channel (Protection port) to the protection section (Protection port). It is possible to "Lockout the Protecting Port" or "Lockout the Protected Port". unless the protection channel is in use.8 MSP overview MSP Overview allows displaying as well as search for MSP states. Figure 134. MSP commands and Auto-switch protection priority Lockout of Forced to Auto--switch Manual to Protection Lockout of Protection Forced to Auto--switch Manual to ______________ Lockout ______________ Lockout Forced ______________ Lockout Forced Auto--switch ______________ Lockout Lockout Lockout Forced Forced Auto--switch 13. The Release command clears all previously switching commands. All rights reserved. "Auto-switch" is operative.: if an "Auto-switch" and a "Manual to" command are present. Passing on and copying of this document. Table 1. The first column on the left and the first row at the top report the switch protection and the external MSP commands.e. Selecting the MSP Overview option from the Configuration pull down menu Figure below opens ED 01 SC. The row/column crossing gives the command or protection result (i. Manual to. Gives the priority rules when are occurred two different commands.The Exercise command issues an exercise request for protection channel and checks response on MSP bytes. Table 1. Not operative in current release. This check controls the k1/k2 communication protocol functionality to be sure that the protocol is right also on the protection section.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 169/388 . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Auto-switch (SF&SD). MSP Commands The priority levels for the MSP commands are (from the higher to the lower one)_ Lockout. Force to. Passing on and copying of this document. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.All rights reserved. the following filters values should be offered (example): • • • • • • • Ignore P4ES1N P4S1N P4E4N P4S4N P16S1N S-41N 01 SC. Figure 135. MSP overview To Search the MSP groups two different ways of filtering are supported.3: NE MANAGEMENT ED 3AL 98104 ADAA 170/388 .Board Type: allows filtering for the MSP protected boards. a filtering foe all protection units located on a dedicated Board Type as well as a filtering for protection units’ carrying a specific Status. The search criteria can be chosen with the help of a combo box: . ) ED 01 SC. the following filters values should be offered (example): • • • • • • • • • • • Ignore NR (Normal) DNR Auto-SF Auto-SD Auto-WTR Manual Force Lockout APS Invalid (Fail) Bad channel (Fail) After the filter selection click on Search button to start.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 171/388 . the field below the Search button will be update (see Figure below.All rights reserved. • • • • • • • • • • • • • L-41N L-42N S-161 S-161N S-161ND L-161 L-161N L-161ND L-162 L-162N L-162ND MATRIX MATRIXN .Status: allows to filter for all possible EPS protection states. Passing on and copying of this document. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Figure 136. MSP overview after Search (Example) Each protection unit is presented with the following information: Protection Group (example protection Groupld, 137) Port Id (example r01sr1sl33/port#02-OpS) Role: • • Ped Ping Protected Protecting - Status (board status): • • • • A S F ET (Active) (Standby) (Faulty) Extra Traffic (Not operative) - Protection Status: defines the current state of the protection unit as follow ED 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 172/388 • • • • • • • • • • All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. NR (Normal) DNR (Do Not Revert) Auto-SF (AutoSwitch Signal Degrade) Auto-SD (AutoSwitch Signal Degrade) Auto-WTR (AutoSwitch Wait Time To Restore) Manual (Manual Switch) Force Lockout APS Invalid (Protection fail condition APS invalid) Bad channel (Protection fail condition Channel Mismatch) The colors used for each row have the following meaning: - Green (OK): for protected protection units active - Red (Critical): for protected protection units in fail condition, protection unit in lockout or active on autoswitch on commands - Orange (Major) for protected units in standby after a command and protecting protection unit in standby for autoswitch or commands - Cyan (Indicative: for protecting protection unit active and no fail condition present in the schema (Do Not Revert State) At the bottom of the MSP Overview windows are available five buttons that allows to navigate through the MSP management views and to open the Port View. By clicking on Open Port View the operator has a quick link towards the view showing the correlation between the alarms and the protection states. N.B. Before to click on one of the five buttons select a row The buttons available are: - Open Port view: opens the port view showing the correlation between the alarm and the MSP protection states. (See Figure below) - MSP Create: opens the MSP Create dialog box. - MSP Delete: opens the MSP Delete dialog box - MSP Management: opens the MSP Management dialog box - MSP Commands: opens the MSP Commands dialog box Click on Close button to exit from the EPS Overview window ED 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 173/388 All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. ED 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT Figure 137. Port view after “ Open Port View”commands 3AL 98104 ADAA 174/388 14 Transmission View 14.1 Overview This section describes the operations necessary for the consultation, modification and configuration of TPs, providing a representation of the entire signal flow. The generic Transmission View, described in this chapter, offers the possibility of displaying a single TP or a set of all kinds of TPs (or collected functionality which is represented by one/several TPs). To display the termination points in the Transmission View, either select specific TPs from a TP search dialog or access the view directly from another view, e.g. by navigating from the Port View. The Transmission View provides the following features: • All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Brief overview regarding transmission resources. o An overview concerning all TPs belonging to a port can be called in by activating the function to expand the selected TP. TP names are listed in an additional information area if the mouse pointer is positioned over it. The following states are indicated: - The alarm synthe sis icon indicates the alarm state - A cross indicates the cross-connection state - A circle indicates whether a TP can be structured - Whether a TP is under Performance Monitoring indicated by a blue "P" letter - Whether a TP is involved in a loop action, an arrow indicates it • An overview concerning signal flow can be requested by a user action. The user can select a TP and apply the action Show Cross-connected TPs . The result is that the objects related to the TP are displayed and lines indicate the connections. Expanding and hiding TPs that are related to the currently selected TP (e.g. show all TPs that are above the TU-12 CTP) enables all related TPs to be added to the view, thus providing a representation of the entire signal flow. Display of single or multiple termination points. o Search for and select a termination point in a TP search dialog and display it in the Transmission View. o Pop-up the Transmission View from the board view. All TPs/compound TPs associated with the physical port are displayed (i.e. TPs down to AU-4). Provide the functionality to create/show cross-connections. Provide the functionality to create/show Multiplex Section Protection (Not operative in the current release) Provide the functionality to create/show Loopback commands. Provide the possibility of configuring a selected TP. Calling the configuration dialogs of the common Transmission/Port Views category accesses this functionality. • • • • • ED 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 175/388 • • Provide the possibility of showing a detailed view of a TP with alarms, navigating to the Port view. Provide the possibility of showing and setting Performance Monitoring parameters and data. 14.2 View elements The Transmission View uses the symbols illustrated in Figure below. All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Figure 138. Symbols Used in Transmission View 14.3 View Layout The Transmission View is a main view. It provides views of specific areas, which display the transmission resources, and the specific Transmission View pull down menu, which provides the Transmission View operations. 14.3.1 View Description Figure below. Illustrates the Transmission View area. TPs that are received from the network element are displayed in the Transmission View with the respective TP and connection symbols described in The number of TPs presented initially depends on whether the Transmission View is popped up from a board view, whether a TP has been selected in another view or whether it is called without a selected TP. ED 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 176/388 When the "Transmission view" is reached selecting the Transmission option in the View pull down menu in its initial state contains no objects. All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Figure 139. Transmission View Area 14.3.2 Number of TPs Displayed in Transmission View It is possible both to expand a VC-4, thus displaying all underlying TPs, and to hide TPs, which are of no interest. The objects initially displayed depend on the situation/definition. 14.3.3 Naming TPs The following rules are applied in order to identify the TPs displayed: ED 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 177/388 • • The root node contains the full user label, All child nodes contain a short label indicating the position inside the tree. 14.3.4 Dynamic View Behaviour The following section describes the view states and provides a short description of events that affect the view. Initial state of the view In its initial state, the Transmission View contains no objects. Objects can be searched for and displayed using the Add TP dialog. All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Working state of the view In its working state, the Transmission View already contains objects. If the operator searches for and displays a TP using the TP Search dialog, the view is first initialized again and then the TP is displayed. The same applies in the case of navigation from another view to the Transmission View - the Transmission View is always initialized and the corresponding objects are then displayed in it. Navigation to Transmission View from other views If the Transmission View is popped up from the Port View, only the selected TP is displayed. Alarm notification The alarm synthesis icons of the TP objects indicate alarms concerning the TPs displayed graphically. The TP objects are updated accordingly. Object deletion The TP objects indicate all kinds of object deletion events related to TPs displayed. The graphical objects are removed accordingly from the Transmission View. Example: modification of the payload structure from 63 TU-12 to 3 TU-3. 14.4 Transmission view access and menu The "Transmission view" can be reached selecting the Transmission option in the View pull down menu. In this case, in its initial state, the Transmission View contains no objects. In the case of navigation from another view (example the "Port view") to the Transmission View, the Transmission View is always initialized and the corresponding objects are then displayed in it. Selecting the "Transmission" option in the menu bar the complete pull down Transmission menu is presented The following menu items are available: • • • • • • • • • Add TP Expand Hide selected TP. TP Configuration TP Frame Mode Configuration management TP Threshold Configuration Terminate TP Disterminate TP AU4 Concatenation Select the TP to show on the Transmission view. Display TPs that are related to the selected TP. Hide TPs that are related to the selected TP or the Set parameters for the Overhead on Synchronous TP's. Set parameters for 2Mbit/s G.703/G.704 or ISDN-PRA Set B2 ExBER and Degraded Signal parameters. Terminate a path on a AU-4 CTP Disterminate a path on a AU-4 CTP ED 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 178/388 • • • • • • • All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. • • Cross-Connection Manage the connection of the paths. Monitoring Operations Create, configure and delete POM/SUT and TC TP's. Performance Set and show Performance Monitoring parameters and data. Structure TPs Provides the possibility of structuring and destructuring selected TP Loopback Manage the loopback commands, for commissioning or maintenance purposes Physical Media Manage the physical TP setting. MSP Manage the Multiplex Section Protection of the NE. Not available for PDH port. See MSP Management. In this paragraph is not described the MSP>NE MSP synthesis option of the Transmission menu, not used in this NE. Show Supported Board Navigate to the upper board level. Navigate t o Port View Permit to show the detailed alarm of the TP. These options are described in next paragraphs except the previously referenced. Figure 140. Transmission menu options 14.5 Add TP Select the Transmission -> Add TP option. This menu item opens the TP Search dialog. The TP Search dialog enables the user to search for and add a TP to the Transmission View (e.g. search for all TPs on a board with PM enabled). 14.5.1 TP Search Default Mode In this mode, the dialog displays the structure of the equipment tree. After double-clicking, e.g. on a port, the contents of the port appear on the right-hand side of the dialog (TP list). To keep the ED 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 179/388 number of items displayed small, they are displayed in a hierarchical order. Double-click again to recall the next level All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Figure 141. TP Search Dialog, Initial State After double-clicking on an object, an Information window appears (see). The message text corresponds to the object selected. Figure 142. Information Window ED 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 180/388 It is possible to select several individual TPs from the TP list by clicking on them while holding down the Ctrl key on the keyboard.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 181/388 . All rights reserved. To select a block of TPs. TP Search Dialog with Various TP Selections After clicking on Show CC State. ED 01 SC. click on the first TP and then click on the last TP in the block while holding down the Shift key on the keyboard. But only the first TP selected in the list will be shown in the Transmission View. a more detailed TP list is displayed containing TP cross connection status information. Figure 143. Passing on and copying of this document. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. ED 01 SC. Figure 144. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Passing on and copying of this document. Select the relevant board from the list.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 182/388 . Symbols in TP Search The background color of the symbols represents the status of the TP: • • Grey = inactive Green = active An easy way to recall to previously displayed boards is to use Board History . TP Search Dialog with Status Information Displayed The symbols in the TP list have the following significance: Figure 145.All rights reserved. OGP. • Connection State (Current connectivity status): Ignore. Passing on and copying of this document. GMAU. VC-4. Figure 146. major. AUX. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. not alarmed • Assign State: Ignore.All rights reserved. TU-3. connected • Alarm State (Path Trace): Ignore. The following options are available: • Class: Ignore. RS. PPI. TU-3+VC-3. enabled • • • • TTI expect: not used TTI receive: not used TTI transmit: not used Location: Permits to insert the location of the TP in the following format: r<rack#>sr<subrack#>sl<slot#><port#> ED 01 SC. TU-12+VC12. E1S. OpS. TU-12. AU-4. not connected. VC-12. EML • Perf. minor. AU-4+VC-4. MS. warning. critical. TU2. Board History Check List Search Mode Use Search Mode together with the filtering options provided below the TP list.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 183/388 . NML. Monitoring (Performance Monitoring condition): Ignore. . Figure 148.”Dialog for Search Process ED 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 184/388 .• Name: not supported All rights reserved. TP Search Dialog with Different Filtering Options After activating the search process with the Search TP button.. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Clicking on Cancel can interrupt the search. “ Information. Passing on and copying of this document. Figure 147. the following dialog box appears. Passing on and copying of this document.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 185/388 . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Common Buttons The following buttons are available in all modes: Ok Closes the dialog and opens the Transmission View containing the selected TP. Close Closes the dialog without updating the Transmission View. Figure 149.B. It is recommended to search for PM-enabled TPs at the board level (a board is selected for the search). The dialog changes after clicking on File : Figure 150. When searching for PM-enabled TPs on NE. Print to File ED 01 SC. Rack or Subrack. the time for the request can be very high. Print This command is used to generate and print a list of TPs according to the current filter selection. The command opens the following dialog: All rights reserved.N. Print to Printer Select the desired printer from the list box and click on Ok to start the print job or abort with Cancel. Select if the output format should be Postscript or ASCII.Enter the name of the output file in the input field or select a file name from the File Select dialog by clicking on Select file .3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 186/388 . Example: • • • VC-4 TTP (140 Mbit/s PDH) VC-3 TTP (34 and 45 Mbit/s PDH) Mod VC-4 TTP (matrix resource) The main parameters are: ED 01 SC.6 TP Configuration Select the Transmission -> TP Configuration option. 14.1 High Order TP Configuration Depending on the TP selected. Figure 151. The output file is generated after clicking on Ok. 14. Passing on and copying of this document. TP Configuration can also be accessed from the "Port" view menu. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.6. Example Printout Help This command opens the online help for the TP-Search dialog. a dialog appears for the configuration of the main parameters of the objects. All rights reserved. Use Cancel to stop the process. the first byte is a CRC7 checksum calculated by NE. If the Path Trace is 16 bytes long. With the relevant button the operator can set the Expected field as: ED 01 SC. Passing on and copying of this document.6. it is filled with zero bytes ("0" hexadecimal). Figure 152. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.• • C2 Signal Label: "Automatic" (decided by the NE) or "Equipped not specific".3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 187/388 .1.1 J1 Path Trace Operative only on VC-4 in current release. The dialogs of the following figure appears: All rights reserved. High Order TP Configuration 14. Received fields are read only. If the Path Trace is shorter than 16 bytes. J1 Path Trace. J1 hexadecimal editor (example) 14. All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document..1. Expected and Transmitted fields are read only. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.TTI Disable .TTI Enable .2 C2 Signal Label Received.707 recommendations for the C2 Signal Label: • • 0: Unequipped 1: Equipped non-specific 01 SC. enter the default manually according to the following table Table 2. according the G.6. They can display the following number. Figure 153.3: NE MANAGEMENT ED 3AL 98104 ADAA 188/388 .TTI Repeated The Transmitted field can be set with TTI Enable or TTI Repeated byte Empty TTI button permits to send an all zeroes path trace. Default value for C2/V5 Signal Label VC-4 TTP / AU4 CTP VC-4 TTP VC3-TTP (SDH) (PDH) C2 C2 C2 2 18 4 TP Significant Byte Default value VC-12 TTP V5 2 Click on Hex button will be opened displaying in hexadecimal code the same value reported in Transmitted and received field. To replace modified with the default. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. ED 01 SC. In the Transmitted field it is possible to select the values: All rights reserved.• • • • • • • 2: TUG structure 3: Locked TU-n 4: Asynchronous 34/45Mbyte 18: Asynchronous 140Mbyte 19: ATM 20: MAN. DQDB 21: FDDI.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 189/388 . This dialog shows the current values for received.2 J0 Section Trace management Select RST block and then select Port -> TP Configuration The fields of the following figure appears: Figure 154. Expected and Transmitted fields are editable by the operator. Equipped not specific (it corresponds to number 1) 14. Passing on and copying of this document. The received trail trace is read-only. With the relevant button it is possible to enable or disable TTI Monitoring. expected and transmitted trail trace and it allows the operator to change only the values of expected and transmitted trail trace. J0 Configuration This function is implemented in order to manage the J0 Trace configuration. • • Automatic: the NE according the VC structure automatically selects the C2 Signal Label value.6. Not operative in current release.6. Low Order TP Configuration Click on Hex button will be opened displaying in hexadecimal code the same value reported in Transmitted and received field. Passing on and copying of this document. 14.3 Low Order TP Configuration Depending on the TP selected. J2 Path Trace. a dialog to configure the main parameters of the following objects: • VC-12 TTP. The main parameters are: All rights reserved. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. ED 01 SC. The following dialogs appears: Figure 155.Click on Hex button will be opened displaying in hexadecimal code the same value reported in Transmitted and received field. "Automatic" (decided by the NE) or "Equipped not specific".3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 190/388 . • • V5 Signal Label. J2 hexadecimal editor 14. Empty TTI send an all zeroes path trace.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 191/388 . Mode1 enable the 16 bytes long sequence for Path trace One repeated byte allows setting one byte that will be repeated Received fields are read only. They can display the following number.All rights reserved.6. enter the default manually according to the value reported in Table 2. the first byte is a CRC7 checksum calculated by the NE.707 recommendations for the V5 Signal Label: • • • • • 0: Unequipped 1: Equipped non-specific 2: Asynchronous 3: Bit Synchronous 4: Byte Synchronous In the Transmitted field it is possible to select the values: • • Automatic: the NE according the VC structure automatically selects the C2 Signal Label value. Expected and Transmitted fields are editable by the operator. With the relevant button it is possible to enable or Disable TTI Monitoring. Figure 156. Equipped not specific (it corresponds to number 1) To replace modified with the default. If the Path Trace is shorter than 16 bytes. Expected and Transmitted fields are read only.6.3. Passing on and copying of this document. according the G. If the Path Trace is 16 bytes long. ED 01 SC. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. it is filled with zero bytes ("0" hexadecimal).2 V5 Signal Label Received.3. 14.1 J2 Path Trace Not operative in current release. "Framed Signal Mode" that allows to configure the attribute framed Signal Mode. TP Frame Mode Configuration The windows contains the following graphical objects: .3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 192/388 .P12 Select the Transmission -> TP Frame Mode Configuration option TP Frame Mode Configuration can also be accessed from the "Port" and "Synchronization" view menu. Figure 157.14.703 interface): the PRA function cannot be activate. the user can choose one of the following value: • • "Not Framed" (G. defect detection and consequent action.704 frame management. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. 01 ED SC.703/G. "Framed without PRA" (G.704): the behavior according to ETS 300-233 is applied in the handling of bits of Time Slot 0 in terms of state. This menu item enables the configuration of the most important transmission parameters concerning the Primary Rate Access and G. Passing on and copying of this document. The following dialog appears: All rights reserved.7 TP Frame Mode Configuration This command is available for: . frame" Press OK to apply the parameters or Cancel to close the dialog 14. Figure below.Burst Parameters .Threshold: 10-5 to 10-9 . Will be opened.Threshold: 10-3 to 10-5 Enable Consequent Actions: fixed to enables . - "Frame Status" that reports an indication of the received signal: • • "No indication" "The 2Mb/s signal is multi.Consecutive Bad Seconds: 2 to 10 ED 01 SC. Passing on and copying of this document.8 TP Threshold Configuration This menu allows the operator to set the alarm thresholds for MST and VCi layer.Poisson distribution enable configuration of the Excessive Bit Error Ratio (ExBER on MST. Select the MST or the VCi block Select the Transmission -> TP Threshold Configuration option."CRC4 Mode" that defines the monitoring capabilities applied to the signal with a CRC multiframe: • • "Enabling" : enable or disable the CRC-4 error counting "Remote Indication" : red-only field that indicates if status of CRC-4 error counting functionality of far-end NE is enabled or disabled All rights reserved.Signal Degrade . The user can select one of the two different Defect distributions: .• • "Framed with PRA" : PRA function are activated "Framed with leased line PRA" a proprietary leased line behavior is a applied. . VCi) threshold and of the Signal Degrade (SD on MST.Threshold: 1 or 10 or 100 or 1000 . .Burst Parameters . VC) threshold of the TP's related counted primitives.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 193/388 .ExBER . . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.Burst distribution enable configuration of the maximum number of error frames and the total a amount of bad block per frame. Degraded Signal Threshold selection Click on OK to confirm the chosen parameters. 14.9.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 194/388 . Figure 158.1 Terminate TP Use this action to terminate a path. A cross-connection between the selected AU-4 CTP (= aTP) and a modifiable VC-4 TTP (= bTP) is created.9 Terminate/Disterminate TP Select the Transmission -> Terminate TP or Disterminate TP option. A cross appears in the icon of the terminated TP: If the TP is already cross-connected a error message appears.All rights reserved. It can be performed on a AU-4 CTP. Only one command in the menu is available. ED 01 SC. depending on whether a TP is terminated or not. Three TUG-3 and TU-3 are created if the modifiable VC-4 TTP was not already structured. 14. Passing on and copying of this document. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. before disterminating a TP. It can be performed on a AU-4 CTP. This command is available for: • • • AU-4 CTP TU-3 CTP TU-12 CTP 01 SC. 14. NOTE: the “ Disterminate”action is not possible in the case that is still existing any operation/connection/termination on the underlying signals. Supervised Unequipped Termination and Tandem Connection). The related crossconnection is deleted.10 Monitoring Operations Select the Transmission -> Monitoring Operations option as for the following figure.14. Monitoring Operations can also be accessed from the "Port" view menu. in the same order as above listed.3: NE MANAGEMENT ED 3AL 98104 ADAA 195/388 .9. such as: • Performance Monitoring on lower or higher TPs • POM / HPOM operations • Lower order Connections • Higher order Connections • Lower/Higher order Path Terminations • Loop– backs on lower TPs Thus the deletion of every operation/connection/termination is necessary. Passing on and copying of this document. Creation/Deletion and Configuration options are present.2 Disterminate TP Use this action to disterminate a path. in order to confirm the TP distermination . The commands of this menu item are for the management of the POM/SUT /TC (Path Overhead Monitoring . All rights reserved. A box message will be presented. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. 10. Figure 159. not operative in current release. The dialog shown in the following Figure below opens All rights reserved.14. Passing on and copying of this document. Monitoring Operations Creation/Deletion The Path Overhead Monitoring has the following parameters: • • Before Matrix (available only on AU-4 CTP) After Matrix The Supervisory Unequipped Termination.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 196/388 . has the following parameters: • • • • Sink (before matrix) Sink (after matrix) Source Bidirectional The Tandem Connection has the following configurable parameters: • Tandem Connections Monitoring (TCM): TCM Before Matrix TCM After Matrix • Tandem Connection Termination (TCT): TCT Bidirectional Before Matrix ED 01 SC.1Creation/Deletion The dialog allows multiple object creation/deletion. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. - TCT Bidirectional After Matrix Press Ok to apply the parameters or Close to close the dialog and discard the not with Ok applied changes. When select and apply the Path Overhead Monitoring.B.2Configuration Depending on the parameters selected in the Monitoring Operations Creation/Deletion dialog. It is possible to open the POM and TCT/TCM Configuration dialog for a CTP even if neither Path Overhead Monitor nor Tandem Connection was created before (SUT isn't available in this release).10. No changes can be made in this case and the values displayed can be ignored. the changes will be displayed in the Port View in the following manner: All rights reserved. the changes will be displayed in the Port View in the following manner: Figure 161. not all sections of the dialog are available. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 197/388 . ED 01 SC. N. Display of POM and TCM in Port View (example) When select and apply the Tandem Connection Monitoring / Tandem Connection Termination. Passing on and copying of this document. Figure 160. Display of POM and TCM/TCT in Port View (example) 14. ED 01 SC. The following TTI Definitions are available: • • • TTI Expected TTI Received without the display TTI Sent The following TTI Types are available: • • • TTI Enabled TTI Disabled TTI Repeated Byte Error Distribution Poisson and Burst error distribution are supported TCM/TCT Cons Actions It is needed to support explicit consequent action activation (AIS insertion) for TCT sink and bidirectional. Figure 162.All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document. Monitor Configuration TTI Definition The TTI (Trail Trace Identifier) has a maximum length of 16 characters.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 198/388 . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. 3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 199/388 . • Burst Degrade Select a value between 1 and 1000 errors/sec for the Burst Degrade threshold. if a VC-4 TTP is selected and the menu item TU-12 is chosen. Passing on and copying of this document. e.Thresholds Set the thresholds of the following parameters: • Signal Degrade Poisson mode only: from 10-5 to 10-9 . Unequipped Trail Not available 14. • Burst Consecutive Select a value between 2 and 10 sec for the Burst Degrade Consecutive. the signal is structured down to 63 TU-12 CTPs. The level that is selected defines how the signal is to be structured. This menu item provides the possibility of structuring and destructuring a selected TP. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Alarm Timing Rising and Clearing Timing are not supported by OMSN.11 Structure TPs Select the Transmission -> Structure TPs option. The following menu items represent all those possible: ED 01 SC.g. • Excessive Error Poisson mode only: from 10-3 also if presented a selection from 10-3 to 10-5 All rights reserved. TU-12 TUG-3: TU-3. Not supported. Line Loopback And Continue Line Loopback And AIS Internal Loopback And Continue Internal Loopback and AIS ED 01 SC. 14.12. Modifiable VC-4 TTP: TU-3. VC-3/VC-4.• • • • • TU-2. VC-12. 14. The loopback architecture provides four configurations.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 200/388 . Passing on and copying of this document.12 Loopback The commands of this menu item are for the management of the loopback commands. The loopback commands are used to separate the communication network into independent part checking the line/equipment functionality during the network installation or maintenance operation. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Not supported. The following items are available for synchronous TPs: • • • All rights reserved. TU-12. Not supported. for commissioning or maintenance purposes. TU-12 TUG-2: TU-12.1Loopback Configuration The loopbacks can be applied at line (external to equipment) level or at internal equipment level. TU-3. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Passing on and copying of this document.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 201/388 .Internal loopback performed on: • • • • P12 for 2Mbit/s CTP P31 for 34/45Mbit/s CTP P4 for 140Mbit/s CTP SDH board: ED 01 SC. Figure 163. Loopback configurations Select a TP that supports the Loopback Configuration Loopbacks act on the following TPs: • PDH board (only from the Port View): .All rights reserved.Line loopback performed on: • P for 2/34/45/140 Mbit/s PPI . 2N. Figure below.) .3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 202/388 . etc. Port Loopback Configuration can also be accessed from the "Port" view menu.e. S-4. L-4. STM-16 SPI . L-4.1N. Passing on and copying of this document. P4S1N.Line loopback performed on: • • EIS for electrical STM-1 SPI OpS for optical STM-1. • MsT TTP for STM-1.Internal loopback performed on: All rights reserved. STM-4.1N. STM-16 ports Select the Transmission -> Loopback -> Port Loopback Configuration option. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Opens.The loopback configuration can be done only on SDH ports with the acronym ending with a "N" letter (i. STM-4. ED 01 SC. Passing on and copying of this document. Select the TP where to apply the loopback command. Port Loopbacks View Choose the TP clicking on the "Choose TP" button. 14. For this NE the "Timed Loopbacks" field is not managed and thus Start/Stop loopbacks time is not editable. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.12. Figure 164.2Loopback Management To manage the loopback configuration select the Transmission -> Loopback -> Loopback Management option.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 203/388 .All rights reserved. ED 01 SC. Passing on and copying of this document. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. ED 01 SC. Opens.All rights reserved.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 204/388 . Loopback Management can also be accessed from the "Port" view menu and from the "Configuration menu Figure below. This table can be managed by the "Search" criteria. Click on the "Search" button to start the configured loopback research into the current loopback table. Follow the previously paragraph indications to create a new loopback configuration. Passing on and copying of this document. The activated loopbacks are signaled in the Port view and in the Transmission view as for the following figures: ED 01 SC. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. port# and the TP type: EIS (SPI/PPI Electrical). Figure 165. The "Create" command permits to create a new loopback configuration: clicking on "Create" the previous figure opens.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 205/388 . MST and so on. "Delete" and "Create" commands. Enable the filter through the "Toggle Filter" Enable/Disable button. OpS (SPI/PPI Optical). board. No= Loop And AIS) then select the "Directionality" Internal or Line and edit the Initial TP Id (write: rack.All rights reserved. For "Initial TP" has to be intended the outgoing signal while for "Destination TP" the incoming signal. subrack. • • • Search Criteria (operative): to configure the filter select the "Loop and Continue" type (Yes= Loop And Continue. The "Delete" command permits to delete a loopback listed in the Current loopbacks Table: select a loopback in the list and click on the "Delete" button. Loopback Management The configured loopback are listed into the current loopbacks table. ED 01 SC. Figure 166.13 Physical Media Select the Transmission -> Physical Media option.All rights reserved.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 206/388 . Loopback Transmission View 14. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Passing on and copying of this document. Loopback Port View Figure 167. The user can set a manager clicking on the denomination.Show Optical Configuration. .13. .Regeneration Section management Not operative .All rights reserved. Select the Set Domain option from the Physical Media cascade menu to present the following view: The dialog-box contains the following fields: • NML Assignment: each connected manager to the TP is highlighted in the list.NT Configuration Not operative .1Set Domain This option is referred to the Security management and allows the user to set the Manager list and the Access Control Domain of the selected TP.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 207/388 . .Line Length Configuration.HDSL Configuration Not operative . ED 01 SC. The Physical Media options permit to set physical configuration of each TP.ALS Management. OpS for Optical SDH port.TX Quality Configuration. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.Single Fiber Configuration. . P (PPI) for PDH port.Set Domain. . Passing on and copying of this document.X21 Configuration Not operative 14. It opens a menu in which the various options will be available according the TP's type (for the option common with the "Port view" reference is made to the relevant paragraph): .Extra traffic Not operative . . Select the block: EIS for Electrical SDH port. EML) that work on the NE. Figure 168. The Manager List contains the list of managers ( i.e. SY. The EML-USM administrator (SH or Craft Terminal) should set the Manager List only to remove a manager in case of emergency (i.14.1Expand Select the Transmission -> Expand option. assigning it to the TP. Help button provides some useful information about the dialog. ED 01 SC. RM. Passing on and copying of this document. The different domains could be assigned to different operators. Set Domain 14.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 208/388 . All rights reserved. Cancel button close the dialog without changes of the data. having in charge the TP.e.14 Navigation Commands 14. the Manager misses the NE connection). use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. NPOS .Several managers can be enabled contemporaneously. • Resource domain field allow selecting the domain among that displayed in the list. OK button is used to validate the selection. This menu item provides the possibility of hiding all upper/lower TPs of a selected TP and the deletion of a selected TP.14. • • • • Show next level of lower TPs. Show all lower TPs. Passing on and copying of this document. Selected TPs.2Hide Select the Transmission -> Hide option. Show next level of upper TPs. ED 01 SC. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. These may be TPs that are contained by the TP or TPs. • • • Lower TPs. 14.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 209/388 . which belong to the physical port that is actually connected to the TP. Show all upper TPs. 14. The Board View appears. This menu provides the possibility of navigating directly to the board that supports the TP. Upper TPs.3Show Supported Board Select the Transmission -> Show Supported Board option.14.This menu item provides the possibility of displaying TPs that are related to the selected TP. All rights reserved. The Port View appears. This menu provides the possibility of navigating to the corresponding Port View related to the selected TP in order to access a detailed overview of alarms quickly.All rights reserved. Figure 169.14.4Navigate to Port View Select the Transmission -> Navigate to Port View option. Passing on and copying of this document. Board View 14. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. ED 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 210/388 . Port View 14.14.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 211/388 . then click on Transmission – > Navigate to Port View option. as for the following figure: ED 01 SC. The HOA port displays the internal structure of the payload. Figure 170.All rights reserved.5Navigate to HOA Port After selected a structured VC or TU. Passing on and copying of this document. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Navigate to HOA Port 3AL 98104 ADAA 212/388 .All rights reserved.3: NE MANAGEMENT Figure 171. Passing on and copying of this document. ED 01 SC. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. lockout protection) on cross-connections "Print" deals with printing out list entries on printers or into files "Port Switch Over" not operative.2 Multiplex Structures for SDH By introducing the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH). Each of the user channels (2 Mbit/s.a Tributary Unit (TU) is generated. in respect of the STM-1 frame. The following chapters provide the user with information concerning operations on crossconnections: All rights reserved. certain filling algorithms are available. "Show Cross-Connected TPs" describes the possibility of showing connections between two or more TPs of different hierarchies. Path Overhead and Container together form the Virtual Container (VC). "Protection Switching" deals with switching actions (force. Passing on and copying of this document. 15. The STM-1 signal structure is achieved by using the multiplex structure complying with ITU-T and ETSI.1 Introduction 15. 34 Mbit/s.1. deactivation and deletion of cross-connections.1. Fix fill bits are inserted into synchronous signals.g. • • • • • • • • • • • • • "Multiplex Structures for SDH" gives an overview on the SDH technology "Definition of Termination Points" gives an overview about the termination points implemented on the NE "Cross-Connection Types" provides information concerning cross-connection types supported by the NE "Cross-Connection Protection" provides information concerning cross-connection protection supported by the NE "Operative sequence to execute Cross-Connections" details the complete procedure to realize cross-connection "Cross-Connections Management" details the contents of the main cross-connections view "Create/Modify Cross-Connections" describes the creation and modification of crossconnections "Activate/Deactivate/Delete Cross-Connections" describes the activation.15 Cross-Connection Management 15. matching the European with the American standard. Activation and deactivation not supported in current release. manual. The SDH signal structure contains an extended overhead as well as a fixed pointer controlled assignment of the user signal elements. connection between au4 and vc4. thus improving the possibilities of the network management.if several Containers of a group are to be combined . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. a standardized transmission has been created. A byte column (9 Byte) as Path Overhead (POH) is added to the Container (C) generated.1 Overview The purpose of this domain is to manage the connection of the high and low level path. With the pointer pointing to the start of the VC. "Split and Join Cross-Connections" describes how to split or join bidirectional crossconnections. 45 Mbit/s and 140 Mbit/s) is packed into a container synchronous to the STM-1 frame according to a predefined structure. To adjust the plesiochronous signals to the synchronous network clock. an Administrative Unit (AU) or .3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 213/388 . Synchronous multiplexers into Virtual Containers (VC) pack signals of the Synchronous and Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy (PDH). Several TUs form a Tributary Unit Group (TUG) and TUGs ED 01 SC. Not supported in current release. e. again can be combined into a VC. Figure 172. All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document. finally makes up the STM-1 frame. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. together with the Section Overhead (SOH). The AU of the signal.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 214/388 .709 The STM-1 frame consists of: • • • A Section Overhead (SOH) An AU Pointer area A payload area ED 01 SC. SDH Multiplex Structure according to ITU-T G. A VC-4 may contain one C-4 or three TUG-3. An STM-1 user signal can be constructed of: • • • • • • • • • • Either 1 x VC-4 Or 3 x VC-3 Or 2 x VC-3 + 7 x VC-2 Or 2 x VC-3 + 21 x VC-12 Or 1 x VC-3 + 14 x VC-2 Or 1 x VC-3 + 7 x VC-2 + 21 x VC-12 Or 21 x VC-2 Or 14 x VC-2 + 21 x VC-12 Or 7 x VC-2 + 42 x VC-12 Or 63 x VC-12. Each TUG-3 may contain one VC-3 or seven TUG-2. Figure 173.520 Mbit/s. These Virtual Containers are of different size and may be nested or packed differently. Each TUG-2 contains three VC-12 or one VC-2.All rights reserved. ED 01 SC. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. A single user channel is packed into a Virtual Container.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 215/388 . Frame Construction within the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy The STM-1 frame has a basic bit rate of 155. Passing on and copying of this document. Virtual Containers for the European bit rates: • • • • The STM-1 frame contains a VC-4. 488.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 216/388 . • CTPs on PDH level On PDH level a distinction is made between the following CTPs: • E4 (Connection Termination Point) The E4-CTP represents the non. the following abbreviations are used. the received signal is monitored and the error signaling evaluated.. e. i. TU-3CTP The TU.intrusive monitoring of outgoing 140 Mbit/s PPI ED 01 SC. The High-order Connection Supervision (HCS) function is included.320 Mbit/s is generated by combining sixteen STM-1 signals byte interleaved. The Low-order Connection Supervision (LCS) function is included. As a rule. Passing on and copying of this document. TU-2CTP. • CTP (Connection Termination Point) The CTP represents the termination of a connection. The signal is monitored and passed on after modification in one form or another. A distinction is made between the following types of TPs: All rights reserved. The transmission signal is "terminated". • TTP (Trail Termination Point) The TTP represents the termination of a transmission segment.STM-N signals are constructed by integer multiples of the basic signal STM-1 of 155. a Termination Point (TP) is the starting and terminating point of a transmission segment. while own-code signaling is inserted in the transmitted signal.intrusive monitoring of incoming 140 Mbit/s PPI • S4 (Connection Termination Point) The S4-CTP represents the non. • CTPs on SDH level On SDH level a distinction is made between the following CTPs: • AU4 (au4 Connection Termination Point) The AU-4CTP represents both the creation and termination of an STM-1 connection.3 Definition of Termination Points (TP) When ports are depicted on the user interface. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.520 Mbit/s. Both TP types exist on the SDH level and the PDH level.x CTP represents both the creation and termination of a VC-x connection. This section concerns the multiplex structure as well as on the information model of object-oriented programming which was used when forming the user interface. • TU-x (Connection Termination Point). 15.e. For example an STM-16 signal of 2.g.1. TU-12CTP. The Mon.intrusive monitoring of incoming 34 Mbit/s PPI • S31 (Connection Termination Point) The S31-CTP represents the non. i.intrusive monitoring of outgoing 2 Mbit/s PPI.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 217/388 .intrusive monitoring of outgoing 34 Mbit/s PPI • E1 (Connection Termination Point) The E1-CTP represents the non. • OS (Optical Section TTP) An OSTTP displays the physical characteristics of a port with optical access (level and code monitoring and conversion). The Mon. E31 (Connection Termination Point) The E31-CTP represents represent the non.intrusive monitoring of outgoing 2 Mbit/s PPI.• E32 (Connection Termination Point) The E32-CTP represents represent the non. • S1 (Connection Termination Point) The S1-CTP represents the non. • MST (Multiplexer Section TTP) ED 01 SC. • RST (Regenerator Section TTP) An RSTTP displays the creation and/or termination of an RSOH (Regenerator Section Overhead). Passing on and copying of this document.e. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.intrusive monitoring of incoming 45 Mbit/s PPI • S32 (Connection Termination Point) The S32-CTP represents the non. (monitoring) label indicates that is possible to enable the CRC4 control signal. rows 1 to 3 of the first 9xN columns of an STM-N frame. (Monitoring) label indicates that is possible to enable the CRC4 control signal.intrusive monitoring of outgoing 45 Mbit/s PPI • All rights reserved. • TTPs on SDH level On SDH level a distinction is made between the following TTPs: • ES (Electrical Section TTP) An ESTTP displays the physical characteristics of a port with electrical access (level and code monitoring and conversion).. • VC-4 (Trail Termination Point) A VC-4 TTP represents both the creation and termination of a VC-4 path. a 45MBit/s. • TTPs on PDH level On PDH level a distinction is made between the following TTPs: All rights reserved. a pPITTP corresponds to the esTTP of the synchronous side. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. • P (pPI Trail Termination Point) On the PDH side. • E3 (Trail Termination Point) The E3-TTP represents the creation and/or termination of a 34 Mbit/s connection.An MSTTP displays the creation and/or termination of an MSOH (Multiplexer Section Overhead). a 34 Mbit/s or a 2 Mbit/s port. an PPITTP corresponds to the ESTTP of the synchronous side. a 34 Mbit/s or a 2 Mbit/s port. . it can either display the characteristics of a 140 Mbit/s. it can either display the characteristics of a 140 Mbit/s. • E4 (Trail Termination Point) The E4-TTP represents the creation and/or termination of a 140 Mbit/s connection. rows 5 to 9 of the first 9xN columns of an STM-N frame. • E2 (Trail Termination Point) The E2-TTP represents the creation and/or termination of a 8 Mbit/s connection. Passing on and copying of this document. Depending on the type. Depending on the type. • PPI (Trail Termination Point) On the PDH side..MSP definition ED 01 SC. i. • VC-3 (Trail Termination Point) A VC-3 TTP represents both the creation and termination of a VC-3 path.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 218/388 .e. a 45 Mbit/s. • VC-12 (Trail Termination Point) A VC-12 TTP represents both the creation and termination of a VC-12 path. • VC-4 (Trail Termination Point) A VC-4 TTP represents both the creation and termination of a VC-4 path. the MSNP (AU4-CTP) input enters two different MSNP/MSN (unprotected CTP) sources and then the MSN-TTP working and protection sources (to insert the K1-K2 bytes) are sent to the own SPI interfaces. Receive side. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. All rights reserved.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 219/388 . Figure 174. SDH Transport Level Diagram ED 01 SC. The MSNP-TTP terminates the selected signal and checks the SSF and the MSP protocol failure. Passing on and copying of this document. the working and protection MSN/MSNP outputs (AU4CTP) enter in the switching selector.Transmit side. Therefore they differ from the TP names given in the ITU-T recommendations. Figure 175.All rights reserved. PDH Transport Level Diagram 15.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 220/388 . The following tables list the TP names mapping conventions in the "Transmission" View.1. Passing on and copying of this document.4 Mapping Tables: TP Names The TP names on the 1662SMC reflect the software model the user interface is based on. PDH TPs ITU-T TP names on 1662SMC PPITTP P E4 CTP eCTP S4 CTP p4 E31 CTP eCTP S31 CTP p31 E32 CTP eCTP S32 CTP p32 E1 CTP eCTP S1 CTP p12Mon E4 TTP not supported E3 TTP not supported E2 TTP not supported VC-4 TTP Vc4 VC-3 TTP Vc3 VC-12 TTP Vc12 ED 01 SC. Table 3. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. The configuration of both matrix copies is always identical. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. based on quality.1.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 221/388 . Unidirectional Connection 15. called the matrix port.5 Cross-Connection Types A cross-connection represents the logical connection between the input and output of the matrix.1.707. 15. there is no routing in reverse direction. Alcatel's standardized signal format for internal interfaces. The NE supports unidirectional. bidirectional and broadcast connections unprotected as well as protected.5. The VCs are sent from the I/O boards to both copies of the Matrix (A and B) via the GTI. The incoming signals are mapped or converted to GTI format on the plesiochronous and synchronous I/O boards.1. SDH TPs ITU-T ESTTP OSTTP RSTTP MSTTP MSP AU-4 CTP AU-4-4c CTP VC-4 TTP TUG-3 TUG-2 TU-3 CTP TU-2 CTP TU-12 CTP TP names on 1662SMC ElS OpS RST MST MSP Au4/Au4P Au4P-4c Vc4 Tug3 Tug2 Tu3 Tu2 Tu12 All rights reserved. VC-3.5. Figure 176. 15.5 Mbit/s to 140 Mbit/s) mapped to Virtual Containers (VCs). one GTI signal is selected from Copy A or Copy B. VC-2 or VC-12 level and transfers the VCs to the relevant I/O boards via GTI. It enables the transport of all signals in the US hierarchy and ETSI hierarchy levels 1 to 4 (1. The Generic Transport Interface GTI.Table 4. ED 01 SC. Passing on and copying of this document. The matrix performs the cross-connection on the VC-4. On the I/O boards. The matrix only receives and transmits signals in GTI format. is similar to the STM-1 format.2 Bidirectional Connection Information is transmitted between input port and output port in both directions (point-to-point).1 Unidirectional Connection Information is transmitted exclusively from the input port to the output port (point-to-point). This frame is based on the STM-1 frame specified by ITU-T Recommendation G. Passing on and copying of this document. N. In the example below. one source and one sink. Bidirectional Connection 15.6 Cross-Connection Protection 15.Figure 177. No errors are introduced to the original crossconnection with applying or removing the protection leg. the system automatically switches to the protection path from protection Input B to the Output.1. information is broadcast from one input to outputs A.1.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 222/388 . All rights reserved. Figure 178. ED 01 SC. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.B. B and C on three legs. In the case of a failure. 15. a broadcast connection consist of one source and several sinks.6.3 Broadcast Connection (Multi-leg / Multipoint) In contrast to a cross-connection between just two points (point-to-point). different `legs' that share the same source TP.5.1. This second connection is permanently kept in hot standby operation.1 Protected Unidirectional Connection A unidirectional connection is routed from Input A to the Output (primary route). Example of Broadcast Connection with Three Legs A warning box indicates when the resources available for broadcast connections are exhausted. Non-intrusive Monitoring Adding a protection leg to a unidirectional cross-connection offers the ability to perform nonintrusive monitoring on this cross-connection. protected.Input Protected All rights reserved. unidirectional connections using the same pair of input termination points.6. Therefore. ED 01 SC. 15.3 Protected Broadcast Connection The protected broadcast is realized as a set of independent. By means of this connection are created links with SNCP protection. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.B.2 Protected Bidirectional Connection A bidirectional connection is routed from Input A to the Output C (primary route). locked out or switched independently. if a failure occurs at a certain input. N.6. Bidirectional Connection . 15.1.Figure 179. By means of this connection are created links with SNCP protection.Input Protected N. Passing on and copying of this document. Each protection can be forced.B. Bidirectional Connection .1. it is possible that only some of the protections of the protected broadcast actually switch to the protection input. Input A (input protected) can be protected: Figure 180.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 223/388 . Drop and Continue . when receive from Input Protecting main the connection is defined inverse. B and C.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 224/388 .Figure 181. Figure 182. ED 01 SC.1. a new window called "Main Cross Connection" is opened. In current release only one out of N legs can be protected. Passing on and copying of this document.4 Drop and Continue Connection A Drop and Continue connection is a composed by: All rights reserved. All the connections are created in a single step of configuration. A unidirectional connection from Output C to Input A. when receive from Input main the connection is defined normal . • • • A unidirectional connection routed from Input A to the Output C and also to Input protecting B. Shows a broadcast connection from input A to outputs A. Leg 2 and 3 are protected via input B. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.2 Operative Sequence to execute Cross-Connections This paragraph lists general procedure to realize cross-connection moving among the various menus.Normal 15. Three main cases have been considered: • • • An high order signal cross connection (AU4) An high order concatenated signal cross connection (AU4c) A low order signal cross connection (example : TU12) Procedure for high order signal (AU4) • • • • Select "Transmission" option from the "View" menu Select "Transmission" " "Cross Connection" ""Cross Connection Management" Click on "Create" in the Cross Connection Management windows. A unidirectional connection from Input protecting B to Output C. 15. Output C is protected. a new window called "TP search" is opened. whereas leg 1 is not protected. o Select the correct value in the fields "Type" and "Protection" Click on "Choose" relative to the "Input" field. Protected Broadcast Figure up.6. In the "Termination Points" field select the AU4 and click on "OK". a new window called "TP search" is opened. In the "Main Cross Connection" window repeat the same on the "Output" field and on the "Prot. Click on "Search" in the "Cross Connection Management" window to see the new crossconnection created. in the "Termination Points" field select the concatenated AU4c (syntax example: r01sr1sl08/port#01-#01AU4P-4c) Click on "OK". in the "Termination Points" field select the AU4 Click on "OK". then selecting the showed TUG3 Select "Transmission" " "Structure TPs" " then selecting the structure N. Input" field for protected connections Click on "OK" in the "Main Cross Connection" window to terminate the creation and subsequently click on "Cancel" to go to the "Cross Connection Management" window. This connection will appear on the Cross Connection Management view in a independent line. The AU4 is then terminated on a VC4 of the matrix circuit of the COMPACT ADM unit. o On the "Equipment" field select the Board. the "TP search" window is closed.• • • • On the "Equipment" field select the Board. the "TP search" window is closed. o On the "Equipment" field select the Board. o All rights reserved.B. Procedure for AU4 concatenated (AU4c) N. Before to create an AU4 concatenated cross-connection is necessary to define that the AU4s on a STM-4 board are concatenated as explained.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 225/388 . In the transmission window the AU4 block is displayed. Click on "Search" in the "Cross Connection Management" window to see the new crossconnection created.B. a cross is displayed on the AU4 block Click twice on the AU4 block and on the VC4 block that appears. Input" field for protected connections Click on "OK" in the "Main Cross Connection" window to terminate the creation and subsequently click on "Cancel" to go to the "Cross Connection Management" window. Procedure low order signal (example TU12) • • Select "Transmission" option from the "View" menu Select "Transmission" ""Add TP". • • • Select "Transmission" " "Terminate TP" . The VC4 is automatically choose and indicated as "port # n". a new window called "Main Cross Connection" is opened. ED 01 SC. In the "Main Cross Connection" window repeat the same on the "Output" field and on the "Prot. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Passing on and copying of this document. o Select the correct value in the fields "Type" and "Protection" Click on "Choose" relative to the "Input" field. • • • • • • • • Select "Transmission" option from the "Views" menu Select "Transmission" " "Cross Connection" " "Cross Connection Management" Click on "Create" in the Cross Connection Management window. a new window called "Tp search" is opened. where "n" is the VC4 number. 15. in the transmission window clicking twice on the TUG3 and TUG2 blocks the TU12 are displayed Select the TU12 to be used Select "Transmission" " "Cross Connection" " "Cross Connection Management".1) Click on "OK".3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 226/388 .1.• • • • • All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document. then clicking on the presented objects with the sequence board>port. Port view is presented with the View " Equipment pull down menu. Repeat the same on the "Output" field and on the "Prot. In the "Termination Points" field select the structured TP (example: TU12 1. Transmission view is presented with the View " Transmission pull down menu. o Select the correct value in the fields "Type" and "Protection" Click on "Choose" relative to the "Input" field. Input" field for protected connections Click on "OK" in the "Main Cross Connection" window to terminate the creation and subsequently click on "Cancel" to go to the "Cross Connection Management" window.3 Cross-Connections management A list of cross-connections can be displayed in the Cross-Connection Management dialog. o On the "Equipment" field select the Board. a new window called "TP search" is opened. a new window called "Main Cross Connection" is opened. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. ED 01 SC. a new window called "Cross Connection Management" is opened. • • • • If TU12 (example) are selected. the "TP search" window is closed. In the "Cross Connection Management" window click on "Create" button. Click on "Search" in the "Cross Connection Management" window to see the new crossconnection created. The dialog can be accessed via the Transmission or Port view or via Configuration menu. All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 227/388 . ED 01 SC. 3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 228/388 .) Enter the Access Control Domain of the relevant cross-connections: E= connection made with 1353SH. Set Ignore for attributes not to be used as filtering criteria.1 Search Criteria • Name (not supported. This filter option can only be used. M= connection made with 1354RM. • Type Select the connection type: • • • • • Unidirectional Bidirectional Multipoint Drop Continue Protection Select protection functionality: • • • Protected Not protected TP Class Select one of the TP types involved in the requested cross-connection. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. 15. if at least one ACD is defined on the NE and one or more cross-connections are assigned to this ACD(s). empty= connection made with CT. Do not enter any search criteria and press the Search button to display a list of all existing cross-connections.Figure 183. Enter Search Criteria (one or more) and then press the Search button to display a selection of cross-connections. • State ED 01 SC. A list of cross-connections is displayed in the Cross-Connection Management dialog after selecting the Search command. Cross connection management cascade menu The Cross-Connection Management dialog is initially empty. Use button Cancel Search to cancel an active search request or close the dialog. Passing on and copying of this document. There are two possibilities of displaying a list of cross-connections: • • All rights reserved.) Number of the cross-connection (automatically assigned) • ACD (not supported.3. according to the following format: R<rack#>s<subr. Passing on and copying of this document.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 229/388 . The # within brackets identifies a number. the connection state is always Activated) Prot. or only the physical location at least down to board level. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. ED 01 SC. Switch to Input Auto.#>b<board#>/port#<port#>-TP. State Select the protection state: All rights reserved. • • • • • • • • • • Forced to Input Forced to Protecting Manual Switch to Input Manual Switch to Protecting Auto. Switch to Protecting Lockout Normal I Normal P TP ID Prefix Enter the TP type and physical location of the port.Select the connection state: • • • Activated Deactivated (not operative in current release. a read only list of cross-connections matching the search criteria appears. State Detailed switching information in the format: <Protection state> <traffic Ind> (<location>: <signal state>-<switch status>.All rights reserved. [<Location>: <signal state>-<switch status>]) • <Protection state> Normal.2 Cross-Connection List After a successful search. Forced or Manual. The list contains information concerning the following parameters for each cross-connection: • Prot. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Lockout.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 230/388 .3. Auto. The number of matching cross-connections is displayed in the upper left corner of the list. ED 01 SC. • <Traffic ind> Indicates the location of current traffic: P (Protecting input) or I (Input). Figure 184. Cross-Connection Management Dialog (Initial State) 15. Passing on and copying of this document. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 231/388 . • State Connection state indicating whether cross-connection is A (activated) or D (deactivated) • Dir. <port#>#TP The # within brackets identifies a number.#>b<board#>/port#<port#>-TP. The reason for the automatic switch was S ignal Degrade in the Protecting input. • Protecting Input Protecting source (for protected cross-connections only). DC_N (Drop & Continue Normal) or DC_I (Drop & Continue Inverse) • Input Signal source. The switch was completed. • <Switch status> Status of the switch: C (completed) or p (pending) Example: Auto I (P: SD-c) There has been an Auto matic switch from the protecting input to the I nput where the traffic is currently located. Direction-related connection type: uni (directional). #>-<Board#>-<port#>. • Output ED 01 SC. contains the TP type and physical location of the port according to the format r<rack#>s<subr. The # within brackets identifies a number.• <Location> Indicates the location of the error signal: P (Protecting input) or I (Input) • <Signal state> Indicates the signal state: SD (Signal Degrade) or SF (Signal Failure) All rights reserved. contains the TP type and physical location of the port according to the format <Rack#>-<subr. Passing on and copying of this document. bi(directional) or mp (multipoint). Figure 185.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 232/388 . Cross-Connection Management Dialog (After Search) 15. select the first crossconnection of a block with a mouse click and the last one with a mouse click while pressing the <Shift> key. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. All actions that may affect traffic must be confirmed.3. the TP ID of the destination is specified according to the format r<rack#>s<subr. Before starting any action apart from creation or printing. A confirmation dialog pops up in this case and the user has to confirm the requested action. At the bottom of the dialog is a range of buttons to start actions on the listed cross-connections. for multi. To mark several cross-connections (multi-select) that are listed in succession. To deselect a number of cross-connections at a time. Deselect cross-connections by clicking on the respective row while simultaneously pressing the <Control> key. mark at least one cross-connection.#>b<board#>/port#<port#>-TP . ED 01 SC. the string "multiple Legs" appears instead. Or. press the <Shift> key and hold it down while moving the mouse pointer to the last entry. mark a number of individual cross-connections by clicking the mouse button while pressing the <Control> key. Passing on and copying of this document.3 Actions available The following actions are available: • Create a cross-connection.All rights reserved. Signal destination for point-to-point cross-connections.leg cross-connections. The Protection Actions dialog is opened. • Modify a Cross-Connection. • Deactivate a Cross-Connection.The Main Cross-Connection dialog is opened.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 233/388 . Available if at least one cross-connection is selected from the list. • Split a Cross-Connection. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. The dialog box of Figure below is presented ( “ Main Cross Connection”view). Available if just one cross-connection is selected from the list. • Delete a Cross-Connection. ED 01 SC. Available if at least one bidirectional cross connection is selected from the list. The dialog can be accessed via the Transmission or Port view as for the following menus example or by using the Create or Modify buttons in the Cross-Connection Management dialog. Available if at least one cross-connection is selected from the list. Available if at least one cross-connection is selected from the list. • Activate a Cross-Connection. Not operative. Available if two cross connections are selected. Not operative. The Main CrossConnection dialog is opened. 15. Available if exactly one protected cross-connection is selected from the list.4 Create/Modify Cross-Connections Creation and modification of cross-connections are performed in the Main Cross-Connection dialog. Passing on and copying of this document. The dialog has to be closed explicitly. Prints the filtered list of cross-connections. • Join Cross-Connections. Not operative. All rights reserved. • Print. • Protection Switching. the OK button is insensitive when this cross-connection is assigned to NML or it is not assigned to the user profile. one or more of those parameters must be defined according to the cross-connection type. Passing on and copying of this document.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 234/388 . the system is designed according to the following guidelines: • • • All operations that may affect traffic must be confirmed. All others are disabled (faded gray).1 Cross-Connection Parameters The "Main Cross Connection" permits to create the cross connections. To create a cross-connection. If the window is used to create a new cross-connection. To prevent operation faults. which are permitted within the current context. 15. The subsystem provides a confirmation dialog box before the operation can be executed. the corresponding message box appears. the system verifies that the relevant TPs can be used (not assigned to NML and assigned to the user profile) after the OK button is pressed. If the window displays an existing cross-connection. ED 01 SC. Only those parameters. Table 1. If a specified TP is not permitted.All rights reserved. which depend on the connection and protection type. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.4. Activate the relevant entry boxes first of all by clicking on them with the mouse. Gives an overview about the optional and mandatory input parameters for the various cross-connection types. can be accessed. A cross-connection is defined through a set of parameters. 3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 235/388 . Criteria button. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. where the user can display and configure the SNCP Type Protection. Passing on and copying of this document. Criteria (only available for protected connections) Clicking on the Prot. Unidirectional Bidirectional Drop Continue D&C Topology Select the direction for Drop Continue: • • • • Normal Inverse Protection Define protection state: • • • Protected Not Protected Prot. No protection criteria for automatic protection switching can be configured.Configurable Parameters • Type Select the connection type: • • • All rights reserved. for the Protection Criteria dialog is opened. The following SNCP Type is available: • • • SNCP-I (Inherently monitored Sub-Network Connection Protection) SNCP-N (Non-intrusively monitored Sub-Network Connection Protection) SNCP-S (Sub-layer Sub-Network Connection Protection) (Not operative in current release) ED 01 SC. Input ED 01 SC. • HOT (available only for protected connections) Not operative in current release To enter the Hold Off Time expressed in msec. When Revertive mode is active. Figure 186. a protected service is switched back to its initial. Passing on and copying of this document.free during this defined period of time before a protected service is switched back to it. HOT is the time between declaration of Signal Degrade or Signal Fail. click the relevant Choose button and select the TP in the TP Search dialog. In Revertive mode. the Wait To Restore protection period prevents several protection switches being initiated as a result of an intermittent failure. Otherwise. protected element when the fault has been eliminated. • Input To enter the input TP. The protected element must be error.All rights reserved.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 236/388 . • Prot. and the initialization of the protection switching algorithm. select the input field and enter the name of the TP directly. switchover to the protecting element is maintained even after the fault has been eliminated. The Wait To Restore time period is fixed to 5 minutes. In Non-revertive mode. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Protection Criteria • Revertive (available only for protected connections) Select whether protection is to be revertive or not. No errors are introduced to the original cross-connection with applying or removing the protection leg. Repeat this procedure for each destination TP. The left-hand icon displays the current topology and the right one displays a view of the topology following confirmation of the current modifications. • Output It is possible to enter one or more output TPs. Otherwise. Click the Choose button and select the next TP in the TP Search dialog. proceed as described previously and press button Add afterwards. Table 5. select the input field and enter the name of the TP directly. A list of all the selected output TPs is displayed in the list box located below it.To enter the protecting TP. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.intrusive monitoring on this cross-connection. Otherwise. Non-intrusive Monitoring Adding a protection leg to a unidirectional cross-connection offers the ability to perform non. select the input field and enter the name of the TP directly. Input Parameters Type D&C Topology Protection Protection Criteria HOT (NOT operative) Protected Revertive Input Protecting Input Output Unidirectional/Bidirectional Cross Connection Not Protected Protected Unidirectional/Bidirectional Normal/inverse Not Protected Protected _ SNCP-1 SNCP-N _ X _ _ One TP _ One TP _ X One TP One TP One TP _ not available x configuration optional Broadcast Cross Connection Not Protected Protected Unidirectional _ _ Not Protected Protected _ SNCP-1 SNCP-N _ X _ _ One TP _ One or more TPs _ _ One TP One TP One or more TPs Non-configurable Parameters • CC Topology The topology of the cross-connection is indicated via two icons. To delete a leg from the list. Passing on and copying of this document. select the input field and enter the name of the TP directly. Otherwise. The previously chosen TP is then moved to the list box located below. In addition. select the TP in the list box and click on the Delete Leg button.B. To enter one output TP. click the relevant Choose button and select the TP in the TP Search dialog. the color of an icon indicates the connection state of the cross-connection: ED 01 SC. N. Optional and Mandatory Configurable Parameters for Cross-Connection Creation All rights reserved. To enter more than one output TP and create a broadcast connection. click the relevant Choose button and select the TP in the TP Search dialog.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 237/388 . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Cross-Connection Icons Example: ED 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 238/388 . not protected Bidirectional. not protected Broadcast with one protected leg Drop & Continue normal Drop & Continue inverse Loopback connection: unidirectional. Passing on and copying of this document. Unidirectional. same input and output TP Figure 187.Green -> active Brown -> inactive The icon is set according to the entries made in Type and Protection: TPs not cross connected All rights reserved. protected Broadcast. not protected Unidirectional. protected Bidirectional. Not operative in the current Release. E. To enter the TP.B. Use button Search in this dialog to update the list.or bidirectional) 1) Select the cross-connection type . Select the input TPs in the list and confirm with Ok. -. Create a Point-to-Point Cross-Connection (unit. For information on cross-connection types. Creation of a Unidirectional. The matching TPs are listed in the right list box.Figure 188. or select the input field and enter the name of the TP directly.4.2 Create a Cross-Connection This chapter lists the steps the user has to take to create a cross-connection using The "Main Cross Connection" For a detailed description of the single parameters. The Search for Cross Connection Input dialog offers the possibility to list TPs according to different filter criteria. Not operative in the current Release.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 239/388 . then select the filter criteria Connection State "not connected" and Class "AU-4" and click on button Search. N. 15. 3) Select or type in the input TP. -. 6) Configure the Revertive mode 7) Configure the Protection Criteria (Prot. For a more detailed description on the Search for Cross Connection. first select the rack in the left list box. Passing on and copying of this document. the cross-connection list in the Cross Connection Management dialog is not automatically updated.Output TTI The Trail Trace Identifier of the transmitted (near end) signal is displayed. 2) Select the protection state. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.Criteria) 8) The Hot (Hold Off Time) is not operative in current release Press the button Ok to confirm the creation. After creation of a cross-connection. ED 01 SC. The following steps only apply to protected cross-connections: 5) Select or type in the protection TP as described in Step 3).Input TTI The received Trail Trace Identifier of the far end signal is displayed. Non-Protected Cross-Connection All rights reserved. to obtain a list of all not connected AU-4 TPs of a rack. click the Choose button and select the TP in the Search for Cross Connection Input dialog. 4) Select or type in the output TP as described in Step 3).g. 3) Select or type in the input TP. Passing on and copying of this document. ED 01 SC. Figure 189.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 240/388 . Create a Bidirectional Protected Cross-Connection Create a Broadcast Connection 1) Select the cross-connection type "unidirectional" 2) Select the protection state. To enter the TP.All rights reserved. click the Choose button and select the TP in the Search for Cross Connection Input dialog or select the input field and enter the name of the TP directly. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. first select the board in the left list box. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. 4) Select or type in the output TPs as described in Step 3 ) Press the button Add Leg in the Main Cross Connection dialog and all output TPs are displayed in the list box under the output field. 7) Configure the Protection Criteria (Prot. 6) Configure the criteria for automatic protection switching.Criteria) 8) The HOT (Hold Off Time) is not operative in current release Press the button Ok to confirm creation. to obtain a list of all TU12 TPs of a board.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 241/388 . Repeat this procedure for each protected output TP (only one protected leg is supported in current release). The following steps only apply to protected broadcast connections: 5) Select or type in the protection input TP. For a more detailed description on the Search for Cross Connection. E. Note that each single protected leg of the broadcast has to be assigned to the same protecting input.g. select the protected output TP in the output list box and click button Protect Leg. Proceed as described in Step 3 ). All rights reserved. To unprotect a leg from the list. select the TP in the list box and click on the Delete Leg button. ED 01 SC. then select the filter criteria Connection State "Ignore" and Class "TU12" and click on button Search TPs . The matching TPs are listed in the right list box. To delete a leg from the list. Afterwards. The leg is then marked as "protected" in the list box.This dialog offers the possibility to list TPs according to different filter criteria. Passing on and copying of this document. select the protected TP in the list box and click on the Unprotect Leg button. Select the input TPs in the list and confirm with Ok. Search for Cross-Connection Output 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 242/388 . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. ED Figure 190. Passing on and copying of this document.All rights reserved. Create an Unprotected Broadcast Cross-Connection 3AL 98104 ADAA 243/388 . Passing on and copying of this document.3: NE MANAGEMENT Figure 191. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.All rights reserved. ED 01 SC. All rights reserved. Create a Protected Broadcast Cross-Connection 3AL 98104 ADAA 244/388 . ED 01 SC. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Passing on and copying of this document.3: NE MANAGEMENT Figure 192. 3 Modify a Cross-Connection When modifying a cross-connection. As mentioned at the beginning of this chapter. modification of a cross-connection is restricted to the protection state and the parameters required by the protection. please refer to the previous Para.e. the user is required to confirm operations affecting traffic. ED 01 SC. X configuration optional The following few facts should be taken into consideration when modifying connections.4. To modify a cross connection selects one from the connection list and then click on the Modify button.e. For a description of the parameters. It offers the choice of whether to keep the protected input TP (Input) or the protecting input TP (Prot. For an overview of the accessible parameter when the protection state has been changed from "not protected" to "protected" and vice versa. Within the Main Cross Connection dialog. i. Modifiable Parameters Input Parameters Modification Not Protected to Protected Protected to not Protected _ _ Type D&C Topology Normal/inverse Normal/inverse Protection Protected Not Protected Protection Criteria X _ HOT (NOT operative) X _ Unprotected _ X Protected X _ Revertive X _ Input X X Protecting Input X _ Output X X _ Not available All rights reserved. note that some of the transformations involved may affect traffic (because the system may have to destroy and re-create the cross-connection to perform the necessary transformation).B. asking the user to confirm the unprotect action. Unprotect a protected cross-connection: When a protected cross-connection is being unprotected (protection changed to "not protected"). An example is in the following Figure. Passing on and copying of this document. Refer to Table 2.1. the cross-connection list in the Cross Connection Management dialog is not automatically updated. the dialog displays the additional option button Unprotected.. N. a question box appears. In addition. check the protection state in the Cross-Connection Management dialog). 1. Use button Search in this dialog to update the list.1 on page 2. Ensure that the active TP is selected (i.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 245/388 . a confirmation window warns the user. Input) as the only signal source of the new unprotected cross-connection. Table 6. After modification of a cross-connection.15. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. the Prot. ED 01 SC. Passing on and copying of this document. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Figure 193. An example is in the following Figure. Input button is available to select the protection input connection to insert. Unprotect a Unidirectional Cross-Connection • Protect an unprotected cross-connection: When an unprotected cross-connection is being protected.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 246/388 .All rights reserved. 5 Activate/Deactivate/Delete Cross-Connections 15. select one from the connection list (see) and then click on the Activate button to initiate the process.All rights reserved. Figure 194. Passing on and copying of this document. The Cross Connection Management dialog provides the possibility of displaying a selection of existing cross-connections.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 247/388 .1 Activate a Cross-Connection Not supported in current release. Protect one Leg of a Broadcast Connection 15. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.5. A confirmation box appears in which to confirm the state ED 01 SC. The connection state (Act = A or D) is indicated in this connection list. To activate a cross-connection. 3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 248/388 . 15.5. All rights reserved. The cross-connections are split without further confirmation from the user. After creation. in the same order as above listed. To deactivate a crossconnection.6 Split and Join Cross-Connections Not supported in current release.6. A confirmation box appears in which to confirm the state change request. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. However. which were selected. To prevent operation errors. clicking the Activate button only initiates actions on the deactivated cross-connections. To delete a cross-connection. a cross-connection is automatically in an active state. clicking the Deactivate button only initiates actions on the activated cross-connections. before the deletion of a cross– connection. NOTE: the “ Delete cross– connection”action is not possible in the case that is still existing any operation/connection/termination on the underlying supported signals. select one from the connection list and then click on the Deactivate button to initiate the process.change request. the user must confirm the deletion request. Split Select one or more bidirectional cross connections from the list in the Cross Connection Management dialog and press Split.5.2 Deactivate a Cross-Connection Not supported in current release. deletion of active crossconnections is possible. such as: • Performance Monitoring on lower or higher TPs • POM / HPOM operations • Lower order Connections • Higher order Connections • Lower/Higher order Path Terminations • Loop– backs • LAN/LAPD (and any comm/routing channel) • Auxiliary channels Thus the deletion of every active operation/connection/termination is necessary.3 Delete a Cross-Connection Only deactivated cross-connections should be deleted. The connection in the list is automatically updated to indicate the new connection state (Act = A). select the corresponding connection from the list and click on the Delete button. 15. 15. The connection in the list is automatically updated to indicate the new connection state (Act = D). which were selected. Passing on and copying of this document. 15. If the set of cross-connections selected from the list inc ludes both activated and deactivated crossconnections.1 Split a Cross-Connection Precondition Only bidirectional cross-connections can be split. If the set of cross-connections selected from the list includes both activated and deactivated crossconnections. ED 01 SC. The deleted cross-connection automatically disappears from the connection list when the operation is successful. Figure 195. The new cross connection has the same name and activation status as the old bidirectional one. The input of the broadcast is the output of the original protected cross-connection. Passing on and copying of this document. Depending on the protection state of the original cross-connection. the split action has the following effect: a) Unprotected Cross-Connection An unprotected bidirectional cross-connection is split into two unidirectional crossconnections with the input TP in one of them being the output in the other and vice versa (see Figure below.). ED 01 SC. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. The input of the original cross-connection is one of the legs in the broadcast.The original cross connection(s) disappear from the list in the Cross Connection Management dialog after a successful action. The user has to press Search to see the new cross connections. The other leg in the broadcast is the protecting input. Split/Join Unprotected Bidirectional Cross-Connection b) Protected Cross-Connection Splitting a protected connection results in one protected unidirectional cross-connection and one broadcast with two legs.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 249/388 . All rights reserved. 2 Join Two Cross-Connections Precondition Two cross-connections can be joined if they match the following characteristics: • The connections are either 1) Both unprotected. or All rights reserved. • • Both cross-connections have the same connection state (activated or deactivated). 15. Restriction: the input of the broadcast connection has to be the output of the protected connection and the legs of the broadcast match the input and the protection input of the unidirectional connection. i. Users can only switch protection on cross-connections belonging to them and not assigned to the NML. The result is either a bidirectional or a protected bidirectional cross-connection. effect b). The original cross connection(s) disappear from the list in the Cross Connection Management dialog after a successful action. the new name is a concatenation of the names of both of them. The three protection actions Force . and the other one a broadcast with two legs. they are listed in black color in the Cross Connection Management dialog. unidirectional and the input is the output of the other one. If the original cross-connections have different names. Join Select exactly two cross connections in the Cross Connection Management dialog and press the Join button. The cross-connections are joined without further confirmation from the user. whereby Lock has the highest priority and Manual Switch the lowest. Note that a protection state can only be changed within the same or from a higher priority level.Figure 196. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 250/388 . A second condition is that protection is enabled for the cross-connection concerned (protection parameter is set to "protected"). Both cross-connections have the operational state "enabled".e. Force To Protecting can be reverted with Release but not with Manual Switch To Input. ED 01 SC. e. Press Search to see the new cross-connections in the list. Passing on and copying of this document. 2) One of them is protected and unidirectional.6.g. also refer to Chapter Split a Cross-Connection. Lock Out and Manual Switch belong to different levels.7 Protection Switching The Protection Actions dialog is displayed after clicking on the Protection button in the Cross Connection Management dialog. Split/Join to Protected Bidirectional Cross-Connection 15. 3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 251/388 . These are: • Force to Input (not operative in current release) The cross-connectio n is switched to the protected input regardless of signal quality. • Manual Switch to Input (not operative in current release) The user can switch over to the protected input manually. • Force to Protecting (Input) The cross-connection is switched to the protecting input regardless of signal quality. • Manual Switch to Protecting Input (not operative in current release) The user can switch over to the protecting input manually. Passing on and copying of this document. Automatic protection is disabled. • Release Manual Switch (not operative in current release) ED 01 SC. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Switching over is not executed if the signal quality on the protecting path is worse than on the protected path. Figure 197. Protection Actions Dialog The dialog window enables the user to perform protection. • Release Force Forced switching is disabled and automatic protection switching re-enabled.All rights reserved. Automatic protection is disabled. Switching over is not executed if the signal quality on the protected path is worse than on the protecting path.related operations on protected crossconnections. Passing on and copying of this document. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.B.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 252/388 . ED 01 SC.e. If no printer is installed. After clicking on an action button and completing the action initiated. Select Printer N. i. All the operations listed are context-dependent and are enabled or disabled ("grey") accordingly. neither forced nor manual switching can be performed. 15.8 Print This option is used to print the currently filtered cross-connection list and the related filter settings on the default printer or to a file in postscript or ASCII format. • Release Lock All rights reserved. • Lock Out to Invoke The connection path is locked for protection switching. After completion of protection switching. The protection lock is disabled.A manual switch is disabled and automatic protection switching re-enabled. N. the list entry in the Cross Connection Management dialog is updated automatically. there is no error message displayed to indicate this. Figure 198. the dialog disappears automatically.B. This functionality should only be applied selectively (either for a single TP or selected group of TPs).9 Show Cross-Connected TPs An overview of signal flow can be requested by means of a user action.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 253/388 . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.g. Select Output Format 15. show all TPs that are above the TU12CTP) enables all the related TPs to be added to the view so that the complete signal flow can be illustrated. ED 01 SC. The user can select a TP and initiate the action Show Cross Connected TPs from the Transmission view. A line indicates the connection.All rights reserved. Figure 199. Passing on and copying of this document. Expanding and hiding TPs that are associated with the currently selected TP (e. The result is that all other TPs connected to the currently selected TP are displayed. Passing on and copying of this document.3: NE MANAGEMENT Figure 200. Show Cross Connected VC4 of an AU4 3AL 98104 ADAA 254/388 .All rights reserved. ED 01 SC. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Passing on and copying of this document.Cross-connection between 2 or more OH bytes . depending on the context.Total Pass-through of the MSOH bytes for some cards .1 Introduction The purpose of this set of dialogs is to handle the operations on the Overhead (OH) bytes of the NE.Select the input OH TP involved in the operation .16 Overhead management 16.Termination of an OH byte onto an auxiliary port or vocal channel . so TP could be used instead of OH bytes or auxiliary port.Select type of cross-connection . Overhead cross-connection . the involved TPs have to be deleted.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 255/388 . 16.2 OH Connection overview Here are described the possible OH connections • OH Cross-connection The operator has to be able to cross-connect 2 or more OH bytes on 2 different boards. The possible operations are: • All rights reserved. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. • OH Termination The operator has to be able to terminate one OH byte onto an auxiliary port or vocal channel. The steps an operator has to do in order to perform the OH bytes termination are the following: ED 01 SC. The possible cross-connection types are: • Unprotected bidirectional point to point The steps an operator has to do in order to perform the cross-connection are the following: • • Create the OH TPs involved in the operation Create the OH cross-connection: .Definition of the Phone Parameters There is a TP associated to every OH byte and to every auxiliary port.Select the output OH TP involved in the operation After having deleted an OH cross-connection. • All rights reserved. the involved msPassThroughCTP points have to be deleted. 16. To access select Overhead option from the Configuration pull down menu.3 Overhead views The Overhead Views allows performing the previously presented operations. the involved TP have to be deleted. OH Phone Parameters. Passing on and copying of this document. The steps an operator has to do in order to perform the total MSOH pass-through are the following: • • Create the msPassThroughCTP points involved in the operation Create the total MSOH pass-through: . If a total msoh pass-through connection is set. ED 01 SC. a single msoh pass-through connection or a single msoh cross-connection cannot be set. • • • • OH Cross Connection. OH TP deleting. the following options are presented in the cascading menu.Select the auxiliary port/vocal channel TP involved in the operation After having deleted an OH byte termination. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.Select the input msPassThroughCTP point involved in the operation .Select the output msPassThroughCTP point involved in the operation After having deleted a total MSOH pass-through. OH TP creation.• • Create the OH TP involved in the operation Create the OH byte termination: .Select the created OH TP .3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 256/388 . A total msoh pass-through connection (connection between msPassThroughCTP points) is set-up only if no single msoh pass-through connection are set and if no single msoh crossconnection are set. Total MSOH Pass-through For STM ports it make sense to allow the operator to perform a total pass-through of the MSOH bytes. ED 01 SC.All rights reserved. Figure 201. The Cross-Connection Management for Overhead dialog opens and allows to start the configuration. Passing on and copying of this document.4 OH Cross Connection Select the Configuration pull down menu. Select the Overhead option and then from the cascading menu the OH Cross Connection option. Overhead options The options are described in next paragraphs. 16. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 257/388 . Cross Connection Management for Overhead dialog It is similar to the dialog used for the cross-connection of the TP for paths . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 258/388 . ED 01 SC. also in this case already described for path management. Figure 202. Next configuration steps use the Main Cross-Connection for Overhead dialog and the TP Search dialog. then the same description and functions are valid.All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document. All rights reserved. Main Cross-Connection for Overhead dialog There is one big difference between the OH TPs and the other kinds of TPs: the OH TPs have to be: • • Created ONLY BEFORE a cross-connection/termination operation involving them has been performed. Deleted AFTER a cross-connection/termination deleting involving them has been confirmed.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 259/388 . In the following a description of the main functions and commands is given. also to list the Supported and Not Supported operation. Figure 203. Passing on and copying of this document. Cross-Connection Management for Overhead dialog • Supported operations ED 01 SC. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. The current implementation of the TP Search Dialog (TPSD) works only with created TPs. After choosing one or more cross connections/terminations. Delete operations can be performed on several cross connections/termination at the same time. The operation buttons availability follows some rules: • The Delete and Print buttons are enabled only if at least one item is selected from the list. Modify operations can be performed only on single cross connections/terminations. Delete the selected xconnection/termination Go to the "Main Cross Connection for Overhead" dialog and modify the existing cross connection/termination Note: this dialog disappears only when the user explicitly clicks on the close button. The operator can set the filtering criteria. TPs . When some operation may affect the existing traffic. the operator is warned about that. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.o Search cross connections/terminations according to one or more of the following filtering attributes: type. Passing on and copying of this document. • • The modify button is enabled if one (and only one) item is selected. the Cross-Connection Management dialog doesn't support the following functionalities: • • • • Protect cross connections/terminations: all the OH cross connections/terminations are unprotected Activate/Deactivate cross connections/terminations: all the OH cross connections/terminations are automatically active since their creation Split cross connection/termination Modify Cross Connection Termination 16. For each cross connection/termination matching the filtering criteria. It brings up the Main cross connection Dialog. and a confirmation dialog must be answered to carry on/cancel the operation.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 260/388 . The OH xconnections are automatically active at the moment of their creation. can start the search and select one or more cross connections/terminations among those presented in a read-only list as a result of the search operation. A special dialog will ask the user for a confirmation. yes to all/cancel for multiple items • Not Supported operation When used for OH purposes.1.4. some fields of this dialog are disabled. this dialog allows to: • • All rights reserved. ED 01 SC.1 Main Cross-Connection for Overhead dialog See Figure up. It brings up the Main cross connection dialog. According to the philosophy of offering only meaningful operations to the user. output TPs involved . and being the OH cross connection operations a subset of those applying to the general cross connections (e. The create button is always enabled.g: protections are not allowed). The choices for this dialog are: yes/no for single items. the following information is shown: direction (bidirectional) and the input. • All rights reserved.1.R01sr1sl11/port#06-P ED 01 SC.R01sr1sl11/port#05-P Expanding this TP.703 2Mbit/s (not operative in current release).By clicking on the proper portions of the dialog and on the proper buttons. some or all of the following operations are available. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. RS or VC class selected All the possible OH TPs belonging to a specified board/port: board/port selected and no TP class selected All the possible OH TPs belonging to a specified board/port and class: board/port selected and MS.The auxiliary and vocal channels TPs are in the SERVICE board of slot 1 The auxiliary channels are: • 2 x G.2 TP Search dialog The TP Search dialog currently offers: • • Navigation rack/subrack/board/port A list of TPs to choose from When used in the OH domain.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 261/388 . in the screen are indicated as: . Passing on and copying of this document. this dialog is a subcase of the most generic TP Search. depending on the NE type characteristics: o Choose one input TP o Choose one output TP It is possible to directly type in the TP name or to click on the Choose button to select a TP from the TP Search dialog box 16. The operator can choose among a list of: • • • • • • All the possible OH TPs belonging to a specified class: no board selected and MS. Supported operations o When creating a new cross connection. the operator can perform the operations hereafter listed: • • • Selection of the cross-connection type Selection of the input TP involved in the cross-connection Selection of the output TP involved in the cross-connection In order to do that the operator can either type in the involved TPs ID or use the TP Search dialog. 31 referred TPs are presented .4. RS or VC class selected All the OH TPs already connected (also accordingly to the connection type) All the OH TPs not yet connected A combination of the above options In this Network Element to connect the auxiliary / vocal channels and the Overhead bytes the following operative indication must be observed: . The OH TP is present in MS.R01sr1sl11/port#04-#01-v11TTP • 4 x V24.R01sr1sl11/port#01-#04-q23TTP .R01sr1sl11/port#02-#01-v11TTP .R01sr1sl11/port#08-P .R01sr1sl11/port#03-#01-v11TTP .703 64Kbit/s. RS and VC4 TP Class.R01sr1sl11/port#01-#01-v24TTP . in the screen are indicated as: R01sr1sl11/port#01-#01-q23TTP Expanding this TP. in the screen are indicated as: .Expand ing this TP.R01sr1sl11/port#01-#01-v11TTP . in the screen are indicated as: ..R01sr1sl11/port#02-#01-v24TTP .R01sr1sl11/port#10-P • 4 x V11.1 to 9. . 31 referred TPs are presented • 4 x G. four referred TPs are presented .R01sr1sl11/port#07-P .R01sr1sl11/port#01-#01-q23TTP .R01sr1sl11/port#04-#01-v24TTP • 1 x phonic interface (voice channel).R01sr1sl11/port#03-#01-v24TTP . In these TPs the indication ". use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.R01sr1sl11/port#01-#03-q23TTP . in the screen are indicated as: .R01sr1sl11/port#01-#02-q23TTP .The other boards used to terminate or cross-connect the OH bytes are the STM -n boards.9) ED 01 SC.R01sr1sl11/port#09-P All rights reserved..3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 262/388 .#0011 to 0099 (MS or RS) are referred to the coordinates of the Section Overhead bytes on the SDH frame (1. Passing on and copying of this document. 5 OH TP creation Select the Configuration pull down menu. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. "UC" is for User Channel and "Pass" is for Pass through channel.a Choose button is used to display a list of OH Tps to be created. the OH Tp field is set to empty. RS or VC4 Tp. Apply button is used to perform a create request of the TP displayed in the OH Tp field. Help button provides some useful information about the dialog. The OH TP creation dialog opens and allows to create the OH TP to cross connect. The examples of the figure in this OH connection chapter can be helpful to the operator 16. Select the Overhead option and then from the cascading menu the OH TP creation option.OH Tp field displays the label of the selected OH Tp to be created. . Figure 204. the "NU" is for National Use. After having performed the create request. the TP Search dialog allows the operator to visualize only not created OH Tps. Passing on and copying of this document.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 263/388 . the "FU" is for Future Use. Close button close the dialog without changes of the data. the dialog-box contains the following graphical object: All rights reserved.The voice channel are identified by the "ow" indication. OH TP creation ED 01 SC. To visualize the OH TP in the TP Search view double clicks on the MS. The Choose button starts the TP Search with predefined filtering. . In detail. The OH TP deleting dialog opens and allows deleting the OH TP no more involved in an OH cross-connection. OH Search TP for creation 16. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Figure 205.All rights reserved. Select the Overhead option and then from the cascading menu the OH TP deleting option. the dialog-box contains the following graphical object: .a Choose button is used to display a list of OH Tps to be deleted. the TP Search dialog allows the operator to visualize only created and not cross-connected OH Tps.6 OH TP deleting Select the Configuration pull down menu. ED 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 264/388 . The Choose button starts the TP Search with predefined filtering. In detail. Passing on and copying of this document.OH Tp field displays the label of the selected OH Tp to be deleted. . Phone Parameters dialog window In the window are presented: • The interface field (at the top) where can be selected the phonic interfaces to be configured. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.Apply button is used to perform a delete request of the TP displayed in the OH Tp field. Opens. Figure below. Help button provides some useful information about the dialog. Figure 206. OH TP deleting 16. Close button close the dialog without changes of the data. Select the Configuration pull down menu. All rights reserved. the OH Tp field is set to empty. Passing on and copying of this document. After having performed the delete request. ED 01 SC. Figure 207.7 OH Phone Parameters The OH phone parameters option permits to configure the telephone number and to manage the parameter "phonic extension".3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 265/388 . Select the Overhead option and then from the cascading menu the OH Phone Parameters option. If enabled the phonic signal is extended towards the external on the access panel of the NE. The phonic extension field. Passing on and copying of this document. to set the telephone number for operator calls on the phonic interface. where enable or disable the extension of the selected phonic interface. All rights reserved.• • The phone number field. ED 01 SC. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 266/388 . Not operative in current release Apply button performs the configuration change of the modified phone parameters of the selected phonic interface without close the dialog Close button close the dialog without changes of the data. Configuration of the quality thresholds that generate alarms and log records when predefined values are exceeded.for QoS and maintenance purpose.1. Collection of the performance data.1 Overview These functionalities are described in the following chapters in addition to general information concerning performance monitoring on the NE. 17. the values of the error counters can be compared to userdefined threshold levels.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 267/388 . 24h) and stores the values in history data logs. By selecting the GMAU TP and subsequently the Transmission >Performance menu.2 Supported Performance Counters The NE uses performance counters to count transmission errors. The user can start performance monitoring on one or more subsets of counters for each TP. a notification (threshold crossing alarm) is issued. –Display Maintenance Counter. Examples of these counters are Error Seconds (ES) and Severely Error Seconds (SES). If a counter value has crossed a threshold level. On the ETHERNET boards a set of performance counters are foreseen. which do not occur as part of an SES. For the purpose of quality supervision.17 Performance Monitoring 17. for future releases .1 Introduction The Performance Monitoring domain on the NE covers the monitoring of counter values for trail termination points and connection termination points. 01 ED SC. the following options are available: –Configure Performance Monitoring. A set of performance counters is provided according to the Termination Point (TP). • • • • • Chapter Configuration deals with the configuration of performance monitoring Chapter Display Current Data deals with displaying current performance data Chapter Display History Data deals with displaying history performance data Chapter PM Threshold Table Selection deals with the selection of threshold tables Chapter PM Threshold Table Modification/Display deals with the modification of threshold tables and permits or display the same 17. Not operative in current release. Near end performance monitoring events are: • • Background Block Error (BBE) : A BBE counter measures the number of error blocks.1. Not operative in current release. Passing on and copying of this document. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. –Display Current Dat a. Error Second (ES) : A one second period with one or more error blocks or with a defect. Configuration of the counting interval for each performance measurement point. where performance measurement occurs. The principle performance management functions are: • • • All rights reserved. Not operative in current release. it is not possible to start individual performance counters. The Performance Monitoring domain counts these errors during specified granularity periods (15 min. or D. which is part of the Unavailable Time.SDH TPs Both near end and far end counters are supported in receive direction of the signal for all SDH path layers and for the multiplex section layer. which is part of the Unavailable Time at the far end. Far End Unavailable Second (FEUAS) : An Unava ilable Second is a second. Out of Frame Second (OFS) : An AFS is defined as a second in which one or more out of frame events have occurred. together with an increment or decrement of the pointer value to signify a frequency justification.bits of the pointer. Further definitions: • • • • • • Error Block (EB): A block in which one or more bits associated with the block are erroneous. PDH TPs Only near end counters are supported in receive direction for all PDH path layers. Remote Defect Indicator (RDI) [formerly Far End Receive Failure (FERF)] : indicates to a terminal that the far end terminal has detected an incoming failure. This event is identified by the A1/A2 byte of the SDH Frame. which were received by the Far End Terminal. An FESES is counted as an FEE. Far End Severely Error Second (FESES): Identifies. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. A new period of available time begins at the onset of 10 consecutive non-SES events. Please note that this counter is deprecated by ETSI and will be removed from international standards.• • Severely Error Second (SES) : A one second period which contains > 30% of error blocks. The counting of OFS is sonly supported for the regenerator section termination. These 10 seconds are considered to be part of unavailable time. at a terminal. only near end counting is supported. ED 01 SC. For the regenerator section. at a terminal. or at least one Severely Disturbed Period (SDP) which was received/detected by the Far End Terminal. Pointer Justification Event (PJE): A PJE is an inversion of I. The corresponding Far End (FE) performance monitoring events are: • • All rights reserved. Far End Error Second (FEES) : Identifies. a one second period which contains > 30% of error blocks. at a terminal. no far end information is transmitted and. a one second period with one or more error blocks or with a defect. Unavailable Time (UAT) : A period of unavailable time begins at the onset of 10 consecutive SES events. • • Far End Background Block Error (FEBBE) : A far end error block. The Termination Point (TP) type determines which performance monitoring events can be counted: . Passing on and copying of this document. therefore.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 268/388 . Remote Error Indicator (REI) [formerly Far End Block Error (FEBE)] : Identifies. the count of error blocks that were received by the far end terminal. An SES is also counted as an ES. or at least one Severely Disturbed Period (SDP). which does not occur as part of an FESES. Near End Unavailable Second (NEUAS) : An Unavailable Second is a second. Data collection is performed only ED 01 SC. PM data are collected by a single UAS plus two sets of three event counters (BEE. Near end performance data at Node A and far end performance data at Node B correspond as long as neither direction is disturbed. while the far end information represents the performance of the unidirectional section/path from B to A.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 269/388 . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.17. SES) for NE-PM and FE-PM respectively. Passing on and copying of this document. G. 17. the near end information represents the performance of the unidirectional section/path from A to B. At Node B. far end errors cannot be counted in the case of near end failures. Far End Performance Monitoring Principles • • At Node A. When the path transports unidirectional payload just the four counters for the NE-PM are activated (BEE. ES.1.4 Bidirectional Counting (24 h Bi) for QoS As specified in G. ES. the near end information represents the performance of the unidirectional section/path from B to A. SES and UAS). Figure 208. while the far end information represents the performance of the unidirectional section/path from A to B.826. All rights reserved. and vice versa.3 Far End (FE) and Near End (NE) Performance Counting Far end performance monitoring parameters are derived from Remote Defect Indicators (RDI) and Remote Error Indicators (REI).784 and ETSI 300417. In compliance with ETSI and ITU-T standards.1. the bidirectional PM collection for Quality of Service has been supported by combining the information on each direction of transport to assess a single unavailability state: the bidirectional path is in the unavailable state if either one or both directions are in the unavailable state. 4. . The bidirectional process need the presence on the two Monitoring functions in the two directions in one NE and among the two monitoring function a 24 hour collection can be activated with the collection of incFE_BBE. At the input point the reference value is set to zero by using the TCM feature.783 The number of positive and negative outgoing PJE per second are collected in 15 minutes and 24 H counters. For AU PJE counters. after the AU has been resynchronized to the local clock. the end-to-end monitoring can be requested provide monitoring for Quality of Service purposes and. No Threshold crossing mechanism is supported on AU-PJE counters.. Refer to G. . eFE-SES. incFE-ES. A history of 16 x 15minutes counters and 2 x 24H are stored in the NE for each AU selected. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. FE-UAS on incoming or egress signal depending of the POM is enable. incFE-SES. The TCA are also evaluated in both 15. in addition. eFE-BBE./24H FE_BBE_.on 24 hours registers and the NE maintains a buffer of two registers: the 24hours current registers and the historical one. FE-SES. 17. TCM provides: . If SNCP is configured the Quality of Service collection have to be enable in the monitoring functions after the matrix. eFE-es.TC_API as access point identifier complying with generic 16-byte string format.7 Tandem Connection Termination (TCT) and Monitoring (TCM) TCM allows monitoring within the operator domain.1. VC-4.TC_RDI indicating to the far end that defects have been detected within the TC at the near end TC sink. Passing on and copying of this document. This process can be unidirectional (for Monitoring) or bidirectional process (for QoS). In case of unidirectional process one direction can be monitored end to end and both 15minute and 24h collection can be activate 15min. As the trails are often responsible of the end-to-end customer service. The performance monitoring capabilities (applied on p12Mon TP) support both the standard data ED 01 SC. FE-ES. End to end monitoring is achieved by activation of Performance monitoring on the two direction of path and using far-end primitives.Incoming error count (IEC) .1.784. for network Maintenance applications. Tandem Connection Monitoring is applicable to VC-4-nc (n=1.3: NE MANAGEMENT All rights reserved. 17. The quality within the operator's on domain can be proven regardless of the received quality of the signal at the entry point of the network. VC-3 and VC-12 layers.8 Performance Monitoring on 2 Mbit/s ISDN– PRA The feature provides PM data collection at the 2 Mbit/s ISDN– PRA terminations. . 17.. 3AL 98104 ADAA 270/388 .16. the positive and negative PJE shall be counted separately on one selectable AU within an STM-N signal.minute and 24H counters.). UAS.TC_REI to indicate error blocks within the TC to the far end.1.1.6 Performance Monitoring on AU-PJE AU PJE (Administrative unit point justification event) is an optional parameters request in G.OEI to indicate error blocks of the engrossing VC-n. 17.5 End to End (e-e 24h) Performance Counting VCn trails can be monitored in intermediate node through the activation of performance monitoring process on Monitoring function. 900 for 15 min. The 24-hour monitoring periods start at 00: 00 (UTC) and the 15. i. SES) are counted in a counter per event. 826 bidirectional for QoS –M2120 unidirectional near– end / far– end for maintenance 17. .9 Performance Data Collection Near end and far end performance.minute monitoring periods start at xx: oo. When the user disables the monitoring of a TP within the first 10 minutes of a 15.monitoring events are counted over fixed monitoring periods of 15 minutes and 24 hours. Since PM data is not stored after monitoring is disabled.B.1. xx : 30 and xx : 45. After that. but were plugged out and back in some time during data collection.1. the PM data of the previous interval is lost in this case. The number of suppressed intervals is indicated. Performance Monitoring can be started at any time. ED 01 SC. Passing on and copying of this document. together with a time stamp to identify the period (including the day). 17. PM data is counted on boards that were plugged in at the moment of enabling data collection. Event Counting The performance events (e. SES only). Zero Suppression Zero suppression is a basic mechanism to remove irrelevant PM information and to reduce the amount of PM reports in the system.g.e. As soon as Performance Monitoring is started on the Craft Terminal. An entity of all near end or far end performance monitoring events is always counted. the contents of the current registers are transferred to the first of the recent registers.PM was enable enabled during the entire monitoring interval (the elapsed time equals its nominal value. the current register is reset. PM data is not counted on boards that were plugged out at the moment of enabling data collection (see PM Configuration dialog). These counters are called the current register. current PM data is collected on the I/O boards. zero suppression is active for all PM enabled TPs. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. incrementing the performance counters each time an error is detected.PM was running properly (the suspect interval flag is not set) By default.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 271/388 . Performance monitoring can be enable and disables at any time during a monitoring period. Suspect Flag A suspect interval flag is set as an indication that the data of the corresponding register may be either incomplete or invalid. ES and SES counting is stopped during Unavailable Time.10Data Collection N.minute period. It is also possible to reset an individual current register manually. it is not possible to start individual performance counters (e. and 86400 for 24 h<9. A PM report is suppressed and hence no history record is created by the entity.An interval is error-free (all PM counter values are zero) .collection modes: –G. At the end of the monitoring period. The performance data counted is evaluated every quarter of an hour or every 24 hours and stored there in a history record. All rights reserved. it is possible that have still not been received the PM data of the previous monitoring interval. Time stamping is performed using UTC (as for all alarms). Nevertheless. BBE. which is responsible for PM reporting when all of the following conditions are true for the monitoring period: .g. 17. the oldest information is discarded. If a counter value has crossed a threshold level.For 24-hour (implicit clearance) monitoring periods. The user can modify and delete such tables. In compliance with ETSI and ITU-T standards. To clear a TCA. a Threshold Crossing Alarm (TCA) is transmitted to the alarm manager.11Performance Monitoring History Performance monitoring history data is necessary to assess the recent performance of transmission system. The user can retrieve this information from the Current Performance Management Data Dialog. Such information can be used to sectionalize faults and to locate the source of intermittent errors. Different thresholds can be assigned for near end and far end and for granularity of 15 minutes and 24 hours. a TCA is generated. . Even in case of a suspect interval the TCA is cleared if no unavailability was detected and the low threshold had not been reached. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Therefore.If equipment or line protection switching occurs during a counting interval. These registers are called the recent registers.minute period registers and three 24-hour period registers per monitored event. in the form of performance monitoring event counts. is stored in registers in the NE.1. All the history registers are time stamped. There are sixteen 15. History data. one threshold value is defined: if the event count reaches or exceeds the threshold value during the monitoring period. This TCA is automatically cleared by the system at the end of the following monitoring period in which the event count is less than or equal to the reset threshold value and there was neither an unavailable nor a suspect period during this monitoring period. The interval is marked for suspect data and the elapsed time indicates the length of the measured period. 17. the contents of the current registers are moved the first of the recent registers. the recorded errors through the performance counters can be compared to threshold levels. the history registers operate as follows: The history data is contained in a stack of registers. two threshold values (set. The threshold values are defined in threshold tables together with a severity and a flag indicating whether crossing this value should be notified by an alarm and logged or only stored in the current problem list.12Thresholds For quality supervision purposes. Two thresholds mechanism are supported: .. The following limitations apply for explicit clearance: • • • All rights reserved.1. At the end of each monitoring period. The TCA only reports the value of the counter. ED 01 SC. the user has to explicitly retrieve all current performance data after receiving the alarm. Passing on and copying of this document. Only the period between the last switch and the end of the counting window is counted. The value of the low threshold is fixed to "0" (only a single threshold is provided by a threshold table). When all recent registers are full. An SES threshold crossing is cleared at the end of the interval if no unavailability was detected and SES had not reached the low threshold (low threshold equal to 0).For 15-minute (explicit clearance) monitoring periods. the alarm must be manually acknowledged by the user.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 272/388 . reset) are defined: a TCA is generated during the monitoring period when the event count reaches or exceeds the set threshold value the first time. it does not provide a complete set of all counters. the NE does not provide complete performance measurement for the protected TPs. which has crossed the threshold. Select the TP and open the PM Configuration dialog by clicking on the menu item Configure Monitoring .PathOverhMon Before Matrix . to identify the selected TP. not supported) or Tandem Connection (TCT. In case of au4CTP and tuxCTPs and VcxCTP.TCT Bidirectional After Matrix ED 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 273/388 . Every configuration of all monitoring intervals is defined using this dialog. This "PM Configuration" dialog serves as the main interface to all PM services. Resetting of counters. the PM Configuration dialog also contains an option button showing the configured POM and SUT options as follow. To configure PM for au4CTPs and tuxCTPs. The selected TP is indicated in the first box at the top of the screen: TP Identifier. Passing on and copying of this document.TCM After Matrix . .TCM Before Matrix . Increased thresholds (higher than current value of counters) (only for 24 h) 17. The PM Configuration dialog is designed as a notebook consisting of a text field. Path Overhead Monitoring (POM) or Supervised Unequipped Termination (SUT.Additionally an explicit clearance of TCAs for all granularity periods is executed if one of the following events occurs during the current interval: • • • Deletion of the current data instance. TCM) must be created first. and page labels.B.2 Configuration Use menu item Add TP to display a special TP in the Transmission menu.TP (Performance is made on AU-PJE) . It is possible to access the same "PM Configuration" dialog selecting a TP in the "Port view" and opening the same Performance > Configure Monitoring option in the Port pull down menu.PathOverhMon After Matrix . All rights reserved. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. N. As long as the PM Configuration dialog is open. far end 24 hours page 24hBi. Therefore make sure to reopen the PM Configuration dialog each time the POM/SUT configuration is changed. near end 24 hours page FE15. end to end 24 hours page (enable only on HPOM) Each dataset has to be configured independently. a Question dialog box is displayed. I. far end 15 minutes page FE24. a modified POM/SUT/TC configuration is not automatically recognized and displayed. ED 01 SC. near end 15 minutes page NE24. click on Cancel to continue or OK to interrupt any action. Passing on and copying of this document. select the POM or SUT option first and then configure the different associated data sets.TCT Bidirectional Before Matrix When more than one of the above options is chosen. click on the top part of the label: All rights reserved. or 24 h). • • • • • • NE15. Each page label presents a range of parameters for one near end or far end granularity period (15 min. which together form a dataset. To select a special page label. This may lead to rejections or confirmations of forbidden PM configuration. Confirm the configuration with Apply before you continue with a different POM or SUT option.B.e. N. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.. near and far end 24 hours page bidirectional (UAS is the sum of far end near end) e-e-24h.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 274/388 . For AU-4 CTP and TU-x CTP the highest criteria are POM and SUT. PM Configuration Dialog (example) 01 SC. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 275/388 . ED Figure 209. Passing on and copying of this document.All rights reserved. PM question dialog box (example) Activate any item within the page label by selecting the respective radio button. • Create History Data ED 01 SC. Disabling Data Collection leads to clearance of the current and all history data of this entity.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 276/388 . Figure 210. • Mode • Data Collection Select this button to activate performance monitoring.All rights reserved. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Passing on and copying of this document. to open the PM Threshold Table Select dialog (see) and configure the threshold table (see Chapter on page). Otherwise the Transmission view is blocked and only released by closing and reopening the PM Configuration window and the Transmission view. All current values are set to zero. PM remains enabled but data collection is stopped. If Lock is selected. Click on button Attach. • Suppress Additional Threshold Disabled: the alarm is generated every time the value exceed the upper threshold (value up).B.. This notification results in an UAT alarm in the Alarm Surveillance. Nevertheless. the alarm is generated again when the value exceeds the upper threshold (value up) after the lower threshold (value down) has been exceeded. as long as the number of displayed datasets does not exceed 16 for 15 min. Enabled: after a first alarm generation. • Threshold Table Attach a threshold table to the selected TP. All history performance data remain available. • Notifications • UAT (only available for 24 h granularity) For 24 h granularity. no history data is available. A threshold table can only be attached if Data Collection is enabled.. • Set Alarm Severity UAT • ASAP Id This field shows the label of the ASAP pointer assigned to the UAT alarm ED 01 SC. history data collection is performed in the selected entity for the corresponding TP. threshold table must not be assigned to a 24 h dataset). datasets collected prior to deactivation are not cleared and are displayed after re-enabling the item.B.e. Note that on disabling this mode item. • EML OS Monitoring (only accessible from SH) Not available for Craft Terminal. Only assign threshold tables that match the granularity period of the datasets (i. Select button Remove to disassociate the threshold table from the entity.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 277/388 . Passing on and copying of this document. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. granularity. a 15 min. UAT (Unavailable Time) notifications are created if enabled. N.If this item is selected. • Lock Data Collection. This parameter can only be selected during creation and cannot be subsequently modified. Not supported All rights reserved. N. Select the TP and open the Current PM Data dialog by clicking on the menu item Display Current Data. The Set ASAP button opens the window displayed.• Set ASAP Allows to set new ASAP pointer for the UAT alarm.PathOverhMon Before Matrix . Passing on and copying of this document. This "Current PM Data" dialog serves to show the results and status of the Performance Monitoring counters.3 Display Current Data All rights reserved. Otherwise the configuration is lost.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 278/388 .TCT Bidirectional After Matrix .TCT Bidirectional Before Matrix ED 01 SC.TP (Performance is made on AU-PJE) . Use menu item Add TP to display a special TP in the Transmission view. Confirm the configuration with the button Apply before closing the dialog. The Current PM Data dialog is designed as a notebook consisting of a text field. the Current PM Data dialog also contains an option button showing the configured POM and SUT options to display as follow: . and page labels.PathOverhMon After Matrix . to identify the selected TP.TCM Before Matrix . 17. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. It is possible to access the same "Current PM Data" dialog selecting a TP in the "Port view" and opening the same Performance > Display Current Data option in the Port pull down menu. The selected TP is indicated in the first box at the top of the screen: TP Identifier.TCM After Matrix . In case of au4CTP and tuxCTPs. • • • Threshold Table Indicates which threshold table is assigned to the entity. that both alarms are active. Press the Refresh button to update the window contents and display the latest data. This information tells the user whether the data collection covers the whole period. Reset button is used to restart the counting period.B. or 24h) which together form a dataset. Passing on and copying of this document.Each page label presents a range of parameters for one "near end and far end" granularity period (15min. near end and far end 15 minutes page 24 h. are displayed in this dialog. which are related to the selected TP and recorded in the current monitoring interval. click on the top part of the label: • • • • 15 min. which has elapsed since the monitoring interval was started. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. far end 24 hours page bidirectional (UAS is the sum of far end and near end) e-e 24h. end to end 24 hours page (enable only on HPOM) All rights reserved. The following items are indicated for each entity: • Administrative State Indicates whether the PM collection is locked for the local user or not. Two buttons are present for near-end and farend periods.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 279/388 . • Suspect Data Indicates if collection errors occurred during the collection period. there is no error message displayed to indicate this. N. To select a special page label. use the cursor to scroll the text field in this case. Current Problem List Indicates current UAT ("Unavailable") and TCA ("Threshold Crossed") alarms. • Operational State Indicates whether PM is enabled or disabled. The entry "Unavailable Threshold Crossed" indicates. All datasets available. Since the text field is too small to display the full text at a time. Using the Print button. At the bottom the PM results are listed. N. near end and far end 24 hours page 24hBi. If no printer is installed. PM data can be saved to a file or printed on paper.B. ED 01 SC. • Elapsed Time Indicates the time. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. ED 01 SC.4 Display History Data Use menu item Add TP to display a special TP in the Transmission view. Passing on and copying of this document. Select the TP and open the PM History Data dialog by clicking on the menu item Display History Data.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 280/388 . Figure 211. Current PM Data Dialog (example) 17.All rights reserved. to identify the selected TP. All available datasets (entities). The selected TP is indicated in the first box at the top of the screen: TP Identifier. far end 24 hours page bidirectional (UAS is the sum of far end and near end) e-e 24h.TCM Before Matrix .mm. This "PM History Data" dialog serves to show stored Performance Monitoring counting.PathOverhMon Before Matrix . ED 01 SC. In case of au4CTP and tuxCTPs VCxCTPs. near end and far end 24 hours page 24hBi. Passing on and copying of this document.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 281/388 .TCM After Matrix . 24h. click on the top part of the label. near end and far end 15 minutes page 24 h. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. and page labels. end to end 24 hours page (enable only on HPOM) The PM data is displayed containing information concerning: • Interval End Time In the format dd. are displayed in the table: • • • • 15 min.yyyy hh:mm:ss.PathOverhMon After Matrix . To select a special page label.TCT Bidirectional After Matrix . 24h bidirectional). The PM History Data dialog is designed as a notebook consisting of a text field.TCT Bidirectional Before Matrix Each page label presents a range of parameters for one "near end and far end" granularity period (15min.. the PM History Data dialog also contains a cascading menu that allows choosing the POM and SUT options to display follow: . It is possible to access the same "PM History Data" dialog selecting a TP in the "Port view" and opening the same Performance > Display History Data option in the Port pull down menu. which are related to the selected TP.All rights reserved.TP (Performance is made on AU-PJE) . a maximum of 16 datasets can be displayed simultaneously for each counter.5 PM Threshold Table Selection The PM Threshold Table Select dialog pops up if the Attach button is clicked in the PM Configuration dialog. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. If the limit of 16 datasets for 15 min. Using the Print button. the 24h entities display a maximum of one dataset. ED 01 SC. there is no error message displayed to indicate this. granularity and 3 datasets for 24 h granularity is reached. PM History Data Dialog (example) 17.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 282/388 . the oldest set in the list is cleared when the next data set arrives. If no printer is installed. All rights reserved.• • The number of recorded events concerning an entity is divided into near end and far end data Elapsed Time Indicating whether the data collection was complete. N.B. Figure 212. Passing on and copying of this document. In case of 15 min. entities. PM data can be saved to a file or printed on paper. The user cannot change these figures. • Susp Indicating suspect data where collection errors occurred during the collection period. An error message informs the user of this situation. In addition. Delete an existing threshold table Mark the table in the list and click on the Delete button. The user has to close the dialog explicitly by clicking on the button Close. Do not open several dialogs at the same time using both possibilities. Since those dialogs are not synchronized. The user can perform the following actions: • • Create / Modify / Display a threshold table.All rights reserved. The tables are individually indicated with a number.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 283/388 . • Attach the selected threshold table to a TP entity.B. It is only available entering from the PM Configuration dialog. Passing on and copying of this document. ED 01 SC. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. The filtering criteria are not operative. Each table is dedicated to specific entities. The dialog presents a list of existing threshold tables. as reported in each table can be modified according the operator selections. Note that a threshold table cannot be deleted if it is attached to a PM entity. they could display different contents. this dialog can be accessed using the Configuration menu: N. it will be signaled in the Port view and in the Transmission view as for the following figures: ED 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 284/388 . PM Threshold Table Select Table 7.All rights reserved. Threshold table entities association N Layer TP’ s ASSOCIATED Granularity 1 STM4 RS 15 minutes 2 STM4 RS 24 hours 3 STM1 RS 15 minutes 4 STM1 RS 24 hours 5 STM4 MS NE / FE 15 minutes 6 STM4 MS NE / FE 24 hours 7 STM1 MS NE / FE 15 minutes 8 STM1 MS NE / FE 24 hours 9 VC4 Path Termination NE / FE 15 minutes 10 VC4 Path Termination NE / FE 24 hours 11 VC3 Path Termination NE / FE 15 minutes 12 VC3 Path Termination NE / FE 24 hours 13 VC12 Path Termination NE / FE 15 minutes 14 VC12 Path Termination NE / FE 24 hours After the activation of a PM on a TP. Passing on and copying of this document. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Figure 213. 1 Creation The PM Threshold Table Create dialog pops up when the Create button is clicked in the PM Threshold Table Selection dialog. Figure 215. 2) Select a Granularity of 15 min. A number of threshold tables can be created from the same window. monitoring periods. or 24 h fo r the entity. Node that the reset value if supported. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. ED 01 SC. 3) Enter the set (Value Up) and the reset (Value Down) threshold values. PM Port View All rights reserved. Carry out the following steps to create a threshold table: 1) Enter the table name in input field Name . PM Transmission View 17. 6) Confirm the entries with Apply to create the threshold table.6. will be available with 15 min.Figure 214. 4) Select the alarm Severity for each PM attribute in case a threshold is crossed. 5) Disable Send notification if no notification message should be sent in the case of a crossed threshold. Leaving the input field blank or entering only blanks is not allowed and rejected. Passing on and copying of this document.6 PM Threshold Table Creation / Modification / Display 17. The respective value is automatically reset to the maximum if a larger figure is entered. Leading and succession blanks are ignored. Table 1 shows the maximum performance monitoring event values.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 285/388 . Explicitly close the window with button Close. Figure 216. Shows the allowed maximum performance parameter values.6. 2) Modify the alarm Severity for each PM attribute in case a threshold is crossed. ED 01 SC. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Carry out the following steps to modify a threshold table: 1) Modify the upper threshold value ( Value Up ) and the lower value (Value down) Table 1.All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 286/388 .2 Modification The PM Threshold Table Modify dialog (see) pops up if a threshold table is selected in the PM Threshold Table Selection dialog (see) and the Modify button is clicked. Create PM Threshold Table 17. Note that the Name (really "number") cannot be changed. 3) Disable Send notification if no notification message should be sent in the case of a crossed threshold. 5) To modify more than one threshold table.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 287/388 . Value for 24-h period period BBE.600 OFS. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Value for 15-min Max. FEBBE on all the other board 539. UAS.000 172. PJC low 1. FEES. FEBBE on STM-1 2. Explicitly close the dialog with button Close.760 PJC high. but select the next threshold table in the PM Threshold Table Selection dialog and press the Modify button (see).753. Table 8. 17. Refer to the previous chapter for a description of the attribute values and types.800.100 829.000 All rights reserved. FESES 810 78. 900 86.159.273.4) Confirm the modifications with Apply. Passing on and copying of this document.353.100 51.100 207. FEBBE on STM-4 8.400 SES.600 BBE.3 Display The PM Threshold Table Display dialog pops up if a threshold table is selected in the PM Threshold Ta ble Selection dialog and the Display button is clicked. ED 01 SC. ES.600 BBE.6.639.800. do not close the dialog. Maximum Performance Parameter Values Performance Parameter Max. All rights reserved. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Figure 217. Passing on and copying of this document. ED 01 SC. Selecting the PM Overview option from the Configuration pull down menu figures below open.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 288/388 .7 PM Overview MSP Overview allows displaying performance overview. Modify PM Threshold Table 17. ED Figure 218. Passing on and copying of this document.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 289/388 . PM Overview Menu item 01 SC.All rights reserved. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.All rights reserved. PM Overview 3AL 98104 ADAA 290/388 . Passing on and copying of this document.3: NE MANAGEMENT Figure 219. ED 01 SC. All rights reserved. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Like the figure below. Figure 220.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 291/388 . Passing on and copying of this document. Add TP for PM Overview You can click “ Add TP”button to see the PM data about the selected TP. ED 01 SC. Passing on and copying of this document.All rights reserved. ED 01 SC. PM Overview after add TP 3AL 98104 ADAA 292/388 . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.3: NE MANAGEMENT Figure 221. whilst the internal oscillator is useful only in the abnormal functioning "Freerunning" mode that will be explained later. Internal organization of the SETS. The SETG is responsible for the generation of the external timing source for the Frame structure and the clock. It can be divided into 2 parts: • • All rights reserved.1 Introduction All SDH NEs require timing in order to generate the necessary synchronization and frame phase reference information. Figure 222.048 MHz signal. The derived timing shall be used for all signals and interfaces in the NE that are related to the SDH frame structure. T2: Reference obtained from incoming 2 Mbits signals. The internal sources (inputs) are: • • • • T1: Reference obtained from incoming STM-N signals. Passing on and copying of this document. ED 01 SC. The timing can be provided by a source external to the NE or an internal timing generator. OSC: the internal oscillator. Follows a brief description of the heart of the NE clock known as the Synchronization Equipment Timing Source (SETS). The simplified figure that follows represents the internal organization of the SETS.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 293/388 . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. T3/T6: Reference obtained from an external incoming 2. OSC: the internal oscillator.18 Synchronization management 18. SETG: the Synchronization Equipment Timing Generator. The number of timing reference inputs depends on the configuration of the NE. The Operator for each candidate-timing source determines the priority level. T4: is the reference output for the external equipment synchronization. Selector B is capable of selecting timing reference from T1. The SETG during normal functioning stores regularly the value of the external timing reference. • Y: is used for communication of Synchronization Status Message (SSM) between SETS and MST functional blocks. In this case the SETG output is controlled by this memorized value. the quality of the source is dynamic information. The SETG has 3 modes of operation: • Locked mode: The SETG output is fully controlled by the external timing references (T1. or T3 inputs. the quality of the timing source is located in the Section Overhead. or SSM threshold violation. ED 01 SC. according to the SSM algorithm. The squelch functions A and B mute the relevant timing references in the presence of failure condition. • Manually: Following an order from the Operator. Selector C is only operated in manual mode. The choice of the timing reference is done in two ways: • Automatically: Following a particular algorithm based on the quality and the priority of the incoming timing signals.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 294/388 . The automatic selection is based either on the priority of the incoming timing source (Priority algorithm) or on the priority and the quality level of the incoming sources (SSM algorithm). It is static information. T2 and T3). • Hold-Over mode: The external timing reference is malfunctioning.B. to switch between SETG output signal (T0) and a T1 timing reference. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. The capability for manual selection of the timing source is also provided. either automatically based on the priority and quality level of the candidate sources (SSM algorithm). In an SDH signal frame. S15: is used to provide notifications and loss of incoming timing reference reporting to the Synchronous Equipment Management Function (SEMF). N. Selector A provides the capability to select timing reference from available T1 inputs.The external sources (outputs) are: • • • T0: is the reference output signal for the clock and signal frames. dependant of the quality of the reference clock generating the timing. Passing on and copying of this document. On the other hand. or manual as a result of commands issued from the managing system. T5: is the 2 Mbit/s reference output for the external equipment synchronization Other reference points: • All rights reserved. T2. Remove Timing Reference. In this case the SETG output is controlled by the internal clock source. All the operations that can be done on the synchronization sources are performed from this synchronization view.• Free running mode: This is not a normal operating mode. Using menu options. Frame Mode Configuration Show Timing Source. select the Synchronization option from the Views pull down menu as shown in the following figure.2. T0 TEST Configuration (not operative in current release) SSU Configuration. Protection Commands.1 Displaying the Synchronization View The synchronization view can be normally opened using the menu Views options. T0 Configuration. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.2 Synchronization Management The operations that can be done on the synchronization sources are the following: • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Timing Source Configuration. Before any other operation the synchronization view has to be displayed. Transmitted SSM Quality Configuration.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 295/388 . Obtaining the synchronization view Selecting this menu option the synchronization representation will be displayed directly into the current window instead of the current view. Change T4<-> T5 Set T0 Equal T4 Change 2 MHz -> 2 Mbit (available only if T3 has been configured as timing source) Remove T0 Equal T4. The external timing reference and the memorized timing reference are malfunctioning. Passing on and copying of this document. 18. T4 Configuration. ED 01 SC. Figure 223. All rights reserved. 18. 18.2.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 296/388 . After selecting the Synchronization option from the Views menu the Synchronization View is visua lized. T4 or T5. Figure 224. Passing on and copying of this document. Synchronization View Example ED 01 SC. Activating the SSM algorithm implies that the selection of the source is before done on the quality criteria and then on the priority criteria for sources at the same quality level. generation. All rights reserved. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.2 Synchronization View The Synchronization view shows the external timing reference sources and the T0. The selection is based on the SSM algorithm or on the priority of the incoming timing sources. A timing reference associated to the Internal Oscillator timing source.A small box representing the LOS alarm. T0 list is always present. failure) . In case of alarm indication the operator can select Show Timing Source to visualize the alarm detail.A label "0" representing the priority of the Internal Oscillator ED 01 SC. DRIFT means that the Frequency Offset between the external signal source and the internal clock is high then the maximum tolerance value.6 max timing reference for candidate inputs belonging to the allowable timing reference T1. manual switch.The name of the selected timing source . basing on the priority and quality level of the candidate sources according a selection algorithm or manually under control of the managing system. a 1:n protection like mechanism is used for the selection of the timing source from T0 (T4) list of the allowable timing references. One for T4 timing output. . force switch. indicating the Holdover or Free Running operation mode.6 timing reference for candidate inputs belonging to the allowable timing reference T1 configurable by the operator.The label of the quality level of the timing input source . SSF means that the Server Signal Failure is sending a wrong reference signal to the NE. one of the following strings can be displayed in the label field: . displayed when the clock operates in Holdover mode. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. The T0 and T4 lists are used for the management of reference timing source protection. the presence of the T4 list is configurable using resource files. . Passing on and copying of this document.The name of the timing source: Internal Oscillator .Synchronization View Description The synchronization view provides two lists of allowable timing references : • • One for T0 timing output. the basic component contained in the synchronization view are described: • All rights reserved.The status of the synchronization source: (lockout.The priority of the timing input source . it is always present and it cannot be removed or redefined. . no request. Timing reference Each allowable timing reference. T4 list contains: . T0 list contains: . is represented by the graphical object displayed in the view. automatic switch. . the small box will be lighted up when all the selected timing source are lost. displayed when the clock operates in Free Running mode . The protection system chooses the timing reference to generate the output T0 (T4) either automatically. In the timing reference graphical object associated to the Internal Oscillator the following information are displayed: .2 small boxes representing the SSF (Los) and DRIFT alarms detected on the timing source.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 297/388 . the timing reference graphical object displays (with the exception of Internal Oscillator timing reference) the following information (if the timing source has been declared by the user): . View elements description Here after.Free running.Holdover.A label field representing the abnormal clock operation modes. T2 or T3/T6 configurable by the operator.Empty string is displayed when the clock operates in Lock . . a solid line between T0 signal and T4/T5 signal (or T0_Test signal) box is drawn when T0 signal is used to generate T4/T5 18.The selector A. The box displays the configured quality level threshold and it is lighted up when the output-timing signal is inhibited. Figure 225.He output signal T4/T5.3 Timing Source Configuration This functionality allows configuring the input synchronization sources and configuring or modifying the timing source priority and quality. . ED 01 SC.• Selectors Small ellipse are used to represent respectively: . Boxes contained a label field are used to represent the squelch statuses T0/T4 and T4. Synchronization Menu The menu options are grey according to the current state of the dialogue box that the user can open. • Squelch Status All rights reserved. • Output Signal An arrow and a label field are used to represent respectively: .A dashed line between an output signal and an allowable timing reference means that timing reference is not currently in use as timing source but will act in the protecting role.2.A solid line between an output signal and an allowable timing reference means that timing reference is currently used to generate that signal. . In the same way.The output signal T0. . • Line Type The following different line type are used to link the output signals and the respective allowable timing reference: .The selector C.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 298/388 .The selector B. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. . Passing on and copying of this document. The following dialogue box is opened. Then select the Timing Source Configuration option from the cascading menu. All rights reserved. these TP are: EIS for electrical SDH port. Figure below shows an example of the opened windows. Select an empty synch. Timing source configuration for cross-Connect equipments The Timing source configuration dialogue box which opens. Following the TP Search procedure described in Para. subrack. as shown in the above figure. Passing on and copying of this document. OpS for optical SDH port. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. It permits to configure the following timing source information: • • Quality level. Priority level Extracted Quality is the actual Rx quality retrieved from the signal received from the line. On page (rack. This operation can be repeated for the entire available empty synch. board. Figure 226. Source reference and click on Timing Source Configuration and then on the Input Source Choice. displays the extracted quality of the selected timing source.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 299/388 . ED 01 SC.Firstly select a synchronization source reference and after the Synchronization menu to open the Synchronization Option List. Sources both for T0 clock and for T4 clock. port) enter the physical board termination point (TP) value. Q.812T. ED 01 SC. Don't use (where the highest quality level is G. Rx quality is forced to this value.813. Timing source may have. in increasing order. Click on the Priority: the option button opens the option menu to select the desired priority level. G.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 300/388 . Synch. five quality levels: G. If Input Quality Configuration is set to a value other than "Extracted".811. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.All rights reserved. Source configuration for ADM equipment Click on the Input Quality Configuration: the option button opens the option menu to select the desired quality le vel. G. Passing on and copying of this document.811). G. Figure 227.812L. Source box "Port#" test. 0 6 5 4 3 2 1). The "Status" indication describes the current synch. this operation is impossible.. Passing on and copying of this document. in increasing order of priority (i.. Failure.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 301/388 . Select the Synchronization pull down menu. the corresponding physical interface denomination (rack-subrack-board-port) is written on the window bottom left.4 Synchronization Protection Commands Select the timing reference from the synchronization view. Menu options are grey. Positioning the mouse on the synch. The other timing sources will have a priority of 1 to n.e. Force and Manual commands a) Invoke/Release Lockout: Locking or unlocking a timing source enables or disables the timing source from being considered as a possible timing source for T0 or T4.. All rights reserved. According to the current state of the selected timing source. Automatic Switch. Figure 228. . Levels 6. Priority of 1 is the highest priority.2 are intermediate levels between level 0 and 1. You can then select the Protection Commands to open the view. Releasing terminates the forced switch mode or inhibiting the force selected timing source. If the timing source is lockout or unavailable.The internal oscillator-timing source will have the lowest priority (priority=0) and its priority cannot be changed. The Cancel push button cancels the configuration and closes the dialogue box. click on the OK push button to validate the choice and close the dialogue box. Lockout. If the previously manual selected timing source becomes unavailable the automatic selection is activated. Furthermore. A timing source is considered to be available if it is not lockout and has not a failure condition or Priority level of 0. Otherwise the automatic selection algorithm overrules the manual selection.) ED 01 SC. b) Invoke/Release Force and Manual Selection of Timing Source General selection A timing source can be selected manually or automatically. the selection of a particular incoming timing source (except the internal oscillator) may be forced. status (No Request. The manual selection option is only possible if the quality and priority of the selected timing source are sufficient. When the configuration of the timing source is completed. This selection is independent of the priority or quality of the timing source. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.2.. 18.. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. In this NE revertive mode is hardware set. which consists in a choice of quality level. When T1 is selected to generate T4 (squelch A ) :T1 may be squelched if T1 Quality Level is lower than the programmable threshold or if it becomes unavailable. forced or manual selection.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 302/388 . Selecting the T0 or T4 Configuration set the SSM algorithm and the Wait To Restore Time in the dialog box upper part. Click on the T4: option button to open the option menu and select the desired quality level. In Revertive mode the internal selector A/B changes every time to the best reference clock with the highest quality.N. The T4 squelch configuration dialogue box enables you to configure the quality level of the T4 timing source. the following operations have to be done: • • • • All rights reserved.. The internal oscillator cannot be forced or manually selected. Click on Appl y in the displayed confirmation box. Click on the T0: option button to open the option menu and select the desired quality level. Forced or manual Selection option. The Cancel push button cancels the configuration and closes the dialogue box. The T5 output field allows selecting the bit used (from #4 to #8) for SSM. with fixed WTR. Manual selection is not operative in the current release 18. on the same quality level basis the reference clock Source with the best priority will be selected. The T0/T4 and T1/T4 squelch fields enables you to configure the quality level of the T0 or T4 timing source.2.B. Select the Protection Commands option then invoke/Release the Lockout. To perform or release a T0 or T4 lockout. opening the relevant option menu. The squelch function mutes the relevant timing references in the presence of a failure condition. click on the OK button to validate the choice and close the dialogue box. When the configuration of T0/T4 Configuration is completed. Passing on and copying of this document. The changing mechanism of the reference inputs is controlled by the wait time to restore: this time sets a delay before to change the input source. From the dialogue box that opens. Different squelch criteria may be applied: • • When T0 is selected to generate T4 (squelch B ): T0 may be squelched if all the allowable timing references of Selector B have Quality Level lower than the programmable threshold. This command permits to select/deselect the SSM algorithm. command. Wait To Restore Time button and Revertive option button are disabled Selecting T4 Configuration it is possible to set the T4 squelch criteria in the bottom dialog box.5 Synchronization Configuration for T0/T4 and T4 squelch criteria Select the available T0 or T4 synchronization sources and then the T0 or T4 Configuration. to set the wait time to restore and to enable the revertive procedure if all these features are available. Select the T0 or T4 source. Click on the Synchronization menu. Click on the SSM Algo rithm to select/deselect it.. The T4 Force Squelch enables you to activate the T4 forced squelch. Squelch may be forced by the Operator or according to squelch criteria. This functionality allows configuring the external timing reference (T4) squelch criteria. you can confirm or cancel the operation. ED 01 SC. Selecting SSU Configuration from the Synchronization menu.When the configuration of T0/T4 Configuration is completed. Configuring the T0 or T4 SSM algorithm and the squelch criteria 18. Passing on and copying of this document. ED 01 SC. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. All rights reserved. Figure 229. The Cancel push button cancels the configuration and closes the dialogue box. click on the OK push button to validate the choice and close the dialogue box. In the last case the SSU quality has to be defined.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 303/388 .6 SSU Configuration The SSU configuration command allows either to configure the single NE or the NE with SSU.2. Passing on and copying of this document. Figure 230. Source to remove and click on the Remove Timing Reference option. SSU Configuration 18. Figure 231. Synchronization source removing ED 01 SC.2. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 304/388 .7 Remove Timing Reference Select the synch. To remove the selected source click on "OK " button of the confirmation message.All rights reserved. Synchronization source removing confirmation 18.2.To remove the selected source click on "OK " button of the confirmation message. Figure 233.8 Change T4 <-> T5 This Menu allows the change of the synchronization physical interface from 2Mhz (T4) to 2 Mbit/s (T5) and vice versa This menu is enabling only if the SERGI board is present in the subrack Select Change T4 <-> T5 from the Synchronization. Figure 232.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 305/388 . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Passing on and copying of this document. Change T4 <-> T5 menu ED 01 SC. All rights reserved. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 306/388 . Passing on and copying of this document. the new window display T5 inserted of T4 ED 01 SC. Click on ok to confirm. Change T4 <-> T5 confirmation message All rights reserved.A confirmation message appears Figure 234. 2.All rights reserved.9 Change 2MHz ->2Mbit This menu is enabled only if the operator selects a protection unit. Figure 235.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 307/388 . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. which has as source a 2 MHz or a 2 Mbit/s without traffic Select Change 2MHz -> 2Mbit from the Synchronization ED 01 SC. Passing on and copying of this document. Change T4 <-> T5: command execution 18. All rights reserved. If the selected protection unit is a 2 Mbit/s. Passing on and copying of this document.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 308/388 . then the label will be changed into 2MHz ED 01 SC. Change 2MHz ->2Mbit confirmation message Click on ok to confirm The label of the protection unit will be changed depending on the kind of source selected: • • If the selected protection unit is a 2 MHz. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. then the label will be changed into 2Mbit/s. Figure 236. Change 2MHz -->2Mbit menu A confirmation message appears Figure 237. Source and click on Set T0 Equal T4 menu option.2.All rights reserved. The connection between T0/T4 will pass from a shaped to a continue line as in the example of Figure below. Change 2MHz -->2Mbit: command execution 18. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.10Set and Remove T0 Equal T4 To connect T0 internal synch. Select a synch. Figure 238.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 309/388 . ED 01 SC. Passing on and copying of this document. 11Transmission of SSM Quality Configuration Select the T1 SDH Reference Source in the Synchronization View hence the Transmission SSM Quality Configuration is enabled.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 310/388 . to transmit the ED 01 SC.All rights reserved. 18. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.2. T4 equal T0 setting To separate T4 from T0 click on the "Remove T0 Equal T4 " menu option. with the Inserted option. Passing on and copying of this document. Figure 239. The T0/T4 connection will become shaped while the connection between T1/T4 will pass from a shaped to a continue line. This selection allows. This selection allows analyzing the input source considering its payload structure and the related alarms (Port view is presented) .12Show Timing Source Selecting any T1 or T2 Reference Source in the Synchronization View hence the Show Timing Source is enabled.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 311/388 . Passing on and copying of this document. it is also possible to open the window selecting the Transmission option of the View menu. It is also possible to transmit different quality level selecting a different value. then access the Board view> Port view> Physical Media> SDH Tx Quality Configuration. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. then access the Physical Media> SDH Tx Quality Configuration option. Transmission SSM Quality This Transmission SSM Quality window can be also opened from any SDH boards. Figure 240.2. In both cases select the MST block 18. Click on Show Timing Source of the Synchronization menu option. All rights reserved.system internal T0 clock quality towards the external SDH interface. Select the Equipment option of the View menu. Click on Transmitted SSM Quality Configuration of the Synchronization menu option. ED 01 SC. Passing on and copying of this document.All rights reserved. ED 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT Figure 241. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Timing Source Example 3AL 98104 ADAA 312/388 . Follow the "Squelching Table Configuration" in order to define the "Squelching Table HO" for East and for West aggregates describing. 19. 4 Fiber MS-SPRING and Aggregate MSP protection connections cannot be installed in a 2 Fiber MS-SPRING network. 19. b. Only AU4s from #1 to 8# must be used and configured for path installation. Create an MS-SPRING schema with WTR. i. the Node Identifier of the node terminating the AU4.19 MS-SPRING MANAGEMENT 19. to follow before to implement the MS-SPRing protection: there are some limitations concerning the aggregate types or the AU4s cross-connections to be considered.1 2-Fiber MS-SPRING connection configuration advices The following suggestions must be considered in the MS-SPRING connection configuration: • • • • • SNCP. All rights reserved.2 MS-SPRING connection configuration advices In the following paragraphs 2-Fiber and NPE advices are reported. WTR Ring must be same in all the nodes. . Consider that. In the Main dialog for MS-SPRing management select "ACTIVATE" in each node of the ring. Ring map and the related Squelching Table for each node of the ring.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 313/388 .1 MS-SPRING intro duction Different MS-SPRING protections architectures are provided: 2-Fiber (Terrestrial). in the desired order. in the desired order. "Default K byte West or East" detection by View Protection Status Parameter (under MS-SPRing label -> " Protocol ED 01 SC. 19. AU4s from #9 to #16 don't have to be used for connections nor considered in any parameter of "Squelching table" provisioning. The description of the MS-SPRING protections is inserted in the Technical Handbook. for each connection installed.Activation procedure a. Node Identifier. Passing on and copying of this document. AU4 cross connection Aggregate side.841.3 Operative sequence to configure MS-SPRING In the following paragraphs 2-Fiber and NPE operative sequence to follow during configuration are inserted. This leads to an unprotected connections installation.1 Operative sequence to configure 2-Fiber MS-SPRING Next paragraphs lit the operative sequence according the type of produce to obtain. the Node Identifier of the node generating the considered AU4 and as Destination Node .3. The AU4 allocated to passthrough in HVC connections must be the same through the node. AU4 permutation (change of AU4 allocation) is not allowed. paths received from the Aggregate line and looped-back to the (same) Aggregate line are not allowed.2. as Source Node .e. 19. in this step. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. and 4-Fiber NPE (Transoceanic). See ITU-T Rec. G. 4 Fiber MS-SPRING is not operative in this release. 3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 314/388 . Verify in the View Protection Status Parameter screen. in this step. d.4 MS-SPRING Management In the NE current release the NE supports the MS-SPRING protection as "Terrestrial architecture". c. c. b. will occur on those Aggregate of the activated nodes connected to the nodes just deactivated. In the Main dialog for MS-SPRing management select "DEACTIVATE" in each node of the ring. 19. will occur on those Aggregate of the activated nodes connected to the nodes just deactivated. The Transoceanic application with 4-Fiber is not supported in current release. Connect the fibers and send the "Release" command of the relevant "Force Ring" to both NE's adjacent to the removed node.exception"). In the Manage ring Map view select the node and click on the "Remove Node" button b. Passing on and copying of this document. c. Deactivation procedure a. For the 2-Fiber Terrestrial application a max. at the end of the provisioning update. send "Force Ring" command to both NE's adjacent to the node to be added. Opening the View Protection Status Parameter screen. Consider that. Figure below shows the MS– SPRing pull down menu. The available tables permit to visualize for the same NE the architecture 2 x 2-Fiber. Adding a node a. e. All rights reserved. Squelching table. Next nodes are automatically shifted. send "Force Ring" command to both NE's adjacent to the node to be removed. In the Manage ring Map view insert the node in the selected position. b. Physical add the node and configure with 2-Fiber MS-SPRING activated with the right configuration (Ring Map. Physical remove the node e. Modify the table in the Configure Squelch Table view according the new Ring Map. node Identifier). Connect the fibers and send the "Release" command of the relevant "Force Ring" to both NE's adjacent to the added node. Figure 242. d. Removing a node a. that all the nodes of the ring are in "MS-SPRing activate" and "No request" state. Display MS– SPRing pull down menu ED 01 SC. Modify the table in the Configure Squelch Table view according the new Ring Map. of 16 nodes are available. WTR. Opening the View Protection Status screen. In the Main dialog for MS-SPRIng management select "DELETE" in each node of the ring. "Default K byte West or East" detection by View Protection Status Parameter (under MS-SPRing label -> "Protocol exception"). use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. 3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 315/388 .4. Figure 243. 19. In any dialog box is present the Cancel or Close buttons. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. The following dialogue box is displayed when no protection have been previously configured All rights reserved.1 MS-SPRing Main Configuration Select the MS-SPRing pull down menu. Figure below opens ED 01 SC. Then select the Main Dialog for MS-SPRing management option from the pull down menu. The name of Schema Selection in not editable but is fixed to "No Schema". MS-SPRing Management dialog box The only command available is Create. When the user clicks on these buttons the dialog box will close without starting any operation. Click on Create to start the MS-SPRing configuration.The first Main Dialog for MS-SPRing management option contains all the commands to configure and manage the MS-SPRing. Passing on and copying of this document. All rights reserved. The OK button will start the selected operation. The Holdoff Time command is not operative in current release. sl=slot give the position of the physical port.(not supported in current relese) The "Port Selection" depends on the Architecture type: if the architecture is a 2F MS-SPRing. In the same board it is generally possible to have different port numbers. the working and protection ports on each side are different. Figure below opens and all commands are now available. Figure 244.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 316/388 . Passing on and copying of this document. Terrestrial MS-SPRing Application is a 2 Fiber architecture. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Transoceanic MS-SPRing is a 4 Fiber architecture. Only one port number (port#01) is available in the 1664SM Actually for 1664SM the working and protection aggregate boards have a fixed location in the subrack and the "Choose Port" buttons is not used. Then the dialog window will be closed. ED 01 SC. If the architecture is a 4F MS-SPRing. The cursor is displayed busy up to receiving a reply. sr=subrack. Creation Schema dialog box The user can select the MS_SPRing Application and the Architecture types supported by the Network Element. the working and protection port on each side is the same and the "Protecting West and East" fields are disabled (greyed). The label r(xx)sr(y)sl(zz)port#(hh) where r=rack. Passing on and copying of this document. ED 01 SC.All rights reserved. The matrix represents up to 64 nodes for transoceanic application and up to 16 nodes for terrestrial application. Activated MS-SPRing Management Click on Ring Map to configure the network node connection. Node Id and associated ring node position The Ring Map sets the connection sequence of the nodes within the ring. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 317/388 . Figure below opens Figure 246. Figure 245. This will be displayed in the Available Nodeld box then click on Add Node button. Click on the WTR Time button. Figure 247. In the same time the Available Nodeld will be updated to a new value.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 318/388 . Ring Position=4) is depicted in Figure below. select the node and click on Remove Node button. Then the dialog window will be closed. The default association for a four node node ring related to the fourth node (Nodeld=3. To remove a node. Figure below opens ED 01 SC. The following Ring Position of the nodes on the right decreases by one and the erased Nodeld is inserted into Available Nodeld. Select Current Nodeld (it means the NE where the operator is acting) in the box and enable Change Nodeld button (Id means Node Ident ifier) Select Available Nodeld in the pull down list (0 to 63 for transoceanic application. displaying the busy cursor up to receiving the replay to the actions. 0 to 15 for terrestrial application) releasing the left mouse button or pushing the stepper arrows and enter keys to select the Nodeld value. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Clicking on the Add Node button the selected "Ring position" will shift one step on the righ starting from "1" position and in the "Nodeld" field the Available Nodeld values is inserted.All rights reserved. The OK button will start the selected operation. Ring map configuration Repeat the procedure for all nodes of the ring selecting the different NEs and edit the different Current Nodeld value. Passing on and copying of this document. so it can be assigned to other nodes. The step value is 60 sec. Click on OK to apply the WTR Configuration. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. WTR Time Span is used only for 4-fiber architecture. it is disable (grey) for 2 fiber architecture. ED 01 SC. 19.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 319/388 . Passing on and copying of this document. The same WTR Time Ring must be set on each Node of the ring. The range value accepted is from 60 sec. The same opens clicking on Configure Squelch Table of the MS-SPRing pull down menu.4. Figure 249.All rights reserved. Figure below opens.2 Squelching table with 2 fiber Terrestrial applications With a 2 fiber Terrestrial application can be selected the Squelching Table while with a 4 fiber Transoceanic application can be selected the Ring Traffic If the operator tries to select a different table a error message is visualized. Figure 248. Figure below shows the error message visualized when is selected the Ring Traffic with a Terrestrial application. WTR dialog box Click on the push mouse button on the p/down Seconds arrows to select the required delay for the relevant WTR. Example of error message Click on Squelching Table to configure the AU4 (Au4#1 to AU4#8 for 2F Architecture) connection between the different nodes. to 900 sec. 2. Select the node identification number (0 to 15) from the available list using the slider or the stepper arrows on the right scroll region. Passing on and copying of this document. ED 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 320/388 . Point the mouse on the matrix position and click on the right mouse button to open the node list menu. 19.All rights reserved. Squelching table When the window is opened for the first time the squelching table is N/A (not available) because the NE has never been configured. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.1 Squelching table example Figure 251. Example of a ring traffic The squelching table is applicable only for OH-VC signals. Figure 250.4. All rights reserved. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Passing on and copying of this document. Squelching table of Node A. Connections of the ring Figure 253. West side 01 SC. ED Figure 252.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 321/388 . All rights reserved. Squelching table of Node A.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 322/388 . East side Figure 255. Passing on and copying of this document. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Squelching table of Node B. West side ED 01 SC. Figure 254. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.All rights reserved. East side Figure 257.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 323/388 . West side ED 01 SC. Figure 256. Squelching table of Node B. Squelching table of Node C. Passing on and copying of this document. All rights reserved. Figure 258. Passing on and copying of this document. East side Figure 259. Squelching table of Node C. Squelching table of Node D.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 324/388 . West side ED 01 SC. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. the status becomes Enable. Disable and Inactive. Figure 261. Active. the protocol request and the protocol protection errors are described in next chapters describing the "MS-SPRing Protection Status and Commands". Passing on and copying of this document.4. others in Inactivate status. Figure 260. Confirmation message During the activation procedure on different ADMs some of these can be Activate status. The delete action is started after confirming the window message. East side 19. To change from Active to Enable click on the Deactivate button. 19. The statuses.3 Activate. Squelching table of Node D. After having configured the protection schema by means of the Create button.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 325/388 . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.5 MS-SPRING Protection Status and Commands for 2 fiber terrestrial application ED 01 SC. The MS-SPRing status can be Enable. This command starts the request to deactivate the MS-SPRing protection mechanism When the selected protection schema is Enable the Delete button starts the request to remove it. The Activate button selection set "in service" the MS-SPRing protection mechanism on the selected schema configuration. Deactivate and Delete commands The Main Activates commands manage the MS-SPRing configuration.All rights reserved. 1 2F MS-SPRing protection commands If a protection schema is Active it is possible to select one of the above commands. Figure 262. ED 01 SC. Commands button in the MS-SPRing -> Main Dialog for MS-SPRing management Figure below is opened. Passing on and copying of this document. All rights reserved. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. In the MSPRing 2 Fiber configuration. the 1-8 working channels are inserted into the 9-16 protection channels in the opposite side of the failure event as shown in figure below.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 326/388 .19.5. Clicking on the Prot. Protection states and commands "Idle" status (2F) The working/protection span state boxes are not available (grey) for the 2Fibwer MS-SPRing architecture. 3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 327/388 . Passing on and copying of this document. Term "Span" identifies the section interested by the command. Ring Protection (2F) 19.All rights reserved. Manual. WTR. Manual. Each lockout command is applicable on different points where the lockout actions has to be performed and any "Lockout" command is associated to a "Release" command to come back to the previous status. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Force. Figure 264. The lockout commands disable the MS-SPRing management. Lockout commands (2F) ED 01 SC.2 External commands (2F) The external protection commands are: Lockout. four operative. it doesn't assume the Span meaning of the four-fiber protection. The lockout section present six lockout commands.5. Exercise (not operative in current release). Figure 263. (Protection not disable ). the ring protection is served ( protection non disable ) ED 01 SC. A node is defined tail-end when it firstly receives the "Event". while if the node is head-end. The "Events" will be signaled if the K1/K2 protocol communicates to the network nodes what has happened. signal degrade or external command or a combination of them. The "Events" will be served if some actions (B/S=bridges and switches) are executed and the network has been updated. the ring protection is served if this ring failure occurred the same section. Passing on and copying of this document.) All rights reserved. Figure 266.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 328/388 . A single ring failure is completely restored but not two ring failures. Protection and working channels where the lockout command can be activated (2F) The protection events can be equipment/signal failure.Figure 265. On the contrary. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Some network protection mechanisms are accepted or rejected depending on the type (tail/head) (lockout command. the second node is defined head-end when it receives back the protocol answer. without execute actions. Tail-end / Head-end association If the node is tail end. with the lockout working ring command failure and a ring failure along a different section. it serves the request node protection. Figure below shows the association of tail end / tail end or head-end / tail end. When are present multiple ring failures the automatic B/S protection will try to maintain on all the possible connections. The K1/K2 communication protocol MS-SPRing is generated from the two nodes adjacent to "Event" via the protection communication channels. With the lockout protection span command and a ring failure. the lockout working ring/span commands disable the protection MS-SPRing mechanisms. the ring protection is disable if this ring failure has occurred in another ring section. Tail-end / head-end protection with a lockout working and a one direction failure (2F) 3AL 98104 ADAA 329/388 . Passing on and copying of this document. ED 01 SC.All rights reserved.3: NE MANAGEMENT Figure 267. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Ring protection with a lockout and a ring failure (2F) Figure below shows a ring with three nodes and the actions performed by the lockout commands. This command disables the acknowledgment of the signal failure/degrade on the aggregate ports. ED 01 SC.All rights reserved. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Passing on and copying of this document. Figure 268.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 330/388 . Lockout command and non-served failures (2F) The Force command executes a forced protection. Figure 269.All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document. Forced and Manual Commands (2F) ED 01 SC. The Force Ring command substitutes the working channels (AU4 1 to 8) with the opposite direction protection channels (AU4 9 to 16) between two adjacent nodes. The Force Span command is not operative in " fiber MS-SPring.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 331/388 . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Figure 270. In this condition the ring can be split according the location of command and event. Figure 271.lockout protection span. When a force ring command is applied a next working failure is not able to modify the forced configuration applied. Figure below visualizes the ring protection with a Force/Manual command and a signal failure. That is because force ring command has a higher priority respect to the "Automatic" working protection. Vice versa the "Manual" protection is exceeded by the "Automatic" protection. The general priority scale that can be applied to solve antithetical situations starting from the lowest priority level is: manual ring .lockout working ring . ED 01 SC. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Passing on and copying of this document. Manual and Force Span/Ring command (2F) The Manual command is similar to Force command but it is at a lower priority level with respect to automatic MS-SPRing.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 332/388 .All rights reserved. SF-R is for "Signal Failure Request".automatic working ring force ring . FSR is for "Force Switching Request". use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Passing on and copying of this document. Ring Protection with Force and Manual commands (2F) 3AL 98104 ADAA 333/388 . ED 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT Figure 272.All rights reserved. If the WTR box. in the Local Condition field of Figure (Protection states and commands "Idle" status (2F)). A confirmation dialog box opens and. From each command exists its own Release button to cancel the previously selected command and come back to normal MS-SPRing protection. A dialog box has to be confirmed before the command is performed.All rights reserved. Figure 274.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 334/388 . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Automatic protection Bridge/Switch (2F) Each command starts when the proper button is selected. Clear WTR command (2F) 19.3 2F MS-SPRing dual protection commands In general dual contemporary "Events" can be: Two external commands An external command and a ring/span failure Two contemporary ring/span failures ED 01 SC. Passing on and copying of this document. becomes red a waiting time has been activated after repairing the ring failure. Figure 275. can be cleared selecting the Clear WTR Ring command. if the operator clicks OK. Example of confirmation dia log box Clicking on the WTR command next figure opens. set in the configuration menu. Figure 273. the WTR box turns off and the protection status window is updated.5. The waiting time. Passing on and copying of this document. the different node can be an adjacent node (AN) or a remote node (RN).Dual "Events" can appear on the same side W/W (West/West) or E/E (East/East)(SS= same side) or on the opposite side W/E or E/W (OS= opposite site) of the ring network. In the SS or OS the "Events" can appear on the same node (SN) or on the different nodes (DN).3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 335/388 . Figure below depicts a clockwise ring network. The automatic protection for dual ring failure is below. Ring network reference scheme (2F) Figure up visualizes the ring reference scheme: the adjacent node (AN) is the node connected to the reference point. Force switch) is neither served nor signaled that is erased (it is not pending at the node) Figure 276. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. ED 01 SC. The network propagation K1-K2 protocol signals are according to the following legend: C R All rights reserved. Consider the network reference scheme with a tail end / head-end alarm propagation. In this figure are depicted the node switches for any reported double events. = served the column element = served the row element = served both row and column elements = signaled (no served) the column element = signaled (not served) the row element = signaled (not served) both row and column elements B Cs Rs Bs When a command (Manual switch. Examples of Double ring failure 3AL 98104 ADAA 336/388 . Passing on and copying of this document.All rights reserved.3: NE MANAGEMENT Figure 277. ED 01 SC. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Lockout protection SS-AN/OS-SN overrides the Manual or Automatic or Force command because the lockout protection controls the switching channels of the same Node. Two Lockout commands are both always served: B Force command has priority with respect to the Manual one. Two manual ring commands can be only signaled: Bs (Manual SS-SN and OS-AN commands give the same ring protection switching and then both can be served).SN has priority with respect to Manual or Automatic protection and Force commands. The behavior is that seen for two automatic protection switching.All rights reserved. Figure 278. In the other cases. Force Ring and Automatic Protection (or two Force ring commands) are always served if they are not applied on the SS-SN. For each of them the associated "Events" is listed on the first column at the left of the table.AN channels are not managed by the lockout protection: B. Passing on and copying of this document. Lockout protection SS-RN/OS-RN and manual or automatic or force command. Automatic protection (tail/head) for double ring failure visualization Schemas are applied to describe dual generic "Events" where both ring failures and external commands are considered. because it has a higher priority. Lockout protection SS. In this last case has to be considered the priority level. both commands are served (B). the ring protection will be only signaled (pending) ED 01 SC. Automatic protection has priority with respect to the Manual command. Lockout working SS.SN/OS-AN and Manual or Automatic or Force command are both served because the switching SS. The first row at the top of the protection table shows the "Events" at the reference pint. the lockout protection preve nts the working 1-8 channels from being inserted into protecting 9-16 ones. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. The lockout protection is served.SN/OS.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 337/388 . 2 .5. No Request condition . . Any protection status window is divided in different status fields: Schema description and status.Yellow: ordered but not executed command (that has only been signaled = pending status) .4 2F Protection Status Visualization The protection statuses ring networks are: .4 .5 .Manual Switching . Tail / head dual "Events" Protection table (2F) 19. .Automatic Switching (MS-SPRing protection for equipment/signal failure). Passing on and copying of this document.Lockout Switching .3 .All rights reserved. The signaled "Events" (the k1/k2 protocol communicates to the network nodes what has happened) are pending B/S visualized as yellow box indications.Green: Active State. Automatic switching and external commands are revertive: then when the "Events" have been cleared.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 338/388 . ED 01 SC. The served "Events" (B/S=bridges and switches are executed and the network has been updated) are completed B/S actions visualized as red box indications.1 . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. The state boxes visualize the "Node Condition Request" as a consequence of the equipment/signal failure or the external commands detected on the corresponding side ("Event"). Figure below shows the protection status with a served East manual ring command. Figure 279. Local Conditions.Red: Inactive State and any external or protection executed command (that has been served). The state boxes don't describe the protection actions provided on the NEs. the MS-SPRing configuration comes back to its status.Forced Switching .Grey: not available state box.Idle (regular operation without MS-SPRing protection) These protection states are represented with the following color state boxes: . Middle and East. ED 01 SC. Unavailable" indications are activated when a lockout protection command is applied in a network node.All rights reserved. A regular protocol "Exceptions" is represented with white boxes. a protocol alarm is signaled with red boxes. In the middle "WTR-Ring" refers to West and East sides. the third the "Events" result on the nodes and the fourth one checks the k1/k2 ring protocol. The Manual Ring command visualizes "Manual Ring" on the local node and "Request Node Ring" in the both "Local Conditions adjacent East ADM1-West ADM2 nodes. The red color means that the command has been served. On the West there are all the box indications corresponding to the West protections and commands. "No Request" corresponding to "Idle Status". The "Prot. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Node Conditions and Protocol Exceptions. The first one describes the ne twork configuration and application type and its status. Passing on and copying of this document. the second gives the local external commands indications. The window is divided into three parts: West. and "Intermediate Node" denotes that the protections and commands don't concern the node involved.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 339/388 . while the 3 and 4 nodes are "Intermediate Node". Figure below shows the lockout statuses and Figure below the automatic protection statuses. B. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. ED 01 SC.All rights reserved. Manual command applied at the "Reference Point" ring network Figure below reports the "Protection Status" for external "Force and Manual" commands in a 3 node ring (A.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 340/388 . Figure 280. Passing on and copying of this document. C). ED Figure 281. Visualization of the Forced / Manual protection Statuses (2F) 01 SC. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 341/388 .All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document. 3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 342/388 .All rights reserved. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Visualization of the Lockout command Statuses (2F) 01 SC. Passing on and copying of this document. ED Figure 282. Figure 283. The "WTR Clear" command can be executed by the user without waiting the WTR setting time.5. The considered network failures are related to a tail.end/head-end node connection.4. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 343/388 . Passing on and copying of this document. All rights reserved.1 Double ring failure The double ring failure visualization of Figures (Example of Double ring failure) are here following reported. ED 01 SC. Visualization of Automatic Protection Statuses (2F) The WTR status is visualized on the side where the link has been repaired. 19. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Protection status with double ring failure (reference point -SS-AN) Figure up reports the protection status with double ring failure (reference point-SS-AN).All rights reserved. the nodes 2-3 in switching and the node 4 intermediate. The node 2 isolated. Figure 284. The box color is white unless otherwise specified: "Active” : green "Request Node Ring" West ADM3-East ADM1: red (served) "Request Node Ring" West ADM2-East ADM2: yellow (pending) ED 01 SC. Passing on and copying of this document.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 344/388 . 4 are being switched for signal failure alarm and both the two signal failures are served. Protection status with double ring failure (reference point-SS-RN) Figure up reports the protection status with double ring failure (reference point-SS-RN). The box color is white unless otherwise specified: "Active” : green ED 01 SC."Intermediate Node" ADM4: red All rights reserved.2. Passing on and copying of this document. The nodes 1.3. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 345/388 . Figure 285. Figure 286. The box color is white unless otherwise specified: ED 01 SC. Protection status with double ring failure (reference point-OS-AN) Figure up reports the protection status with double ring failure (reference point-OS-AN).2 are being switched for signal failure alarm and both signal failures are served: B. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 346/388 . Passing on and copying of this document."Request Node Ring" East ADM3-Eas ADM1: red (switching for SF) "Request Node Ring" East ADM4-East ADM2: red (switching of the opposite nodes) All rights reserved. The nodes 1. "Active” : green "Request Node Ring" West ADM2-East ADM1: red (switching for SF) "Intermediate Node" ADM3-ADM4: red All rights reserved. Figure 287. Protection status with double ring failure (reference point-OS-AN) recovering to "idle" ED 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 347/388 . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Passing on and copying of this document. Passing on and copying of this document. ED 01 SC.Figure up reports the previous protection status with double ring failure (reference point-OS-AN) while the ring protection comes back to its "idle" status.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 348/388 . The "WTR (Wait To Restore) Ring" on ADM1 node becomes red to signal that the SF disappears at the "reference point". use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. The box color is white unless otherwise specified: "Active” : green "WTR Ring” : red (to signal the SF recovering) "Request Node Ring" West ADM2-East ADM1: red "Intermediate Node" ADM3-ADM4: red All rights reserved. The box color is white unless otherwise specified. Double manual ring command (reference point-SS-AN) Figure up report the protection status with double manual command (reference point-SS-AN).2. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. The "Request ring" to 1. Figure 288.4.19. "Active": green ED 01 SC. Passing on and copying of this document. Both the commands can be only pending.3 nodes becomes pending while the 4 node is "Intermediate node".5.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 349/388 .2 Double external command or an external command and a ring failure All rights reserved. Figure 289."Request Node Ring" East ADM1-West ADM2: yellow (pending) for Manual Ring East ADM1 "Request Node Ring" East ADM2-West ADM3: yellow (pending) for Manual Ring East ADM2 "Request Node Ring" West ADM1-East ADM3: yellow (pending) for switching of the opposite nodes "Intermediate Node" ADM4: red All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 350/388 . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Double manual ring command (reference point-OS-AN) ED 01 SC. The "Request Manual ring" to ADM1 (East) and to ADM2 opposite side (West) collapses in the same manual command.Figure up reports the protection status with double manual command (reference point-OS-AN). ED 01 SC. Both the commands can be served. Both the manual commands are served. Passing on and copying of this document. The box color is white unless otherwise specified: "Active” : green "Request Node Ring" East ADM1-West ADM2: red (served) "Intermediate Node" ADM3. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. ADM4: red All rights reserved.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 351/388 . Manual ring and Lockout Protection (reference point-SS-SN) Figure up reports the protection status with a manual command and a lockout protection (reference point-SS-SN). Both the commands are served because the bridge/switch points are different. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 352/388 .B. The "Prot. Unavailable" is not propagated on West ADM2 node because on West ADM2 the protection switching has been executed. Both the manual and the lockout commands are visualized to the same ADM1 node (East). The box color is white unless otherwis e specified: "Active” : green "Request Node Ring" East ADM1 . N. Passing on and copying of this document.All rights reserved." commands East ADM1: red "Prot.West ADM2: red (served) "Intermediate Node" ADM3. Unavailable" East ADM1: red. Figure 290. ADM4: red "Manual Ring and Lockout Prot. ED 01 SC. Figure 291.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 353/388 . The manual command is pending while the lockout command is served.All rights reserved. The box color is white unless otherwise specified: "Active” : green "Manual Ring" commands East ADM1: yellow Request Node Ring" East ADM1 . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Passing on and copying of this document.West ADM2: yellow (pending) ED 01 SC. Manual ring and Lockout Protection (reference point-SS-RN) Figure up reports the protection status with a manual command and a lockout protection (reference point-SS-RN). 3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 354/388 . Unavailable" East ADM3 and West ADM4: red (served) All rights reserved. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization." command: East ADM3: red "Prot. Automatic working ring and Manual Ring (reference point-OS-AN) ED 01 SC."Request Node Ring" West ADM1 .East ADM2: yellow (pending) for switching of the opposite nodes "Lockout Prot. Figure 292. Passing on and copying of this document. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. ED 01 SC. The box color is white unless otherwise specified: "Active” : green "Request Node Ring" East ADM1-West ADM2: red (served) "Intermediate Node" ADM3-ADM4: red All rights reserved.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 355/388 . The automatic protection has a higher priority with respect to the manual command and then it has been served.Figure up reports the protection status with a ring failure and a manual ring command (reference point-OS-AN). Passing on and copying of this document. The box color is white unless otherwise specified: "Active” : green "Request Node Ring" East ADM1: red (served) the West ADM1 switching is applied for SF "Request Node Ring" West ADM3: red (served) the East ADM3 switching is applied for the force command "Request Node Ring" West ADM2.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 356/388 . Passing on and copying of this document.Figure 293. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. East ADM2: yellow (pending) the ADM2 is isolated "Intermediate Node" ADM4: red All rights reserved. Automatic working ring and Force Ring (reference point-SS-AN) Figure up reports the protection status with a ring failure and a force ring command (reference point-SS-AN) The ADM2 is isolated and the force command is pending. ED 01 SC. The box color is white unless otherwise specified: "Active” : green "Lockout Ring" commands East ADM1: red ED 01 SC. Passing on and copying of this document. The lockout command has a higher with respect to the automatic protection switching and then only the lockout command has been served.All rights reserved. Figure 294. Automatic working ring and Lockout working Ring (reference point-SS-SN) Figure up reports the protection status with a ring failure and a lockout working command (reference point-SS-SN). use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 357/388 . The box color is white unless otherwise specified: "Active": green ED 01 SC."Request Node Ring" East ADM1 .3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 358/388 .ADM4: red All rights reserved. Figure 295. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.West ADM2: red (served) "Intermediate Node" ADM3 . Automatic working ring and Lockout Protection (reference point-OS-RN) The lockout protection has a higher priority with respect to the automatic ring protection. Passing on and copying of this document. "Lockout Prot." commands West ADM3: red "Prot. Unavailable" West ADM3 . Passing on and copying of this document.West ADM2: yellow (automatic protection is pending) "Intermediate Node" ADM4: red All rights reserved.East ADM2: red (lockout protections served) "Request Node Ring" East ADM1 . ED 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 359/388 . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. 1 ATM boards On the ATM 4X4 board can be configured up to 16 TPs (VC4 TTP. e) ATM/PR_EA/Ethernet traffic configuration with “ Specific Terminal”application 20. VC12XV. VC12 TTP. VC4– 4c TTP. delete and modify ATM/IP/ETH TTPs. All rights reserved. VC3 TTP. VC3 TTP. PNNI configuration etc. s31 TTP. VC12 TTP.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 360/388 .2 where all the operation are explained. s31 TTP. 20. Select ISA/IP/ETH Configuration option from the Configuration menu to open the ATM/PR_EA/Ethernet ports Configuration. E1 TTP) d) TTPs cross– connection. s31 TTP. as a matter of fact ATM/PR_EA/Ethernet boards does not crate TTPs when they are configured.2 Gbit/s. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. The ATM/Ethernet/PR_EA board creation is performed when CT users sets an ATM/PR_EA/Ethernet board and then configure the IP Address. ED 01 SC.1 Introduction This Chapter describes the operations necessary for the ATM/PR_EA/Ethernet boards creation in the Equipment view and the ATM/PR_EA/Ethernet TTPs creation. The operational sequence to follow to manage ATM/PR_EA/Ethernet cross– connection is: a) ATM/PR_EA/Ethernet board declaration (Equipment Set) b) ATM/PR_EA/Ethernet IP Address Configuratio n (Called ISA board IP Address) c) ATM/PR_EA/Ethernet board TTPs creation (VC4XV.20 ISA/IP/ETH CONFIGURATION 20. VC12 TTP. On the ATM 8X8 board (present only on 1660SM) can be configured up to 32 TPs (VC4– 4c TTP.) refers to the relevant OPERATOR’ S HANDBOOK (ATM or PR_EA) where “ Specific Terminal”application is explained in details. For the TTPs creation refer to paragraph 20. E1TTP) with a maximum throughput of 622 Mbit/s. Passing on and copying of this document.2 ATM/PR_EA/Ethernet board TTPs creation In this paragraph will be explained how to create. For the ATM/PR_EA/Ethernet traffic configuration (for example creation of Hard/Soft cross connection. VC3 TTP. VC4 TTP.2. VC4 TTP. E1 TTP) with a maximum throughput of 1. VC3XV. ATM 4X4 MATRIX (initial empty fields) 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 361/388 . ED Figure 296.All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Figure 297. ATM 4X4 MATRIX (with defined TPs) The ATM/IP/Ethernet ports Configuration window is filled with notebook pages (initially blank), each page is an ATM, Ethernet or PR_EA board with relevant ports; The user can “ create”a new port, “ delete”an existing one and “ change”port associations (that means modify the STM1 number and STM– 1 Time Slot on ATM/IP/Ethernet ports already created) via the three buttons contained in the notebook page. When the users want to create a new ATM port he can select an empty row, then in the “Selected Item”sections, he can fill the field ”Signal”choosing among the available options and push the” Create ”button. The STM1 Number and the STM1 Time Slot are automatically assigned. If the users want to change the port attribute association he can select a filled row, then in the “Selected Item”section he can change the fields ”STM1 number”and ”STM1 Time Slot”and than push the ” Time Slot Sw.”button. To delete a port the user can select a row and push ” Delete ”button. To close the dialog box click on the “Close” push button. It is possible to see the ATM Ports created as above explained by selecting the relevant row in the ATM/IP/Ethernet configuration window and then click on the “ Navigate”button. ED 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 362/388 All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Figure 298. Navigate to ATM port view (example) 20.2.2 PR_EA boards On the PR_EA boards can be configured the following TPs: –PREA4ETH: up to 59 TPs (SDH VC4, SDH VC3, SDH VC12) with a maximum throughput of 622 Mbit/s. –PREA1GBE: up to 62 TPs (SDH VC4, SDH VC3, SDH VC12) with a maximum throughput of 622 Mbit/s. Select ISA/IP/ETH Configuration option from the Configuration menu to open the ATM/PR_EA/Ethernet ports Configuration. ED 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 363/388 All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. ED Figure 299. PR_EA MATRIX (initial empty fields) 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 364/388 All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Figure 300. PR_EA MATRIX (with defined TPs) The ATM/IP/Ethernet ports Configuration window is filled with notebook pages (initially blank), each page is an ATM, Ethernet or PR_EA board with relevant ports; The user can “ create”a new port, “ delete”an existing one and “ change”port associations (that means modify the STM1 number and STM– 1 Time Slot on ATM/IP/Ethernet ports already created) via the three buttons contained in the notebook page. When the users want to create a new PR_EA port he can select an empty row, then in the “Selected Item”sections, he can fill the field ” Signa l”choosing among the available options and push the “ Create ”button. The STM1 Number and the STM1 Time Slot are automatically assigned. If the users want to change the port attribute association he can select a filled row, then in the “Selected Item”section he can change the fields ”STM1 number”and ”STM1 Time Slot”and than push the ” Time Slot Sw.”button. To delete a port the user can select a row and push ” Delete”button. To close the dialog box click on the “Close” push button. It is possible to see the PR_EA Ports created as above explained by selecting the relevant row in the ATM/IP/Ethernet configuration window and then click on the “ Navigate”button. ED 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 365/388 All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Figure 301. MPLS port view example 20.2.3 10/100 Mbit/s fast ETHERNET board On the FAST ETHERNET boards can be configured up to 11 TPs (VC4 TTP, VC3 TTP, VC12 TTP, C12XV and VC3XV) on the port card (ETH– MB) and up 14 TPs (VC4 TTP, VC3 TTP, VC12 TTP, VC12XV and VC3XV) on the relevant access card (ETH– ATX). Select ISA/IP/ETH Configuration option from the Configuration menu to open the ATM/PR_EA/Ethernet ports Configuration. ED 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 366/388 All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. ED Figure 302. ETH– MB (initial empty fieds) 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 367/388 All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Figure 303. ETH– MB (with defined TPs) The ATM/IP/Ethernet ports Configuration window is filled with notebook pages (initially blank), each page is an ATM, Ethernet or PR_EA board with relevant ports; The user can “ create”a new port, “ delete”an existing one and “ change”port associations (that means modify the STM1 number and STM– 1 Time Slot on ATM/IP/Ethernet ports already created) via the three buttons contained in the notebook page. When the user want to create a new TPs he can select an empty row, then in the “Selected Item” sections, he can fill the field ” Signa l”choosing among the available options and push the”Create ” button. Note: in case of concatenated VC TP creation (example VC12XV or VC3XV), before to push on ”Create”button it is also necessary to choose the Concatenation Level value; after creation command new fields and a new button appear. The STM1 Number and the STM1 Time Slot are automatically assigned. If the user want to change the port attribute association he can select a filled row, then in the “Selected Item”section he can change the fields ”STM1 number”and ”STM1 Time Slot”and than push the ” Time Slot Sw.”button. The Ctrl Path Act. button allows to change the state of the concatenated virtual VCs (example VC12XV or VC3XV) that could be “ Idle”or “ active” .; Click on Ctrl Path Act. button a new ED 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 368/388 window will be opened. To delete a port the user can select a row and push ” Delete ”button. To close the dialog box click on the “Close” push button. All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Figure 304. Control Path activation window (example) It is possible to see the VCs created on the ETHERNET board as above explained by selecting the relevant row in the ATM/IP/Ethernet configuration window and then click on the “ Navigate” button. ED 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 369/388 All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Figure 305. ETHERNET port view example 20.2.4 Gigabit/s ETHERNET board Three architectures are possible to provide Gigabit Ethernet ports: [1] 10/100Mbit/s Ethernet board (ETH– MB)+GBIT Access (GETH– AG). With this architecture can be configured up to 2 TPs (VC4XV TTP Type concatenation level=1) on the GETH– AG access card and up to 11 TPs (VC4 TTP, VC3 TTP, VC12 TTP, s31 TTP, E1 TTP Type) on the ETH– MB main board taking into account that the maximum throughput must not exceed 622 Mbit/s. ED 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 370/388 All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. [2] GIGABIT board (GETHMB) stand– alone. With this architecture can be configured up to 4 TPs (VC4XV Type) on each board taking into account that the maximum throughput must not exceed 622 Mbit/s (for example it is possible to configure 1 port VC4XV with a max. concatenation level equal to 4 or as alternative 4 ports VC4XV with concatenation level equal to 1). The same rules above described are applicable to 1662SMC when the GIGABIT board (GETHMB) is equipped in normal slot (i.e. slot with a throughput of 622 Mbit/s). In 1662SMC are also available slot called “ enhanced” (25, 26,28,29,34,35,37,38) where the throughput per board is 1.2 Gbit/s. If the GIGABIT board (GETHMB) is equipped in one of these slots it is possible to reach a max concatenation level equal to 7 per port. Of course this means that there is only one VC4XV with concatenation level =1 available for another port and no resources for the last two ports present on the board. For more details read the Gigabit Ethernet description reported in the Technical Handbook. [3] GIGABIT board (GETH– MB) + GBIT Access (GETH– AG). With this architecture can be configured up to 4 TPs (VC4XV Type) on the GETH– AG access card and up to 4 TPs (VC4XV TTP Type) on the GETH– MB main board taking into account that the maximum throughput for the “ couple”must not exceed 1.2 Gbit/s.; the concatenation level per port can be from 1 to 7. In order to support this architecture the GETH– MB board must be equipped in the “ enhanced”slot (25,26,28,29,34,35,37,38) and GETH– AG access in the associated slot (respectively 3,4,6,7,15,16,18,19). The Gigabit Ethernet TPs creation follows the same rules described for the 10/100Mbit/s Ethernet Board. 20.2.5 ES1-8FE boards The Alcatel Reference ISA-ES NE can integrate: · Local Ethernet Interface __ 8 local Ethernet 10/100 BaseT interface; · Remote Ethernet interface __ Remote Ethernet 10/100 interface mapped into a single VC12, VC3, VC4, VC12 nv[n=1..63], VC3-nv [n=1.3]; __ Remote Gigabit Ethernet interface mapped into a SDH VC4. ED 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 371/388 All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. ED Figure 306. ES1-8FE MATRIX (initial empty fields) 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 372/388 All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. ED Figure 307. ES1-8FE MATRIX (with defined TPs) 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 373/388 All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. ED 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT Figure 308. Navigate to ETH port view (example) 3AL 98104 ADAA 374/388 21 Software Management 21.1 Generalities and descriptions The Craft Terminal provides a set of functions, which allow software packages manipulatio n within NEs. The downloading operation consists in the establishment of session between the NE and a software server for the purpose of file transfer. Actions can then be performed on the NE software version as update and activation operation, or roll back to the previous software version operation. In this way the NE can follow the product evolution with "in service" equipment. The same function is used during maintenance phase, to update spare boards for substitution after troubleshooting. The operations that can be undertaken in this section are: • • • All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Display Software Download Information, Initiate / Abort Software Package Download, Manage Software Packages within NEs, activating the downloaded Software Package or coming back to the previous condition. A backup/restore can be also done on the MIB of the NE. Indeed the MIB can be saved to or restored from the mass storage of the Craft Terminal. The software download general principle is represented in the following figure. Figure 309. Software Download general principle 21.1.1 Naming Conventions The naming conventions used for Download Management are the following: ED 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 375/388 • Software Package: Software Package stands for a piece of software, which can be executed by an NE of a particular type. It consists in one or more Software Units and a Descriptor File. A software package is identified by its name, release, version and edition. On the NE (i.e. once downloaded) a software package can be: - The active version: the software package currently running on the NE - A standby version: a software package, which is neither the active version nor the boot version • All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. • • Software Unit: A Software Unit is a part of a software package, which can be either executable code, or a data segment of a particular board within an NE. A software unit is also identified by its name, release, version and edition. Descriptor File: A Descriptor File contains information about the software package it belongs to and lists the composing software units. Each software package must have a descriptor file otherwise it would not be possible to interpret the content of the package. Software Management Function: The Software management function offers information about all current software packages present in an NE. Indicators enable software management (running package, activated package, etc...). The following software version states are available: • • Commit (active) version: the software version currently running on the NE. Standby version: is a software version which has been downloaded on the NE but which is not in the active state. Two main functions are involved in the software downloading: - Software Download Manager function - Software Download Server function The Software Download Manager function takes the downloading and management requests of the operator and sends them to the NE. Thus, this function enables a download process to be initiated and monitored by the operator. It manages the NE software releases and initiates software download operations. The Software Download Server is only responsible for fulfilling the requests received from NEs and performing software package file transfer operations to the NE. 21.2 Software download operative sequence Two main different operative condition are defined for this Equipment: First installation of a 1662SMC The NE is received without the relevant software install. The software download must be done As described in the SIBDL section of this Handbook. Updating a 1662SMC with already installed software. Follow the operative indic ations. 21.2.1 Software Download upgrade N.B. In order to migrate from Release 1.1A to a Higher Release, the download procedure requires Two steps. The first is from 1.1A to 1.1X (intermediate package) and the second is from 1.1X To the Higher Release (e.g. 1.1B1). In order to update the following procedure is to be done as explained in the next steps: a) Install the CD ROM with the NE Software Package on the PC. ED 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 376/388 b) Open a session on Craft Terminal application (start-up of the application, start supervision and NE login) c) Check the present status of the software on a selected NE. Download should not be performed in presence of unstable alarms d) Open the Download menu. e) Select the new software package in the server and triggers the download process, A message will indicate the completed download. f) Activate the package as presented at para.20.5 on page 333. g) Check that the activated package is in the “ Commit”status. h) If problems are found with the new activated package, activate the previous software package (Revert--back operation) to come back to the previous condition and then try to repeat the procedure. 21.2.2 NE Software package installation procedure The following procedure allows the NE software package installation. According to the customer Requirement two types of installation are possible: [1] If only SDH software package installation is required follow the instruction from point a) to point e) and than download the software package SDH (example 662SMC 2.1B.09) from the EML— USM (refer to paragraph 20.4 for details). [2] If SDH+” Specific Software”package installation is required follow the instruction from point a ) to point o ). In the example that follows will be described the ATM specific software installation; following the same rule will be possible to install also the IP specific software. Procedure a) Install from CD ROM the NE Software Package on the Personal Computer, as explained in the “ 1320CT Basic Operator Handbook” . b) Run the 1320CT V.x platform c) From Network Element Synthesis (NES) choose the Software Administration option of the Supervision --> File Administration menu. All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. ED 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 377/388 Figure 310. Software Administration menu After the selection Figure below. Will be opened. All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Figure 311. Software Package Administration view d) Select the <SDH/WDM> tag e) Press the <INSTALL> button to install the relevant software package In the window that opens select the directory where the NE software package file has been installed (Typically is Alcatel/usm/ect/swdw/<equipment name>/<version>/<descriptor file>) and execute. ED 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 378/388 All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Figure 312. SDH software package installation f) Insert the ATM CD ROM in the computer g) Select the <SERV. SPEC. > tag h) Press the <INSTALL> button to install the ATM software package present on the ATM CD ROM In the window that opens select the directory where the ATM software package file has been installed (typically is /ect/swdw/<atm>/<version>/<descriptor file>) and execute. ED 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 379/388 use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. ED 01 SC. Figure 313.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 380/388 .All rights reserved. ATM software package installation (example) i) Select the <SDH/WDM> tag j) Select the SDH software package base onto which ATM software package has to be merged k) Press < Create Enhanced> to launch the software merging process and create the SDH+ATM Software package The New Software package will be created. Passing on and copying of this document. Passing on and copying of this document.All rights reserved.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 381/388 . OMSN enhanced software package creation (part A) 01 SC. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. ED Figure 314. Passing on and copying of this document.xy.Figure 315. 3.wz will be created the OMSN SWP 662SMCE ver. Enhanced software package (SDH + ATM) It is now possible to download the enhanced software package (SDH + ATM) from the EML-USM (Refer to paragraph 20. OMSN enhanced software package creation (part B) The originated “ Enhanced”software package has a new label as follows: OMSN name = is the SDH name + “ E”letter OMSN version = is the SDH version Example: Starting from SDH SWP 662SMC ver. m) Select the previously created software package (example 662SMCE 3. Figure 316. 21. 3.01.1.4 for details).xy.07) o) Press the <ADD> button All rights reserved.wz l) Select the <OMSN> tag.3 Software Download Manager menu ED 01 SC.08) n) Select the ATM software package (in the right view) (example ATM 1.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 382/388 . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. then select the Download pull down menu. All rights reserved. Equipment view To display the software download manager menu from the main view. Passing on and copying of this document. The following menu is displayed: ED 01 SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 383/388 . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. select the NE on which you want to perform download operations.All the software download operations are carried out from the software download manager. Figure 317. Package: name of the package. All rights reserved. Version: version number of package. Figure 319. Download menu 21. SW Downloading dialogue box example The following fields are available to search a specific package: • • Server filter: to enter the server name selected. To use the filter and display the selection. All these operations can be performed from the SW downloading dialogue box. The SW packages existing on the Craft Terminal are displayed. ED 01 SC. Click on Forced push button to set the forced download attribute: then all software units of the Descriptor file have to be downloaded. Otherwise only the units with different software version will be loaded. push on Apply filter(s) button. Select the Init download option from the Download cascading menu.4 Init download You can request the NE to start / abort a software download operation.Figure 318. Passing on and copying of this document.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 384/388 . In the next field the list of the packages is displayed: • • • Server : name of the server. Package filter: to enter the package name selected. After selecting the desired NE you must choose an available software package and then start the download process. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. The Software download initiate dialogue box is opened. You can monitor the download progress by means of the Software in Progress dialogue box. even if no download operations have been performed previously.If you want stop the download. click on the Cancel push button of the Software download initiate dialogue box to close it. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. From the confirmation dialogue box that opens you can confirm or cancel the abort. For this. From the confirmation dialogue box that opens. Passing on and copying of this document. you can confirm or cancel the download. Figure 320. The following dialogue box is opened. which is being downloaded. If you confirm the operation.5 SW package Activation and Units information This item permits to activate the downloaded software package and to get information about the software of the various units of the equipment.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 385/388 . the current percentage and the current file. select the Units info option from the Download pull down menu. Click on the OK push button to start the download. The operator is able to get information about the software package of the NE at any moment. Click on the Close push button to close the SWDL Work in Progress dialogue box at the end of the software download. Software download in progress (example) The Software download in Progress dialogue box displays the name and type of the NE and the SW package name. All rights reserved. the SW Downloading dialogue box then disappears and the Software download in Progress dialogue box is displayed from which you can if necessary abort the software download. the total of bytes. 21. which also enables you to possibly abort the current download. ED 01 SC. Click on the Abort push button to abort the complete download transaction. IP etc. Software Package Information dialogue box (example) The SW Information dialogue box displays the name and type of the NE.All rights reserved. Current state\Action: commit or stand-by and with the option button. Passing on and copying of this document.) Operational state: enabled or disabled. The following fields are displayed: • • • • • • Software package: name. Service Specific Components: name. none/Force/Activate/Delete Current state = standby means the package is not active on the NE Current state = commit means the package is active on the NE Action = (none) means no action to do Action = activate serves to activate the selected SW package ED 01 SC. You can select one software package by clicking on the name. version. version. release. Activation date: date and hour of the last activation Vendor : the supplier of the product.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 386/388 . edition of the Service Specific Components (example ATM. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Figure 321. and the respective package name and status of the committed and (if existing) the uncommitted software. edition of the package. release. Cancel push button you close the SW Information dialogue box.6 Mib management This function allows to make a backup and/or a restore of the Mib. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. When you click on Close the previous view is displayed In when you click on the: • • • OK push button you close dialogue box. Clicking on it. Figure 322. The following window is displayed: ED 01 SC. the following window is displayed: All rights reserved.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 387/388 . Passing on and copying of this document. Help push button you access to help on context. Detail software package (example) Clicking on [-] symbol behind each software package all details disappear.. Select the Mib management option from the Download pull down menu.Action = force (item not operative) Select the Activate option of the "Current State\Action" field. (MIB is a data base pertaining the configuration of the equipment). button allows giving more information about a selected software package. to activate the Software package The Sw units Det. 21. END OF DOCUMENT ED 01 SC. Delete: this action allows deleting a backup of the NE database. Passing on and copying of this document. Only at this point it becomes operative on the NE. NE MIB management The following fields are displayed: • • Available backups on local server : gives the list of the backups available on the Craft Terminal. Figure 323. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Backup name : to enter the new backup name. you click on Close push button. To save or load the Mib to/from an external disk follow the indication of the "Basic 1320CT Operator's Handbook" using the menu options of the Network Element Synthesis. Restore: this function allows the managing system to restore the NE configuration database of the managed system.3: NE MANAGEMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 388/388 . To exit of the NE MIB management window. Three push buttons allow choosing the action with click on: • • • Backup: performs the backup on the CT of the Mib present on the NE.All rights reserved. The NE is not involved in this action. Only one restore operation can be performed at the same time on a given NE. The only effect is to delete the selected backup version stored in a specific directory of the FT server. To activate an already restored MIB you click on Activate push button. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.Alcatel 1662SMC Rel2. Alcatel 1662SMC Rel2.1 NE Maintenance 01 ED 2004-04-21 DATE Creation CHANGE NOTE APPROVED BY Ma Jing PREPARED BY Distribution: Internal External √ ED 01 SC. Passing on and copying of this document.1 Operator Handbook All rights reserved.4 : NE MAINTENANCE 3AL 98104 ADAA 1/44 . .......... 33 6 UNIT REPLACEMENT WITH A SPARE ...........................................................4 TROUBLESHOOTING BY MEANS OF THE CRAFT TERMINAL.......... 5 2......................................5 Port View alarms ....................................................... L-42N ............................................................................... 28 5....................... 12 5............................................1 3.................. 38 IP MATRIX UNIT REPLACEMENT .....................4.3 COMPACT ADM UNIT REPLACEMENT................ 4 1......... 4 1.......... 8 5..... 8 5..LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES ......................................................... 31 5.............................3 ON SITE TROUBLESHOOTING....1 SCOPE ............................................................................2 TROUBLESHOOTING ORGANIZATION ...... 30 5...................................1 6.... 39 SYNTH SUBSTITUTION WITH SYNTHN ......... Passing on and copying of this document.......................................10 External Points alarms (Housekeeping) ........1 INTRODUCTION ...............................................................................................2 ED 01 SC............................................................................ 18 5.....................4...............8 Fans Subrack alarms view.................................................1 Document scope ......4.................................2 Alarms/states view Organization (subrack view) .............................. 2 3 4 5 MAINTENANCE INTRODUCTION ........................................... ...................................4 : NE MAINTENANCE 3AL 98104 ADAA 2/44 ................. 40 P4S1....................................4 Alarm Surveillance (AS).......................... 40 7. L-41................................ S-41N....................................................................1 Acronyms and abbreviations................................................................... L-41N.................. 44 7 UPGRADING WITH NEW HARDWARE.............2 Glossary of terms....................................................................................................4..9 Equipment View alarms............. L-42 SUBSTITUTION WITH P4S1N.............................................................................................2................................................................. S-41......... 4 1...........1 PURPOSE OF THE PROCEDURE .................................... 10 5.2 Target audience...................................................................................................2 6..................... 16 5............................................................... 6 PURPOSE OF THE PROCEDURE .................... 4 1......................................... 6 PROBLEMS WITH CRAFT TERMINAL ............... 25 5......................................................................................... 15 5...................2..............7 Subrack and Rack view alarms............................................................................ 4 1.........6 Board view alarms and states .....4..... 8 5................................... 4 All rights reserved...............3 Alarm synthesis indication ............................................4.............................................................................2 TERMINOLOGY ...........................................................1.....................................................................................1 4.................................................4................................................................... 34 ATM MATRIX 4X4 UNIT REPLACEMENT ...... 5 INTRODUCTION ..........................................................................1............................ use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.................4...4.....................................................................................................................................1 Preliminary Concepts and Definitions................................... 7 CORRECTIVE MAINTENAN CE (TROUBLESHOOTING) ....... 22 5..................... 3 1 INTRODUCTION............... 34 6.... 4 1............1 7..................4............................................................................................... 13 5.......................... 7 MAINTENANCE OF THE PC........................................................................................................................................... ............... 20 Table 6............. 38 Figure 20...... 29 Figure 13...................................................... 33 Figure 17............... Alarms colors and Severity association......................................... 17 Table 5............................................. 30 Figure 14................................. 27 Figure 11........... Upgrading with a new SYNTHN EPS protected .................................................. General aspect of alarms meaning and relevant maintenance actions ............................... Example of Ethernet Port View alarms ................................. Example of Equipment View alarms and status ................ 32 Figure 16....... Example of SDH Port View alarms (with MSP schema) ................................................................. 16 Table 2... 25 Figure 10................ Transmission network level structure........... COMPACT ADM unit replacement (EPS not protected) ... 41 Figure 22............................................................. Upgrading with a new SYNTHN EPS not protected ...... ................................................................................................................................................ 36 Figure 18...................................................................................................... 28 Figure 12........................ 19 Figure 7.......................... Alarm Synthesis indication..................................................... 16 Table 3...................................... 43 All rights reserved........................................... 17 Table 4................................................................. Management States Control Panel................ Fans subrack alarms view...................................................... 20 ED 01 SC........ General Flow-chart for on site troubleshooting......................... COMPACT ADM unit replacement (EPS protected) ... 39 Figure 21................................................................LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES FIGURES Figure 1......................................... 12 Figure 3................ Example of Rack view alarm and status ... 23 Figure 8.... Example of SDH Board View alarms and status ................... 31 Figure 15.............. Example of ATM Port View alarms............ Alarm Surveillance information general description................4 : NE MAINTENANCE 3AL 98104 ADAA 3/44 .... 11 Figure 2..... Alarms/status view Organization (subrack view).......................................... Domain Alarm Synthesis indication.................... 18 Figure 6........................................... ATM MATRIX 4X4 unit replacement without EPS protection ............. Example of Subrack view alarms and status ...................................... Example of PDH Board View alarms and status ............. TABLES Table 1.................................. 14 Figure 4............................. Example of External Points alarms and status ............................................................................................... 37 Figure 19.............................................................................................................................................................................................. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization............... Alarm Surveillance ............................... Passing on and copying of this document....... 24 Figure 9.................. Alarm pull down menu....... Power supply alarm ................... ATM MATRIX 4X4 unit replacement with EPS protection.............. 15 Figure 5............................................. 1 1. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. using the Craft Terminal (CT). The documents that should be read before starting this document are: --.Introduction manual 1.1 Document scope The aim of this document is to help the operator understand. 1. The different functionalities related to the equip ment views.2 Target audience This document is intended for the operators whose role is to manage the Network Elements.1. the menu items and the different actions that can be undertaken from these views are described in detail.1 Acronyms and abbreviations Refer to the Section Introduction manual. Passing on and copying of this document.2 Terminology 1. 1.1. 1.2.1 INTRODUCTION Scope All rights reserved.2 Glossary of terms Refer to the Section Introduction manual. configure and manipulate Network Elements (NEs) easily.4 : NE MAINTENANCE 3AL 98104 ADAA 4/44 .2.1320CT Basic Operator’ s Handbook The documents of this Handbook that should be read before starting this document are: --. ED 01 SC. 2 2. Maintenance of the PC. ED 01 SC.4 : NE MAINTENANCE 3AL 98104 ADAA 5/44 . Corrective Maintenance (Troubleshooting). Unit replacement with a spare. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.1 MAINTENANCE INTRODUCTION Introduction The maintenance procedures consist of the following steps: • • • • All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document. Problems with Craft terminal (shut-down and restart of the PC). Passing on and copying of this document. refer to the constructor's documentation.4 : NE MAINTENANCE 3AL 98104 ADAA 6/44 .3 3. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. All rights reserved.1 MAINTENANCE OF THE PC Introduction With regard to maintenance PC. ED 01 SC. ED 01 SC.4 4. This procedure describes the Shutdown and restarts the PC should the Craft Terminal Software Product not be working properly or not responding to the operator's commands. It permits to shut down the computer or restart it.4 : NE MAINTENANCE 3AL 98104 ADAA 7/44 . Passing on and copying of this document.1 Problems with Craft Terminal Purpose of the procedure All rights reserved. The same window is displayed pressing he keys <Ctrl> + <Alt> + <Del> simultaneously. In order to shut down the PC execute the command: start>shut down A window (Windows NT Security user dialog) is displayed. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. ) The following interfaces are present to troubleshoot the equipment: • • • • Q3 interface for Telecommunication Management Network F interface for Craft Terminal (Local or Remote) Remote Alarm for Supervisory Center LEDs on the units of the NE Usually maintenance is firstly done via software (TMN or Re mote Craft Terminal) to locate the faulty equipment and the faulty unit or the faulty path and then on site to physically solve the trouble. T NOT URGENT (MINOR): remote alarms pertaining to the urgent. Passing on and copying of this document. Anyway this method does not deal with the following aspects (which are to be deduced in other ways): • • Faulty electronic alarm indication. can remotely manage and troubleshooting a network composed of max 32 NEs included itself.4 : NE MAINTENANCE 3AL 98104 ADAA 8/44 . processing and detection circuits Faulty wiring (back-panel. Station supervisory center: the maintenance technician refers to the Remote Alarms received from the equip ment in a centralized office of the station i. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.1 Corrective Maintenance (troubleshooting) Purpose of the procedure Troubleshooting involves the detection.2 All rights reserved. 5. The Maintenance can be done: • • • • From a TMN network management center From a Remote Craft Terminal (RCT) management center From a station supervisory center On site TMN network management center: by means of the TMN the maintenance technician can see the alarms sent by each equipment of the managed network (see the relevant TMN handbooks).: • • • T URGENT (MAJOR and CRITICAL). TAND: remote alarms respectively due to the decrease or loss of one or both station power supply DC voltages.5 5. location and correction of failures in the equipment and the replacement of the defective parts. INT: Remote alarm pertaining to the local (internal) alarm type When a second CONGI unit is used the following remote alarms are added: ED 01 SC. etc. not urgent alarm type. connected to a local NE. Troubleshooting organization The troubleshooting procedure is carried out with the help of some flow-charts and tables.e. Remote craft terminal: the operator. reported hereinafter. connectors. TOR. This handbook is used. When red. The NE is provided with LEDs.4 : NE MAINTENANCE 3AL 98104 ADAA 9/44 . it is possible to locate the equipment in troubles and to detect the failure type and source. TANC: remote alarms respectively due to the loss of +3. in service unit Centralized Equipment Alarms : All the alarms detected on the units are collected by the COMPACT ADM unit which will deliver centralized optical indications (by means of LEDs on its front cover plate). after having located the alarmed equipment. which indicate: Units Alarms : Each port card or access card of the equipment is provided with a bicolor LED (green/red) on the front cover plate. from the top to the bottom: • • • • • Red LED: detection of an urgent (MAJOR and CRITICAL) alarm Red LED: detection of a not urgent (MINOR) alarm Yellow LED: alarm condition ATTENDED Yellow LED: detection of an ABNORMAL operative condition. Not operative. the alarm condition can be "attended" by pressing the relevant alarm storing push button on the COMPACT ADM unit. Passing on and copying of this document. This LED indicates: • • All rights reserved. Depending on the supervisory center organization. Not operative. laser forced ON or OFF. forcing the unit into service. This condition causes: • • On the rack o The YELLOW LED to light up o The RED LED to go off On the front cover plate: o Yellow LED (ATTENDED) to light up 01 ED SC. 3). try to restore after ALS Yellow LED: detection of an indication (WARNING) alarm The analysis of these LEDs permits to detect the alarm type (Urgent . IND: Indeterminate alarm synthesis. Attended).• • • • TORC. the alarmed equipment is checked by means of the local Craft Terminal and of rack LED indications and station buzzers. Indicates synthesis of alarms not associated to others severities. Type: active loopbacks.Not Urgent . 2). TUP: remote alarm due to microprocessor fault in the COMPACT ADM unit LOSQ2: remote alarm due to loss of communication with Mediation Device. On site: the operator is on site in case: 1) The equipment is not managed by a TMN or by a Remote Craft terminal (RCT) 2) The equipment is not reachable by the remote manager (TMN or RCT) and is therefore isolated 3) Link problems are present 4) The trouble has been located and a substitution is necessary In case 1). In case of urgent or not urgent alarm.Indication) and relevant condition (Abnormal condition. internal failure (indicates that the unit concerned must be replaced) When green. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.3V generated by the on board converter in of one or both the CONGI units. Specifically. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. and of the optical indicators (LEDs) present on the NE. 5.3 On site Troubleshooting The trouble-shooting operation proceeds according to the information indicated in the flow-charts: All rights reserved.: General flow-chart Figure 2. To correctly execute the troubleshooting operations the technician must know the exact equipment configuration (see Equipment Configuration applications on the Craft Terminal). the Attend command should be given twice: one for attending the NOT URGENT (MINOR) alarm and one for attending the URGENT (MAJOR) alarm. because the flashing condition might be due to external alarm causes usually related to line problems. Passing on and copying of this document.: Power supply alarm As indicated in the flow-charts the troubleshooting operation is done by means of the Craft Terminal. ED 01 SC.4 : NE MAINTENANCE 3AL 98104 ADAA 10/44 . • • Figure 1. The flow-charts/tables should be also consulted when the unit LEDs flash. The aim of the flow-charts which follow and of the ma intenance tables is to locate the faulty unit and to replace it with a spare as well as to locate a failure along the link. The Craft Terminal is cord-connected to the relative connector on the COMPACT ADM unit front cover plate (F interface). The Craft Terminal applications provide detailed information on the alarm state thus facilitating fault location and subsequent removal.o Red LEDs NOT URGENT (MINOR) and URGENT (MAJOR and CRITICAL) to turn off (free to accept other alarms) If both LEDs are on. All rights reserved. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. ED 01 SC. Passing on and copying of this document. General Flow-chart for on site troubleshooting 3AL 98104 ADAA 11/44 .4 : NE MAINTENANCE Figure 1. Figure 2. IF POWER SUPPLY IS PRESENT PROCEDE WITH OUTPUT “ NO” . The information on the NE alarm will be mainly obtained by means of the craft terminal through the Alarm Surveillance data and the alarms/status indications presented in the various views. 5. Navigation across the various level views is done from higher to lower levels. subsequently remove the station battery cable if necessary and then extract the CONGI unit.B.WARNING! Before removing CONGI unit from subrack. The troubleshoot proceeds checking the detailed information on the NE alarm by means of the craft terminal. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Passing on and copying of this document. ED 01 SC. Power supply alarm N. depending on the level of the structure under observation. by double clicking on the objects (see instructions on "NE management" section). All rights reserved.4 : NE MAINTENANCE 3AL 98104 ADAA 12/44 .4 Troubleshooting by means of the Craft Terminal. SHOULD IT HAVE FAILED THEN ALL THE UNIT’ S LEDS WILL BE OFF (FOLLOW OUTPUT “ YES”OF THE FLOW-CHART). switch-off the relevant Station Battery Fuse Breaker present at the top of the Rack or in the Station Distribution Frame. IF THE REMOTE ALARMS ARE NOT UTILIZED CHECK FOR PRESENCE OF STATION POWER SUPPLY. 4 describes this view. Describes the meaning of these alarms/statuses and the relevant maintenance actions. indicated in the tables) belong to this level (example: Line LOS.9. access the Alarm Surveillance to troubleshoot. Observe the active alarms on the Severity Alarm Synthesis. the paths too have specific functions associated to the EOW channels of the SDH frame.1. d) It is also possible to check alarm and status at Board view. f) These above said paragraphs describe general aspect of alarms meaning and relevant maintenance actions that can be done with the information given in the applicatio ns. It is the support for the path level and can be further split into physical level (Transmission media) and Transmission section level.6 and Para 1. To locate it. Like the regenerator and multiplexer sections. Passing on and copying of this document. Domain Alarm Synthesis and Management States Control Panel always present on the window (it resumes all the NE alarms). it may be difficult to detect the link failed.. The ABNORMAL indication informs the operator of the ALS forced condition.8.1. thus enabling the optical power transmission on the opposite direction of the failed link. e) Eventual housekeeping alarms can be localized following the indications given in Para. It constitutes the circuit level support. The troubleshoot procedure with the Craft Terminal consists of the following steps: a) The alarms/status view organization for the equipment is shown in Figure 2. The sections can be either regenerator or multiplexer and utilized for specific functions associated to the EOW channels of the SDH frame. This application gives the details of the detected alarms and helps for their localization. Para 1. Path level It concerns the data transfer between the access points and the path.1. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. The alarms listed ED 01 SC. After having completed the maintenance.1. The interface alarms (or section alarms.4.1. LOS.The NE hierarchy is organized in the following order: NE > rack > subrack > board > port > TP. The ALS states are indicated in the port view. The various units specified in the synchronous multiplexing hierarchy imply structuring the Transmission network into three levels (sublevels of the physical OSI level): • All rights reserved. 5.4 : NE MAINTENANCE 3AL 98104 ADAA 13/44 . Subrack view and Equipment view are also supplied following the indication of Para 1. Troubleshooting with Automatic Laser Shutdown The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) is used to protect the operator who is working with the optical fiber. When the ALS is active. 1.). g) The history of past events can be obtained by means of the Event log option of the Diagnosis pull down menu (see "NE management" section). WARNING: During this phase the operator has to pay attention when working with fibers and connectors. enable the ALS. Table 3. c) It is possible to analyze the detailed alarm presence on the TPs of each ports of the NE. it is necessary to "force on" the ALS.5. b) In case of alarm presence. • Transmission bearer level. The path can be either lower order (LO) or higher order (HO) depending on the capacity of data transferring. It does not depend on the service or on the type of Transmission media. following the indication of Para 1. B2etc.1 Preliminary Concepts and Definitions The following concepts and definitions are considered useful to facilitate maintenance operations with the aid of the previously indicated tables. TU LOP). Figure 3. The above level structuring in the Transmission network is depicted in Figure 3. It is a direct support for the telecommunication services. It superimposes the SDH function and is considered as the transport agent hence no SDH order-wire channel associated functions are required. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.• in the cited tables. This level concerns the transfer of information between the access points and the circuit proper.4 : NE MAINTENANCE 3AL 98104 ADAA 14/44 . All rights reserved. Transmission network level structure ED 01 SC. Circuit level. belong to this level (example: TUAIS. An example of this level alarm is Tributary LOS. Passing on and copying of this document. where path level troubleshooting is required. 5.4 : NE MAINTENANCE 3AL 98104 ADAA 15/44 .4. A message appears in the message area in the bottom left corner of the view. ED 01 SC. Figure 4. Alarms/status view Organization (subrack view) The critical (CRI) or major (MAJ) alarms indicate severe alarms that could have impact on the current traffic (interruption or degrade). A message under the mouse facility provides the alarm or status complete denomination. Thus requiring a rapid intervention to restore the regular working condition of the equipment.2 Alarms/states view Organization (subrack view) All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. OS. Passing on and copying of this document. LAC. presented in Table 5. Indeterminate alarm Synthesis of alarms not associated to the previous Severities. NTP and AC are part of the Management States Control Panel .1. See detailed indication in the following Para. Alarm Synthesis indication Mnemonic CRI MAJ MIN WNG IND Synthesis of alarms that needs immediate troubleShooting (typical: NE isolation). 1.6. 5. 1. MIN.All rights reserved. NB1. Not operative. See detailed indication in the following Para. Major (Urgent) alarm Synthesis of alarms that needs immediate troubleshooting. NB1. Minor (Not urgent) Synthesis of alarms for which a delayed alarm troubleshooting can be defined. MGR. MGR.4. Tableau 2. hence the specific cause of alarm is to be found as indicated in the following paragraphs: 1.4 : NE MAINTENANCE 3AL 98104 ADAA 16/44 . All these indications (except for SUP. EQP.1. The alarms SUP. The alarms CRI. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Reports the colors of the Management States Control Panel when not in "normal" condition.7. COM.1.3 Alarm synthesis indication Alarms and Statuses synthesis are given in all the screens.1. Reports the association between the colors of the Alarms and their Severity. 1. See detailed indication in the following Para. See detailed indication in the following Para. The alarms EXTP. 1. presented in Table 3. Alarm/Status Description Critical alarm Maintenance ED 01 SC.1. IND are part of the Severity Alarms Synthesis area. LAC. Warning alarm Synthesis of alarms due to failure of other NE in the network. Table 1.4.5. COM. WNG. NB1. NB1. Table 1. according to the same rules of previous Tableau 1. Alarms colors and Severity association Alarm Color Severity RED CRITICAL ORANGE MAJOR YELLOW MINOR CYAN WARNING WHITE INDETERMINATE GREEN NO ALARM Table 2.9. MAJ. OS. See detailed indicatio n in the following Para. presented in Table 4. For the Domain Alarms Synthesis the color corresponds to the highest severity among the set of the active alarms for the relevant domain. TRNS are part of the Domain Alarms Synthesis area. and NTP) are the summaries of particular types of alarms detected by the equipment. E. COM NE GREEN: Identifies the “ Enable”operational unreachable/unreachable state of the connection between NE and Craft Terminal (SDH service link up) RED: Identifies the “ Disable”operational state of the connection between NE and Craft Terminal (SDH service link down) Operational System Isolation GREEN: Indicates that the N. Domain Alarm Synthesis indication Mnemonic EXTP SYNC All rights reserved. GREEN: Indicates that the N. GREEN: Indicates that the Craft Terminal has the OS permission to manage the NE (granted). is managed by the 1353SH. See detailed indication in the following Para. CYAN: Indicates that the Craft Terminal has not the OS permission to manage the NE (denied). use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. BROWN: NTP protocol disabled. See unit detailed indication in the following Para.E.Table 3. Table 4. Management States Control Panel. Passing on and copying of this document.4 : NE MAINTENANCE 3AL 98104 ADAA 17/44 . EQP TRNS Alarm/Status Maintenance Description External Point Check the relevant station alarm associated to the (Housekeeping alarm) Input housekeeping indication. is not managed by the 1353SH CYAN: Indicates that the N. CYAN: NTP protocol enabled and at least one NTP servers (main or spare) are reachable. is not managed by the 1354RM OS MGR Manager level NTP Network Time Protocol GREEN: NTP protocol enabled and both NTP servers (main and spare) are unreachable. Synchronization alarm Synthesis of alarms of the Synchronization domain. Transmission alarm Synthesis of alarms of the Transmission domain. See unit detailed indication in the following Para. ED 01 SC.E. Equipment alarm Synthesis of alarms of the Equipment domain. BROWN: NE is not under supervision. Mnemonic SUP Description Supervision state Local Access State Maintenance GREEN: NE is under supervision. See unit detailed indication in the following Para. Used in the OS. is not managed by the 1354RM CYAN: Indicates that the N.E. 4 All rights reserved. laser forced ON or OFF. ED 01 SC. access the Alarm Surveillance (AS) to troubleshoot.). try to restore after ALS NB1: Alarm Severity Assignment Profile can modify the assignment of each alarm root to the various syntheses. forcing the unit into service. Type: active loopbacks. In the synthesis list it is possible to filter the data to show with the detailed view.4 : NE MAINTENANCE 3AL 98104 ADAA 18/44 . Alarm pull down menu After the selection a list with a synthesis of the Alarm Surveillance is presented and immediately after also the detailed list of the Alarm Surveillance (see Figure 6. With the Alarm pull down menu (see Figure 3. for example displaying only the alarms of a specific domain (i. only alarms of the Equipment domain).e. double clicking on the selected row of the sublist of Figure 6. • Figure 5.GREEN: normal operating condition. Passing on and copying of this document. For this purpose select the Diagnosis pull down menu. 5.4. CYAN: detection of an ABNORMAL operative condition.). AC Abnormal Condition Alarm Surveillance (AS) In case of alarm presence. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. It is possible to show all the NE Alarms or filter the alarms report. else if it has been cleared. ED 01 SC.4 : NE MAINTENANCE 3AL 98104 ADAA 19/44 . The alarms scenario is indicated by the colors of the alarms and by the information displayed in the table. The same information is reported in the "Clearing Status" column. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Alarm Surveillance Detailed information of each alarm is supplied. For instance. if an alarm is still active. the whole row has the same color of its relevant "Perceived Severity". the color of the row is green (except the "Perceived Severity"). Passing on and copying of this document.All rights reserved. Figure 6. COMMUNICATION. resource isolation..Probable Cause The fault/problem is indicated. . month. Passing on and copying of this document. starting from the left column: Table 5. replaceable unit missing. i.: loss of signal. MINOR. transmitter degraded.Acknowledge status Indicates if the alarm has been acknowledge (ACK) with the button on the COMPACT ADM unit or not (NACK).: EQUIPMENT. If cleared it has a green background.Repetition counter Not used The information supplied helps the operator during the troubleshooting operation. General aspect of alarms meaning and relevant maintenance actions All rights reserved. Table 6. i. . and TP in which the alarm is detected.e. i. External Points alarms are referred to the input external point relevant to the Housekeeping signals.: / r01sr1sl09/#port01-CE1S .Event Type Indicates the family type of the alarm as subdivided in the ASAP list. The maintenance action must take into account the board where the alarm is detected. day and hour of the alarm. Table 6. .e. .Reservation Status Indicates if the alarm is reserved (RSV) or not (NRSV) according security management.Correlated Not used notification flag .: MAJOR. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Alarm Surveillance information general description TITLE DESCRIPTION . Supply general indications of alarms meaning and relevant maintenance actions that can be done with the information given in the applications..In the following are shortly described the main information obtained in the AS view. PROBABLE CAUSE NAME AND/OR ACRONYM OF DISPLAYED ALARM Loss of signal (LOS) Check line Transmitter Signal (TF) Replace unit Transmitter degraded (TD) Loss of frame (LOF) AIS Excessive BER (EBER) ED 01 MAINTENANCE Replace unit when possible (laser degrade) Check line (alignment problems due to line error) Check connected equipment Check line (excessive line BER) SC.e. They are available for the customer by connecting them to a dedicated subrack connector.Event date and time Indicates year.Clearing status Indicates if the alarm condition is terminated (CLR) or is still active (NCLR). port.Perceived Severity The severity assigned to the alarm is indicated. WARNING . subrack. .4 : NE MAINTENANCE 3AL 98104 ADAA 20/44 . . board. Detailed description of this application is given in the AS Operator's Handbook.Friendly Name Identify the rack. i. with the relevant color.e. . Loss Of MultiFrame PTM.Degraded Signal (DS) Loss of Pointer (LOP) Payload Mismatch (PLM) Far End Received Failure (FERF) Server Signal Failure (SSF) Frequency offset (DRIFT) Loss of timing source (LOSS) Resource Isolation Communication Subsystem Isolation (CSF) Unequipped (U) Referred to Signal Label Unconfigured Equipment Present (UEP) Internal Communication Problem URU . Check MSP protocol (architecture type. If the condition persists it is due to a unit hardware failure: in this case it will activate the RUP alarm ED 01 SC. Passing on and copying of this document.4 : NE MAINTENANCE 3AL 98104 ADAA 21/44 . which will be restored. switch fail) Check payload structure Not operative in current release Check far-end equipment Check far-end equipment Board alarms Insert missing unit Replace unit Insert right unit (unit inserted into a slot set with another type of unit) Update software version by means of download Check the fan units and substitute the faulty one Substitute the board Check LAN interconnection or substitute CONGI unit Internal dialogue problem in the SYNTH unit. Alarm indicates AIS signal received on the TU Check reference and connection between it and the equipment Check reference and connection between it and the equipment Check connection between NE and Craft Terminal Check Communication configuration (LAPD) Configuration error Unit inserted but not declared Reset NE. If persists substitute Compact ADM unit Insert the board Check path / line section interested to the indication.Performance Monitoring Alarm Synthesis CPE-Communication protocol error LOMF .Path Trace Mismatch AUXP Remote Node Transmission error (RNTE) Unit missing (RUM) Unit Problem (RUP) Unit type mismatch (RUTM) Version mismatch (VM) Cooling Fans Failure (CFF) Power Problem (POP) LAN problem (LAN) Internal communication problem (ICP) All rights reserved.Underlying Resource Unavailable PM_AS. Check line (line signal degrade) Check line Configuration error Check far-end equipment Check the entire TU path. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. It indicates a temporary condition. ED 01 SC. Passing on and copying of this document. Off = Laser off (when ALS is created). Where the relevant maintenance actions are reported too. Figure 7. For each TP of the Port a detail of the relevant alarms is presented. To Figure 9 is an example of a Port view. The non-alarmed condition of an alarm icon is represented by a green color and a ".MSP protection (if enable) . The alarms. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.4 : NE MAINTENANCE 3AL 98104 ADAA 22/44 . In test = the laser restart has been automatically activated.Automatic Laser Shutdown state . following the indication of the Port View chapter on the previous Section of this Handbook. On the port view the messages displayed at the bottom provide information about: . Forced off = ALS forced off by operator command.4. The alarmed condition is represented by the color of its severity (as assigned by the ASAP) and an "X" signs in the box. in this way facilitating the identification of the alarm or status or object. All rights reserved. Undefined = The ALS is not present (not created).5 Port View alarms It is also possible to analyze the detailed alarm presence on the TPs of each ports of the NE." sign in the box.State of the connection for Ethernet port (available only if an Ethernet port has been selected) A message under the mouse indicator provides the name of the alarm or object on which it is located.5. are listed in Table 7. Forced on = ALS forced on by operator command. The information regarding ALS states and Laser state useful for operators safety purpose are reported in the following: ALS states: Inactive = No ALS has been activated (Off) or the laser has been Forced ON/OFF. Laser state: On = all OK or ALS not present (not created). which can be found in the Port view. Active = The ALS has been activated (O n). Passing on and copying of this document. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. ED Figure 7.4 : NE MAINTENANCE 3AL 98104 ADAA 23/44 . Example of SDH Port View alarms (with MSP schema) 01 SC.All rights reserved. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Passing on and copying of this document.4 : NE MAINTENANCE 3AL 98104 ADAA 24/44 . ED Figure 8. Example of ATM Port View alarms 01 SC.All rights reserved. to indicate whether the port is alarmed.All rights reserved. Example of Ethernet Port View alarms 5. following the indication of the Board View chapter on the previous Section of this Handbook. Figure 9.4.6 Board view alarms and states The alarm and status indications at Board level can be obtained. Passing on and copying of this document. ED 01 SC. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. The alarm and status indications depend on the unit type. An alarm box is displayed on each port.4 : NE MAINTENANCE 3AL 98104 ADAA 25/44 . for example SDH units is organized on two levels of presentation (in the first is selected one of the available ports) and each view contains dedicated indications. 4 : NE MAINTENANCE 3AL 98104 ADAA 26/44 . The alarms. Passing on and copying of this document. A message under the mouse indicator provides the name of the alarm or object on which it is located. The alarms of the board are reported at the bottom of the "message/status area". are listed in Table 7. where the relevant maintenance actions are reported too. which can be found in the Board view. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. In the view is present the Administrative State information: "in service" or "out of service". The non-alarmed condition of an alarm icon is represented by a green color. An indication in the "message/status area" provides information about the board Administrative State: "in-service" or "out-of-service". ED 01 SC.. The alarmed condition is represented by the color of its severity (as assigned by the ASAP). in this way facilitating the identification of the alarm or status or object. by means of various boxes containing relevant acronyms.All rights reserved. In the view can also be present EPS indications. All rights reserved. Example of SDH Board View alarms and status 3AL 98104 ADAA 27/44 . ED 01 SC. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Passing on and copying of this document.4 : NE MAINTENANCE Figure 10. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. following the indications given on the previous Section of this Handbook ("NE management"). (Administrative State information). This board alarm summarization is activated when one of the board alarms (those reported at the bottom of the Board view) is active. Example of PDH Board View alarms and status 5. A message under the mouse indicator provides the name of the alarm or object on which it is located.All rights reserved. An alarm box is displayed on each board. to indicate whether the board is alarmed. ED 01 SC. in this way facilitating the identification of the alarm or status or object. Figure 11.7 Subrack and Rack view alarms The alarms and status indications at subrack and rack level can be obtained. the lack of this symbol indicates its "out-of-service" state.4 : NE MAINTENANCE 3AL 98104 ADAA 28/44 . Passing on and copying of this document. A "lock" symbol on a board indicates that it is "in-service". Else.4. Example of Subrack view alarms and status 01 SC. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.4 : NE MAINTENANCE 3AL 98104 ADAA 29/44 .All rights reserved. ED Figure 12. Passing on and copying of this document. (Connected FAN to CONGI#10 or connected FAN to CONGI#12) Temperature Out Of Range (TOOR): verify the Fan unit alarm and in presence of faulty substitute the relevant unit. • • • Battery Failure (BF): check that the station battery cables are right connected Cabling Problem (CAP): check that the alarms cable between the Fans Subrack and the CONGI unit is right connected. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Figure 13.4. check also the configuration in the Equipment menu.8 Fans Subrack alarms view To obtain Fan Subrack alarms indications click twice with the mouse on the relevant subrack drawing in the rack level view.All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document.4 : NE MAINTENANCE 3AL 98104 ADAA 30/44 . 01 ED SC. Example of Rack view alarm and status 5. clean also the Dust filter if necessary. Figure 14. following the indication of the Equipment View chapter on the previous Section of this Handbook. Passing on and copying of this document.4 : NE MAINTENANCE 3AL 98104 ADAA 31/44 . Fans subrack alarms view 5. 01 ED SC.9 Equipment View alarms The alarm indications at Equipment level can be obtained. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.All rights reserved.4. • • Fuse Failure (FF): Substitute the fuse in the CONGI unit and search for a cause AND Battery Failure (ABF): Failure of the Service Power Supply connected to the CONGI Rack connector. Figure 15. for details choose the Internal Link Monitor option of the Diagnosis menu. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Example of Equipment View alarms and status ED 01 SC. These alarms can be observed at OS level. Passing on and copying of this document.4 : NE MAINTENANCE 3AL 98104 ADAA 32/44 .• • Backplane Failure (BKF): Substitute the Termination BUS Specific Hardware Diagnostic (SDH): Indicate the presence of link failure between the MATRIX and one of the units. All rights reserved. " ---> means non-alarmed condition. a red flag is represented near the state of the concerned point. following the indication of the External Points chapter on the previous Section of this Handbook.5. All rights reserved. If the external point is active (On).10 External Points alarms (Housekeeping) The alarms and status indications relevant to External Points (housekeeping) can be obtained. The change of color. "On" when the alarm is raised. In case of input point the alarm state is reported also in the user label column. by the box near its name: Green color and sign ". use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. as assigned by the severity (ASAP) ---> means alarmed condition. else "Off".4. Example of External Points alarms and status ED 01 SC.4 : NE MAINTENANCE 3AL 98104 ADAA 33/44 . Passing on and copying of this document. Figure 16. The external state represents the alarm state. WARNING: In order to avoid short Circuit. Here a layout figure indicates the exact location of all the setting arrangements and a table relates the operations to achieve with the settings. .Hardware set the spare unit exactly as the unit to replace. • Spares with installed software.) . Don’ t insert the units that have been damaged during the transport/storing or in a phase before their replacing. Switch--off the relevant Station battery fuse breaker. They depend on the following maintenance conditions: .S.2.With regard to the IP MATRIX unit refer to paragraph 6. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Subsequently remove the Station Battery cable and extract the CONGI unit. The cited documents are enclosed in the Technical Handbook.4 : NE MAINTENANCE 3AL 98104 ADAA 34/44 . . 6. follow the indication given in paragraph 7. Settings are specified in the MS documents. ..With regard to the ATM MATRIX 4X4 unit refer to paragraph 6. or belonging to other types of equipment or unknown. In this paragraph for COMPACT ADM is generically intended one of the following unit: . ED 01 SC. .Type of spares available: • Spare without software installed. belonging to the same type of equipment but with SW release differing from the one of the unit to replace.1 COMPACT ADM unit replacement N. before substituting the CONGI unit. belonging to the same type of equipment and with SW release identical to the unit to replace. The replacement procedures are executed as follows: . No particular indication is given as to spare handling. and Figure 18.Simply replace those units not provided with any software settings .3.B. .EPS protection of the COMPACT ADM unit • EPS present or not (typically present) • Failure on the Main board • Failure on the Spare board .SYNTH16N Various procedures are utilized to replace a COMPACT ADM faulty unit.MIB store in the Craft Terminal or O.CONGI unit version (read NOTES in Figure 17. WARNING: before inserting the new spare unit carefully checks the integrity of the relative connectors. • Spares with installed software.When upgrading equipment with “ New Hardware”(for example SYNTHN unit) that substitutes the old units (for example SYNTH unit). This is the normal condition.With regard to the COMPACT ADM (also called SYNTH or SYNTHN) unit refer to paragraph 6. which is left to the Maintenance Administration.SYNTH16 .6 Unit replacement with a spare All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document. Passing on and copying of this document. The procedure aim is to replace the faulty unit without causing configuration changes and/or unwanted faults. Replacement problems: When replacing the COMPACT ADM unit the traffic of the two SDH ports is lost when not SNCP protected. Illustrates the procedures to follow For the COMPACT ADM substitution.4 : NE MAINTENANCE 3AL 98104 ADAA 35/44 . And Figure 18. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Then it is suggested to replace in low traffic condition.The flow charts of Figure 17. ED 01 SC. when not possible this is indicated in the flow chart. All rights reserved. All rights reserved. ED 01 SC.4 : NE MAINTENANCE Figure 17. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Passing on and copying of this document. COMPACT ADM unit replacement (EPS protected) 3AL 98104 ADAA 36/44 . COMPACT ADM unit replacement (EPS not protected) 3AL 98104 ADAA 37/44 . ED 01 SC. Passing on and copying of this document. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.All rights reserved.4 : NE MAINTENANCE Figure 18. The procedure aim is to replace the faulty unit without causing configuration changes and/or unwanted faults. All rights reserved. Illustrates the procedures to follow for the ATM MATRIX 4X4 when it is not EPS protected.4 : NE MAINTENANCE 3AL 98104 ADAA 38/44 . The flow-charts of Figure 19. Illustrates the procedures to follow for the ATM MATRIX 4X4 when it is EPS protected. ATM MATRIX 4X4 unit replacement without EPS protection ED 01 SC.2 Two ATM MATRIX 4X4 unit replacement different procedures are available for ATM MATRIX 4X4 substitution according to the EPS schema. Passing on and copying of this document. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. The flow-charts of Figure 20.6. Figure 19. Figure 20.4 : NE MAINTENANCE 3AL 98104 ADAA 39/44 .All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. ATM MATRIX 4X4 unit replacement with EPS protection 6. ED 01 SC.3 IP MATRIX unit replacement For IP MATRIX unit replacement refer to the specific Operator’ s Handbook. At the end of the procedure a RUTM (unit type mismatch) alarm will be present.4 : NE MAINTENANCE 3AL 98104 ADAA 40/44 . to maintain the system “ in service” . This procedure permits.. The new Hardware is identifying by the “ N”letter at the end of the acronym unit (for example SYNTHN is the new version. On Craft Terminal in the Subrack level view select the SYNTHN unit in slot 6 Select the Modify option from the Equipment menu and select the SYNTHN acronym from the list then click on ok. All rights reserved.1 SYNTH substitution with SYNTHN According to the EPS and SNCP SYNTH protection scheme different procedure are available: [1] Upgrading with a new SYNTHN EPS not protected Substituting the old SYNTH all the traffic is lost! • • • • • Remove the old SYNTH in slot 6 from the subrack Before inserting the new SYNTHN in subrack slot 6. follow the instruction described in Figure 21. Passing on and copying of this document. SYNTH without “ N”is the old version). if the equipment is EPS protected and inserted in a protected network (linear or ring protection). Verify that the RUTM alarm disappear ED 01 SC. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.7 UPGRADING WITH NEW HARDWARE In the next paragraphs is indicated the procedure to follow when upgrading an equipment with “ New Hardware” . 7. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. • ED Remove first the old SYNTH in slot 15 from the subrack 01 SC.4 : NE MAINTENANCE 3AL 98104 ADAA 41/44 .All rights reserved. the traffic of all the other board will not be lost. Upgrading with a new SYNTHN EPS not protected [2] Upgrading with a new SYNTHN EPS protected Supposing that the STM-16 ports are not network protected. Passing on and copying of this document. Figure 21. their traffic will be lost during the substitution. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.. At the end of the procedure a RUTM (unit type mismatch) alarm will be present. On Craft Terminal in the Subrack level view select the SYNTHN unit in slot 6 Select the Modify option from the Equipment menu and select the SYNTHN acronym from the list then click on ok. For details see the paragraph “ Switching EPS”in the “ NE MANAGEMENT” section of this Handbook. follow the instruction described in Figure 22. Passing on and copying of this document.4 : NE MAINTENANCE 3AL 98104 ADAA 42/44 . Insert the new SYNTHN into the subrack slot 15. On Craft Terminal in the Subrack level view select the SYNTHN unit in slot 15 Select the Modify option from the Equipment menu and select the SYNTH acronym from the list then click on ok. Verify that the RUTM alarm disappear Force the EPS Switching on SYNTHN in slot 15 by selecting the Switch option from the EPS menu. Remove the old SYNTH in slot 6 from the subrack Before inserting the new SYNTHN in subrack slot 6. a RUTM (unit type mismatch) alarm will be present. Verify that the RUTM alarm disappear ED 01 SC.• • • • • • • • • • All rights reserved. Upgrading with a new SYNTHN EPS protected [3] Upgrading with a new SYNTHN EPS protected with STM-N ports SNCP protected ED 01 SC. Passing on and copying of this document. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.All rights reserved. Figure 22.4 : NE MAINTENANCE 3AL 98104 ADAA 43/44 . L-42N During the substitution the traffic carried by the units will be lost if not SNCP protected. All rights reserved. S-41N. L-42 units respectively with S-41N. the same procedure can be applied to substitute the S-41.2 P4S1. on Craft Terminal a RUTM (unit type mismatch) alarm will be present. • On Craft Terminal in the Subrack level view select the slot where the new unit has been inserted • Select the Modify option from the Equipment menu and select the acronym of the new unit (in our example P4S1N) from the list. then click on ok.4 : NE MAINTENANCE 3AL 98104 ADAA 44/44 . S-41. 7. • Remove the old unit (example P4S1) from the subrack • Insert the new unit (example P4S1N) into the subrack slot previously occupied by the old unit. L-41N. L-42 substitution with P4S1N. But without traffic interruption on the STM-16 ports present on the SYNTH because SNCP protected. In the following an example will be given substituting a P4S1 with a P4S1N. Passing on and copying of this document. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. L-41N. L-42N units. L-41.The procedure is the same of that described on point [2]. L-41. • Verify that the RUTM alarm disappear END OF DOCUMENT ED 01 SC. Alcatel 1662SMC Rel2.Alcatel 1662SMC Rel2.5: SIBDL 3AL 98104 ADAA 1/16 .1 Download and SIBDL Configuration 01 ED 2004-04-21 DATE Creation CHANGE NOTE APPROVED BY Ma Jing PREPARED BY Distribution: Internal External √ ED 01 SC. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.1 Operator Handbook All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document. 5 2.................................................................................................... 11 3........1...........................1.................. 11 3..................................................................................1 SCOPE .............................. 11 3...... 4 1................................................................................................. 4 1......... Passing on and copying of this document... 4 1.........................................................................1 Acronyms and abbreviations......1.........................................2 Serial Cable Modem configuration for Windows NT environment ......................... 5 3 CONFIGURATION FOR SIBDL ...................................................1 SIBDL download procedure ...............................................1 PURPOSE OF THE PROCEDURE ...........1 Remote Access Service configuration (only needed for Windows NT environment)........... 11 3.............................. 4 1.2 Glossary of terms...................................................2 Target audience....................5: SIBDL 3AL 98104 ADAA 2/16 ............ 12 ED 01 SC........................ 4 1............................................... 4 1...................................2 TERMINOLOGY .................................................. 2 DOWNLOAD WITH SIBDL....................................... use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization...............................2.. 5 2..............1 Document scope ..................................................1...................LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES ...................................................................... 3 1 INTRODUCTION....................................1 PURPOSE OF THE PROCEDURE ...................................................... 4 All rights reserved........1......................................2....................................................................................3 Serial Cable Modem configuration for Windows 2000 environment ................................1.......................... .................... SIBDL download procedure ..............step 3 ....... use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization................................................................ SIBDL download procedure ...................... 8 Figure 5.......................................LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES Figure 1........... 9 Figure 6............................................................ SIBDL download procedure .step 7 ........................ 9 Figure 7....... 15 Figure 12.............................. 16 All rights reserved.......... Serial Cable Modem configuration . Serial Cable Modem configuration ..............................................................step 5......................................step 3............step 4 ... SIBDL download procedure ...... 7 Figure 3................................... 8 Figure 4.............step 2 ................................. 14 Figure 11.......step 1 ...............step 1.....................step 4. ED 01 SC............................. 10 Figure 8..step 6 ............................................. SIBDL download procedure ...... SIBDL download procedure . 14 Figure 10.........................................step 2............................................................. SIBDL download procedure ......... 6 Figure 2........................ Serial Cable Modem configuration .............. 12 Figure 9............................................... Serial Cable Modem configuration .................5: SIBDL 3AL 98104 ADAA 3/16 ..................................................................... Serial Cable Modem configuration . Passing on and copying of this document....................step 5 ........................... 2 Target audience The SIBDL Manual is intended for all users. Passing on and copying of this document. Configurations to be performed for SIBDL operation are described. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.1.1 Document scope The SIBDL Manual describes the SIBDL application.1 1.1. ED 01 SC. Download with SIBDL.2.2.1 Basic Operator's Handbook Terminology 1.2 Glossary of terms Refer to the Section Introduction manual. See Chapter on page Configuration for SIBDL. The comple te procedure is indicated. 1. 1. 1.1 INTRODUCTION Scope 1.2 1. used to download the NE software via Q or F interface. The SIBDL (Standard Image Binary Download) procedure contains the following operative descriptions: • • All rights reserved.5: SIBDL 3AL 98104 ADAA 4/16 . The documents that should be read before starting this document are: • 1320CT Rel.1 Acronyms and abbreviations Refer to the Section Introduction manual. TEL NET Accessory. Protocol Service. When using the Q interface the time necessary to the operation is reduced to some minute. always connect both the F and Q interface. presented in the previous section.1 DOWNLOAD WITH SIBDL Purpose of the procedure This procedure describes how to download NE software with the SIBDL (Standard Image Binary Download) program. Protocol Service. When download by means of F interface.1. Serial Cable Modem refer in Para Serial Cable Modem configuration for Windows 2000 environment N.1 SIBDL download procedure Download with SIBDL program is performed in the following phases: All rights reserved. 2. defined by the NT Administrator. In Windows 2000 environment. ATTENTION: Download with SIBDL program put the COMPACT ADM unit out of service regarding to the supervision and control function. it should have configured. ED 01 SC. WARNING: In Windows NT environment.5: SIBDL 3AL 98104 ADAA 5/16 . before to use SIBDL: • • TCP/IP protocol. RAS (Remote Access Service) and Serial Cable Modem. defined by the NT Administrator. connect only the F interface. RAS (Remote Access Service) is not necessary in Windows 2000 environment To download with SIBDL execute the following steps: 1) Connect the Craft Terminal with the NE: • • When download by means of Q interface. when activating the NE. SIBDL tool permits to download the software towards the NE using the Q interface (Ethernet connection) or the F interface RS232 (serial line) of the NE. It must not be executed to download a spare unit that contains software. • • Turn on phase. before to use SIBDL: • • TCP/IP protocol. Maintenance phase.2 2. it should have configured. TEL NET Accessory. in this case use the Download option of the EML-USM. while the traffic is not lost. Passing on and copying of this document. and the spare one don’ t contain software.B. when substituting the COMPACT ADM unit with a spare. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. If the software to download manage the SDH+ATM/IP functionality.2) Start SIBDL.d sc) ED 01 SC.step 1 4) In the field "source file" at the bottom write the path name of the NE descriptor file (see Figure 2. select the file descriptor in the directory 1662SMC (example: /ALCATEL/Q3CT_Pv1. which appears (see Figure 1. select "automatic mode" commands typing 8 and then ENTER.05/FTservices/data/1662SMC/2. SIBDL download procedure . All rights reserved.1b.1b. Passing on and copying of this document. select the file descriptor in the directory 1662SMC(example:/ALCATEL/Q3CT_Pv1.). Create the NE software package as explained in the paragraph "NE Software package installation procedure" NE MANAGEMENT of this Manual. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. 2. selecting Start > Program>Alcatel>SIBDL"version">SIBDL 3) In the screen.09/1662.3. Figure 1. If the software to download manage only the SDH functionality.) with the command menu. The path name has typically the following format (see the example in the figure): <Directory>/<NE name and release number>/<file descriptor> Note: In current release it is possible to download two types of file descriptor according to the following rules: 1.3.dsc) 3.05/FTservices/data/1662SMC/2.5: SIBDL 3AL 98104 ADAA 6/16 .09/1662. SIBDL download procedure .With F interface: write PPP and press ENTER .) asks for the "IP Address" insertion. Figure 2.step 2 5) Press ENTER 6) This step (see Figure 3. Passing on and copying of this document. which appears. write the IP Address of the Craft Terminal • Second possibility: write the IP Address of the NE and press ENTER ED 01 SC. In the field "NE_IP_address [PPP TEL NET]" at the bottom: .All rights reserved. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.With Q interface: • First possibility: write TELNET and press ENTER In next step.5: SIBDL 3AL 98104 ADAA 7/16 . ) asks if the flash card must be formatted.ste p 4 ED 01 SC. as result of this action the program ask for a confirmation (see Figure 5. Passing on and copying of this document. SIBDL download procedure . Type "y " to format the flash card.5: SIBDL 3AL 98104 ADAA 8/16 . Figure 3.All rights reserved.) Figure 4. SIBDL download procedure .step 3 7) This step (see Figure 4. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. The screen shows the automatic download evolution with a final message indicating the completed download (see Figure 6. Figure 5.All rights reserved. SIBDL download procedure . On the contrary repeat the procedure. 10) In the presented screen type 4 (see Figure 7.). ED 01 SC. Passing on and copying of this document.step 6 9) Press ENTER.5: SIBDL 3AL 98104 ADAA 9/16 .) and ENTER. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. SIBDL download procedure . Figure 6.step 5 8) Type "y ” . SIBDL download procedure . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. execute Start supervision and NE login 14) From Craft Terminal (EML-USM view) execute the normal download procedure: N.step 7 11) Extract and re.Select Init download from Download menu . Figure 7.insert the EQUICO unit to complete the operation.All rights reserved.Press OK to complete the operation In this condition the download is executed immediately. ED 01 SC.Select the SW package to Download and click on OK button In this condition the download is executed immedia tely . Check that no RUTM alarm is present in the slot reserved to the main MATRIXN.B. 12) Extract and re. If RUTM alarm is present means the board type inserted in t he subrack (typically MATRIXN in this release) and the board type software configured (typically MATRIX) is not the same. .insert again the EQUICO unit to complete the operation 13) Run the 1320CT application.Select the Software Package loaded as explained above and activate it . under this condition the user must change the board type with the Equipment->Set menu.5: SIBDL 3AL 98104 ADAA 10/16 . Passing on and copying of this document.Select Unit info from Download menu . Push the button "OK" in "Add RAS Device" window.. I will select him from a list" and push the "Next > " button. • • • • • Double click on "My computer" icon on the PC desktop and double click on "Control panel" icon. Put a tick against "Don't detect my modem. • • • Follow the instructions. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.3 3. 01 SC. Select the folder "Services" in the "Network" window. then execute: All rights reserved.. the user should have administrator privileges and need the installation CDROM of Windows NT.. Put a tick against "Selected ports" and select only one port (the port must be available. after push the button "Open". 3.” Push the button "add" in "Remote Access Setup" window. Double click on "Network" icon. Push the button "Browse. Double click on "Network" icon. then execute: • • Double click on "My computer" icon on the PC desktop and double click on "Control panel" icon. Push the button "Have disk. Search the folder where SIBDL is installed (Alcatel / SIBDL "version" / SIBDL /) and select the file "mdmalca.1..1 Remote Access Service configuration (only needed for Windows NT environment) To install a new modem.2 Serial Cable Modem configuration for Windows NT environment To install a new modem. Follow the instructions. i..e. Passing on and copying of this document.1. Push the button "Install Modem" in "Add RAS Device" window: start the "Install New Modem" window. not used by another RAS modem) and push the button "Next >".1 CONFIGURATION FOR SIBDL Purpose of the procedure This chapter describes the configurations to be performed for SIBDL operation..”start the window Install from disk. Push the button "Continue" in "Remote Access Setup" window. Select the modem named "Serial cable" in the dialog box of window "Install New Modem" and push the button "Next >". Select the folder "Services" in the "Network" window and push the button "Add": start the "Select Network Service" window.inf". the user should have administrator privileges. Select Remote Access Service (RAS) in the dialog box. 3.5: SIBDL ED 3AL 98104 ADAA 11/16 . • • • • • • Select "Remote Access Service" and push button "Properties. • Push the button "OK" in window "Install from disk". use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.. Figure 8. Put a tick against "Don't detect my modem. Push the button "OK" on the "Install from disk" window.step 1 • • • • Push the button "Have disk.3 Serial Cable Mode m configuration for Windows 2000 environment To install a new modem. Double click on "Phone and Modem Options" icon and select the "Modems" folder. Passing on and copying of this document. Serial Cable Modem configuration . • • • All rights reserved. after push the button "Open". 01 SC. you should have administrator privileges..5: SIBDL ED 3AL 98104 ADAA 12/16 . • Double click on "My computer" icon on your PC desktop and double click on "Control panel" icon..”the window "Install from disk" will appear. 3. Push the button "Add": "Add/Remove Hardware Wizard: Install New Modem" window will appear.inf"..• Push the button "OK" in "Network" window.1." Search the folder where SIBDL is installed and select the file "mdmalca. I will select it from a list" and push the button "Next >". Push the button "Browse. All rights reserved. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Passing on and copying of this document.5: SIBDL 3AL 98104 ADAA 13/16 .• Select the modem named "Serial cable" into dialog box from "Install New Modem" window and push the button "Next >". ED 01 SC. Figure 10. ED 01 SC. and after the button "Finish" to end modem installation. All rights reserved. i.step 2 • Put a tick against "Selected ports" and select only one port (the serial port must be available. not used by another RAS modem) and push the button "Next >". Serial Cable Modem configuration . Passing on and copying of this document.e.5: SIBDL 3AL 98104 ADAA 14/16 . use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.Figure 9. Serial Cable Modem configuration .step 3 • The window "Digital Signature Not found" will appear: push the button "Yes". 5: SIBDL 3AL 98104 ADAA 15/16 . Figure 11. the "Phone and Modem Options" window will display the installed modem ED 01 SC. Serial Cable Modem configuration .step 4 • At the end.All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. step 5 01 SC.5: SIBDL END OF DOCUMENT 3AL 98104 ADAA 16/16 . Passing on and copying of this document.All rights reserved. use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization. Serial Cable Modem configuration . ED Figure 12.